THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES - fcl, U. Copyright. 1893, by the Author. HAVEN'S COMPLETE MANUAL PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. ADAPTED TO SELF-INSTRUCTION AND THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. NO OTHER SHORT-HAND BOOK NEEDED. The only Treatise on the Art embracing the Secrets of the Profession, together with al! New Discoveries of Value up to date of Publication. Presenting within its pages the Author's " 300-Words-a-Minute Short-Hand Lessons," and his complete original Routine for qualifying Students for Office Short- Hand Positions within three months from date of first lesson, Court and Convention Reporting in six to nine months, making NO failures where directions are followed. BY CURTIS HAVEN, EXPERT LAW AND CONVENTION RFPORTER, JOURNALIST , AUTHOR, AND TEACHER OF OVER TWENTY YKARS 1 KXPKRIhNCK. PHILADELPHIA, PA. PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOR. 1902 TO HER AT WHOSE KNEE MY FIRST CHILDISH ATTEMPTS AT UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES OF THE ROMAN ALPHABET \YERE MADE; WHO SO PRACTICALLY DIRECTED MY SCHOOL-BOY STUDIES; WHO ASSISTED ME OVER THE ROUGH PLACES OF MY EARLY PHONOGRAPHIC EFFORTS; AND BY WHOSE PRACTICAL GOOD-SENSE AND WISE TEACH- INGS I SHALL ALWAYS BE PROFITED AND NEVER FORGET: THIS BOOK IS MOST RESPECTFULLY AND AFFECTIONATELY DEDICATED BY THE AUTHOR NOTE The above dedication was written by the author, Curtis Haven, and was printed in his first edition of this book, since which date the publisher of a garbled shorthand work, has had the audacity to copy above wording in his own book, as if it were original with him. Even a dedication is not sacred with some people. CONTENTS. PART I. EXPLANATORY. PAGE. NECESSITIES TO A PRACTICAL SYSTEM OF PHONOGRAPHY 5 PHONOGRAPHERS vs. STENOGRAPHERS 6 SHORTHAND HISTORY 7 ABOUT SHORTHAND SKILL IN THREE MONTHS 10 THAT WORD "SYSTEM" 20 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION FOR THE STUDENT 20 300-WORDS-A-MINUTE 22 FART II. I THE INSTRUCTOR. >- LESSON I. DEFINITION 23 PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY 23 SPELLING BY POSITION 25 LESSON II. TIMELY SUGGESTIONS 28 5 SMALL VISIBLE LETTERS 28 PEN OR PENCIL 31 LESSON III. FINAL LIST OF VISIBLE LETTERS 32 THE COMPLETE VISIBLE ALPHABET 33 THE CIRCLES S AND Z 35 C, X and Q 37 taj HOLDING THE PENCIL 38 E LESSON IV. ADDITIONAL USE OF THE VISIBLE VOWELS 39 p COALESCING VISIBLE VOWELS 40 VISIBLE VOWEL JUNCTURES 41 THE INVISIBLE ALPHABET 41 IMPORTANCE OF SPELLING BY SOUND 43 POSITION VOCALIZATION 44 LESSON V. THE BEGINNING HOOKS 4/ LESSON VI. FINAL HOOKS 54 THE ST AND STR LOOPS 58 LESSON VII. THE HALVING PRINCIPLE 61 CONSONANTS OF DOUBLE AND TRIPLE SIZE 61 INVISIBLE INDICATION OF PRECEDING VOWELS 62 LESSON VIII. THE WORD-SIGNS 65 POINTS TO REMEMBER 73 (Hi) 449514 IV CONTENTS. LESSON IX. COMMON ABBREVIATIONS 74 LESSON X. HOOKED ABBREVIATIONS 81 WORDS INDICATED BY HOOKS 82 SOUND SYLLABLES 83 Ns VERSUS S 84 RESPECTING PRACTICE . 85 LESSON XI. COMPOUND ABBREVIATIONS 88 PHRASE POSITIONS go WORDS COMMENCING WITH X AND Q go EXPEDIENCES 92 LESSON XII. HALF-LENGTH ABBREVIATIONS , 98 THE NUMERALS 99 PROPER NAMES AND INITIALS 103 SYLLABLE ABBREVIATION 105 PREFIXES 106 AFFIXES 107 THE USE OF THE PREFIXES AND AFFIXES 107 PHRASE COMBINATIONS 109 OMITTED WORDS no PUNCTUATION 1 1 1 REPEATED WORDS n i REVIEW EXERCISES 1 16 PART III. THE READER. GENERAL DIRECTIONS 139 BUSINESS LETTER PRACTICE 140 ACTUAL COURT CASES 160 THE REPORTING 161 THE TRANSCRIPTION : 166 CONVENTION REPORTING 226 EXPLANATORY NOTES 260 SPEECH REPORTING : 271 A LECTURE BY FRANCIS MURPHY 272 SHORTHAND SYSTEMS ILLUSTRATED 2^0 PART IV. THE VOCABULARY. TO THE STUDENT 282 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF WORDS AND PHRASES.. . 282 PART L EXPLANATORY. NECESSITIES TO A PRACTICAL SYSTEM OF PHONOG- RAPHY. Aside from the ordinary facilities requisite for learning or teaching the art, there are three absolute necessities to a practical system of short-handwriting. They are: speed, legibility, and an almost entire absence of arbitrary rules and characters. Without the latter, years long years of hard study and harder practice, combined with an exceedingly retentive memory, is the price the learner pays for his skill. Hence, it is simply fallacious to acquire stenography, an art that is wholly arbitrary in its character, and even though it may be arranged by a modern author, is as antiquated as many Indian relics, and bears the same relation to phonography that the olden time scythe bears to the latest improved mowing machine. Without speed, vebatim reporting is, of course, impossible; therefore it is equally a waste of time to learn any old-style phonography, which though easily read when written, makes very few rapid writers and only of those students who are willing to give many years to the closest practice. Without legibility, however, even speed is of no avail. The student should, therefore, be on his guard against a phonography which gives enough speed to keep pace with the whirlwind, but which, to obtain this speed, uses such an extended array of contractions, necessitating special dictionaries and phrase books, that ease in reading one's notes becomes a secondary consideration. Better, far better, be able to re- (5) 6 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. port little, and correctly transcribe that little, than to jot down with electrical rapidity, the utterances of the swiftest speaker, and after- wards to be uncertain of the accuracy of one's transcription. The author is not cognizant of the existence of a method of shorthand writing, previous to the publication of this PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY, that is not deficient in one or more of the above mentioned respects. Here, it may be asked, How is it, then, that before the advent of PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY, there were professional short-hand writers, who were and are both accurate and rapid? To this, it must be said, with truth, that, as with members of other professions, these talented and skilled ones are not at all numerous, and it is questionable if any of them write other than an adulterated phonography, founded, doubtless, upon one system, but interpolated afterwards with scraps of other pho- nographies and the phonographer's own particular contractions for particular kinds of work. This ultimatum has been a necessity, here- tofore, among those who would become experts, without wasting the best portion of their time for years, in dull, monotonous practice. It was to bring order out of that phonographic chaos, which brought PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY into being; and the author has every reason to believe that he has succeeded in accomplishing his purpose. PRAC- TICAL PHONOGRAPHY is more free from arbitrary characters than any other known system of phonography, contains the elements of greater speed* with less practice, and is as easily rea'd as the most legible: thereby combining the necessary virtues of all its predecessors without being shackled with any of their bad qualities. PHONOGRAPHERS VS. STENOGRAPHERS. To classical students and scholars, these two names imply their indi- vidual and distinctive meanings. But, it is a singular fact that educat- ed people in general, among whom are actually included some short- hand writers, do not know, or are careless of, the difference existing between these two classes of individuals; in fact, do not know that any difference exists. Their avocation, if not the result of their labors, is the same, and people generally conclude them to be identical. From this error arises the mistake, common even among those who know better, of universally applying the name " stenographer " to all short- hand writers. For instance, there is probably not a single case wherein a stenographer is employed in a professional capacity in any of ur city, * NOTE. The author reported the speech of Mr. Francis Murphy (See Part III.) on the evening of Us delivery, inexactly six minutes by the watch, making an average of over 268 words per minute while, upon special occasions, he has written at a rate of over 300 words a minute. HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 7 state or national courts. On the other hand, there is scarcely any court of any importance that does not employ at times one or more phono- graphers; and yet, in addressing them, the learned judge and counsel use the misnomer of "Mr. Stenographer." This constant acceptation of a wrong term, gives many persons who are about to study shorthand writing, an idea that stenography, not phonography, is the art to learn; ''For," they ask, "are there not stenographers employed in our courts?" an idea, which, as above explained, is a dangerously mistaken one. In many instances, phonographers themselves employ the word steno- grapher in advertising their business, on their sign or card; but that does not alter the fact of their being phonographers, however much it may mislead searchers after the true art. Let them misuse these terms as they may, however, a phonographer, under whatever guise, still re- mains one who writes by means of signs used to represent the elementary sounds of the human voice, which sounds are the basis of all spoken language; while a stenographer is merely one who writes by means of a horrid conglomeration of arbitrary written characters representing the Roman alphabet, words and phrases, and who, when a word seldom used and which he has never before heard (and consequently never memorized) is spoken, will either have to invent a sign which may or may not conflict with some other sign in his vocabulary, or run the risk of losing the thread of the discourse while he writes the word in full. SHORTHAND HISTORY. The true origin of rapid shorthand writing is involved in doubt. It has been attributed to the ancient Hebrews, the Egyptians, the Chinese^ the Greeks, the Romans, and the ancient people of Slavonia, by as many different historians; the claim in favor of the Romans being, how- ever, much stronger and more fully verified than those of other nations. The first shorthand writer among the Romans was Marcus Tullius Tiro, a freedman of Cicero's, who is said to have compiled a system and used it successfully B. C. 63. Tiro taught his system to the govern- ment scribes of that day, and by them it was, in turn, imparted to their successors. After the conquest of England by the Romans, it was transplanted to British soil, undergoing but few modifications up to the seventeenth century, when J. Willis, 1602, the first modern shorthand writer of eminence, made considerable alterations in the alphabet and in the application of its junctures. Mr. Willis was followed by numer- ous authors, many of whom, however, dropped some of their immediate predecessors' and substituted Tiro's original characters; so that, in 8 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. looking over the alphabets of modern writers, we find many who make use of several of the original Tironian characters. Carstairs, in 1829, employs a Tironian T, and even as late as 1871, Scovil holds to the original Tironian C, more than eighteen hundred years since Cicero's noted secretary invented it. All systems of shorthand were, however, until the present century, merely stenographies, (as Scovil's, Cross' and some others are today;, and being stenographies, therefore devoid of many advantages of speed and legibility peculiar to the phonographic systems, all stenographies being, in addition, very difficult to learn, most of them requiring from five to ten years to master their many word- signs, with which all systems of stenography, ancient or modern, are encumbered. The first complete shorthand system, having a phonographic basis, was invented by Mr. Phineas Bailey, of Chelsea, Vermont, 1819, who.it is said, upon communicating his discovery to the English Parliamentary reporters, produced such a sensation respecting the feasibility of phono- graphic writing, that several of those gentlemen gave much of their spare time to experimenting on Mr. Bailey's scheme, such experiments and exchange of ideas eventually leading to the formation of a short- hand improvement club, the forerunner of the first phonographic asso- ciation of England, of which association Mr, Isaac Pitman, then a tutor in a private academy at Wooten-under-Edge, Gloucestershire, became a member, because of his interest in stenographic matters. Mr. Bailey called his system of phonetic shorthand " A Pronounc- ing Stenography," and it is to that little work, which its author ex- plains in its title, to be " a complete system of shorthand writing, gov- erned by the knowledge of sounds," that all present systems of phono- graphy owe their origin. The members of the first phonographic association of England, thinking it wise to publish their phonographic conclusions, Mr. Isaac Pitman, having intimate business relations with Samuel Baxter & Sons, the noted Bible publishers, became their spokesman, or editor, and ar- ranged with Baxter & Sons to publish the suggestions of the association, which suggestions, under Mr. Pitman's editorship, were first published in the form of a diminutive pamphlet, entitled " Stenographic Sound- hand." The name " Phonography " was not given to Mr. Pitman's publication until a later edition, the name being, most probably, taken from the publication of a French author, who, after Bailey's publica- tion, and before Pitman's, issued, in France, a work which he entitled "Phonographic," and which was, as far as investigations have gone, HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 9 a sort of a combination of the phonetic and the stenographic principles. Thus, by the above facts, it will be seen that Isaac Pitman, (whom so many supposed to be the " father ot phonography") in reality not only did not invent phonetic shorthand, but was not even the first to use the word " phonography" (or "phonographic") as a term for the art. Much credit, however, is due him for his labors in the phono- graphic field, which have been by no means slight; though, while we acknowledge his labors, we must not forget the real inventor, Mr. Phineas Bailey, nor those from whom Mr. Pitman procured the material for his first publication the members of England's first phonographic association; nor, in later days, Mr. Pitman's numerous associates in business, who are said to have suggested to him most of the principles of abbreviation which form what has been known as his system fot many years. Accuracy of statement is o-ne of the requisites of historical record, and such accuracy gives to Marcus Tullius Tiro, a Roman, the right ot title as : 'the father of shorthand writing;" Mr. Phineas Bailey, an American, the right of title as the " inventor of sound-writing/' (i. e., phonograph}-) and first publisher of the art; Mr. Isaac' Pitman, the first English publisher of the latter art, and the spokesman through whom the public obtained a knowledge of the improvements made in the art by Isaac Pitman and his co-laborers up to 1855. Even at this latter date, however, much ot the stenographic material of the early writers is made use of in all systems of phonography, although such stenographic material is used phonetically, and, being used phonetically, has thereby shortened the method of writing, and done away with numerous arbitrary word-forms. So popular, since its invention by Mr. Phineas Bailey, in 1819, has phonography become, that many authors of phonographic works have succeeded the inventor, though up to the publication of this volume, most of the objections to the Pitman scheme are retained in other works; many authors seeming to care more for reproducing old ideas, than for printing new discoveries. Finding the old scheme, even as presented by other modern authors still defective in many ways, the members of the profession were, be- fore the publication of this volume, compelled to make many changes in the use of the art in their own work, and such of those changes (hitherto secrets of the profession) that really further speed as well as legibility, the author publishes in this work, in addition to the author's own copyrighted improvements, which are not to be found in the pub- lication of any other writer. io HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. ABOUT SHORTHAND SKILL IN THREE MONTHS It was in 1875, tnat a young man came to the author and made the astonishing request that he be taught the art of shorthand sufficiently for office use within the space of four weeks, if possible. As it had taken the author four to five years to be able to write much over one hundred words a minute, with two hours daily speed practice during most of that time, he was very much astonished at this request, and whilsthe looked in amazement at his visitor, the latter explained that a position was waiting for him in the Pennsylvania railroad office at Philadelphia, if he could master the art and gain skill in the time men- tioned about a month. The author frankly told this caller that he was asking an impossi- bility, the author stating his reasons, based upon his own experience. At the same time, the author was also (being then young) conceited enough to add that he thought he could teach the art in as short a time as anybody could, and he would be glad to do the best possible under the circumstances. At that time there were no organized schools of shorthand, and when the would-be student explained that he was willing to give four- teen hours a day or longer if necessary, to the study, the author thought he saw some opportunity of, at any rate, considerably shortening the average time, and he told the caller he would give him his answer the next day. At that time the author was writing a sort of mixed system, with many original improvements, having found the conditions of none of the systems suitable to the very difficult work he had to do; so, that night, the author hastily looked through all the books he had collected onshorthand as presented by different authors, and, in a rough way, hur- riedly planned twenty-four lessons to contain the information to be found in Benn Pitman's, Isaac Pitman's, Graham's and Munson's and other systems as used by him in actual work, making brief notes of them as well as memoranda of his own changes not to be found in those books. This result the author explained to the would-be pupil on the next day- as necessary to be learned in order to insure success, and between the conceit of both youthful teacher and student, the task first asked for by the pupil was actually attempted, and the young student, being extraordinarily bright and giving all his days and most of his dreams to shorthand, seeing phonographic outlines in every object the angles ot houses, trees and all other objects meeting his vision he actually mas- HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. II tered all the crude lessons given him and gained sufficient speed within the four weeks to hold a very easy office shorthand position, and, as the official who engaged him was a relative and disposed to be lenient, he took the position, which he continued to hold for years, arriving by successive promotions at a very important and remunerative official position with the same railroad corporation. After taking this position, the young man in question had a great desire to obtain skill in higher work, such as court and convention re porting, and frequently accompanied the author when the latter reported court cases, meetings, political speeches, etc., for the newspapers with which he was connected. In such cases the beginner always com- pared afterward his notes with those of the author, who loaned them to him for that purpose; and in such comparisons the student came upon what are probably best termed the "secrets of the profession"- that is, little speed and legibility devices which, at that day, were to be found in no book, but which the author had met with in his intercourse with brother stenographers, and which, after years of use, he had for- gotten were not in the text books, and which had hence not been in- corporated by him in the twenty-four hastily-made lessons he had arranged for that first "quick-time" student. For instance, all works on phonography teach two forms for Th light and heavy but the pro- fession never write the heavy Th, as a letter, as it is not available for rapid work and is unnecessary. Following the old rule, the author had taught his student the heavy Th and when this student came to compare his notes with his teacher's, he found that his teacher always used the light Th, the heavy only for Thr. The oversight was explained, when the student inquired, "Why not teach from the start the professional out- lines in every case? Because," he added, "I have become so accustomed to writing that heavy outline for Th, that where I have not time to think, I am sure to make it, and it is hard to get out of the habit. If I had been taught the correct outlines from the start, I would have no bad habits to overcome and would gain speed easier." This set the author to thinking, and he, in consequence, requested the student thereafter to call his attention to every deviation of that and every other kind between his (the author's) notes and the student's. The student was very vigilant in this respect, and the twenty-four crude lessons (a duplicate copy of which the author had retained for himself) were soon corrected to contain professional outlines only. In the midst of this v/ork, a remark of the student over the difficulty of using dis- joined vowels with exactness, where necessary, led the author to invent 12 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. his joined vowels, which aided so much in the way of imparting the re- porting style of writing from the first lesson, that those lessons soon became condensed to fifteen, and later to twelve lessons, from which twelve lessons, containing every device known to the profession, all superfluous information was eliminated. Having, in the meantime, secured, through the success of the first student, a number of others, the writer, by 1882, became convinced that, by a properly arranged day course, he could impart skill for an office shorthand position to any or- dinary pupil in three months' time, providing, of course, attendance- was regular and the studying done as directed. This belief has since been proven by the thousands of students who, since 1882, have graduated from the author's schools in Philadelphia, New York, Chicago and other cities, graduates who hold today, many of them, the highest positions possible to shorthand writers, some of whom would not have been able to have at all mastered any other system. And, in all the experience of the author in teaching, there has never been even one failure to master the art with skill for an office position in three months, where attendance was regular and directions regarding study respected necessary qualifications of prior education being included. These facts, bear in mind, have been demonstrated in the cases of thous- ands of students, and herewith, within the covers of this book, we have a proof of how this result may be achieved by any teacher. Part II of this book contains all the lessons twelve in number comprising every important device that the profession knows respecting shorthand, and far more than most professionals ever have occasion to use, no matter how important their work. These twelve lessons can be readily mastered in a month's time, and that is all that is necessary for success in three months counting second month for Reviews A to K, in Part II, and half the Business Letter Practice contained in Part III of this book, with third month for the completion of the Business Letters, Actual Court Cases and Convention Reporting of Part III. Some bright students can learn a lesson a day. Counting for them, one day for each lesson of Part II, gives twelve days for the twelve lessons, the entire theory of the most advanced reporting style of phonography being thereby learned in twelve days. The A to K Reviews of Part II, pages 118 to 137 of this book, require ten days more. Then count the eighteen days of the Business Letter Practice in Part III of this book ; add to the sum obtained, the ten days of the Actual Court Cases, the one day of Convention Reporting and the one day of Lecture Reporting given in HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 13 that same Part III of this book, and the result is a total of only 52 days for the mastery of this entire book, as follows : Entire Twelve Lessons of Theory (Part II) 12 days Entire Collection of A to K Reviews (Part II) 10 days Entire Collection of Business Letters (Part III) . . . . 18 days Entire Collection of Court Cases (Part III) 10 days The Convention Reporting (Part III) i day Lecture Reporting (Part III) . i day Total 52 days Parts I and IV of this book do not count, because Part I is only introductory (or discursory) and Part IV is merely intended for reference, and even for that purpose unnecessary all the information, study and practice being given in Parts II and III, whose combined result may be compassed within 52 days of easy work, by many students. It must not be supposed that the practice exercises of Part III contain anything new aside from the twelve lessons of Part II, for such is not the case. The twelve lessons contain every principle necessary for the execution of the most difficult shorthand work, and are alone sufficient for same, the exercises of Part III being therefore merely in- tended to show students how to utilize the information of the lessons entirely a matter of practice for them. Our routine is not a process of cramming. On the contrary, just as the lessons in Part II commence with the simplest, smallest sort of Exercises.increasing very gradually to an ordinary size at the last, just so the Business Letter Practice and the Actual Court Cases of Part III commence, the first day's Letters being of only three lines each and the first Court Case only constituting a single page of easy work, the progress in each case being very gradual. This easy commencement in the several degrees of practice en- ables the student to have abundant time for speed practice and con- stant review of theory. While the exercises of Part III commence with exceedingly brief examples and advance but gradually, they are none the less thorough. The Business Letters represent selections from over forty different leading businesses, familiarizing the student with most every sort of commercial term or phrase he or she is apt to meet with in any busi- ness, presenting the best shorthand outlines for same; and, in the 14 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. same manner, the Court Cases and the chapters on Convention Report- ing treat work of their character, together with copious explanations in print descriptive of the best manner of doing such work, with com- plete particulars, so that the veriest greenhorn who has carefully read same and the contents of the shorthand plates and has the necessary speed from practice, can transact the work required in all branches of the business of shorthand writing, however difficult, with as certain accuracy as the most skillful experienced reporter, from the taking of the first word in shorthand to the finished transcription. This has been the aim of the author in compiling this work, the labor of many days and sleepless nights for a period of over twenty years, backed by extended professional experience in every branch of shorthand work, and as a teacher of many teachers as well as many thousands of students of all degrees of intelligence and education, or the lack of the same. The day of experiment has passed respecting the result of a course covering three months upon the plan of teaching demonstrated in this book. There are alleged three month's teachers who make only failures of their pupils. But they are those who attempt to accomplish with other text books the results only possible by the use of this. With the directions of this book strictly followed, failures are impossible, providing, of course, the student has the necessary common school education. To illustrate to teachers and home students, the plan observed by the author in his teaching, to insure three months' graduations for office positions, in the cases of all ordinary students, the following routine of Haven Colleges is given. It can be used by the student at home, with just as good results, if one of the family or a friend will dictate the speed practice described herein. THREE MONTHS' ROUTINE OF HAVEN COLLEGES Qualification in three months' day course in Shorthand, requires that the student shall devote all of his or her five hours of day sessions, to Shorthand study and practice, except that set apart for typewriting prac- tice and the 15 minutes daily spelling test, which all students of any course must take until proficiency in spelling is demonstrated. If spelling requires any study on the part of the student, that spelling study must be done out- side of school, as the guarantee particularly states that the student must be a good speller beforehand, to qualify in three months in Shorthand. FIRST MONTH THE LESSONS. The first step, when the day Shorthand student arrives at 93. m., is to explain to him or her the first lesson of this Complete Manual of Practical Phonography, the teacher showing student how to practice same, and telling him that, if he finds any- thing in the lesson, while he is practicing it, that he does not understand, he is to go to the teacher at once, no matter how busy the teacher may be, and ask about it ; not to proceed with anv lesson without well understanding same. Similarly, as soon as a student thinks he has mastered a shorthand lesson, his duty is then also to, at once, without delay, inform teacher of that fact, no matter how HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 1C busy the teacher may be, when the teacher will, at first opportunity, dictate that les- son's Exercise to student, and, if not more than three hesitations in writing same are made, the teacher explains the next lesson. We do not pass more than three hesita- tions, but as soon as a student makes that many , direct him or her to restudy that lesson until absolutely perfect. At same time, we explain where the student is at fault, answering questions about doubtful points, or reexplain the entire lesson, but do not let anyone proceed with next lesson until the one in hand is well learned. EACH STUDENT TAUGHT SEPARATELY. All explanation and dictation of lessons is individual, not in class each stu- dent being taught separately from first lesson to the last. Careful watch is given to see that students thoroughly practice the shorthand outlines to each lesson, and, therefore, before the teacher dictates the Exercise of any shorthand lesson, the student is required to show his or her practice sheets contain- ing the repetition of at least 50 consecutive writings of each separate outline in said shorthand Exercise, in addition to the complete writing of said Exercise. This gives facility in forma. ion of the shorthand characters producing skill of hand, which no other plan will give. We do not permit study without shorthand practice. We give a half-hour of typewriting practice in the morning session and 20 min- utes in the afternoon, to each day shorthand student. Experience has shown us that most students get wearied with more than 20 minutes to a half-hour's machine prac- tice and only waste any excess of that time. Night students receive 20 minutes typewriting practice, and as much more time as absence of other students may permit. Our typewriting lessons are printed in our fifty cents book of Business Corre- spondence ; are fourteen in number, twelve of them containing merely words and phrases, beginningin first lesson with words of two letters, and ending in twelfth lesson with words of twelve or more letters, each marked to show the proper fingering to use for best work and speed. The I3th and I4th lessons contain two business letters one small one, wide spaced ; and one large one, narrow-spaced representing the two popular styles used in general business, they being also radically different in such points as address, wording, etc. These letters are explained carefully to the student and the first must be written without an error or erasure and approved by the teacher before the second letter is attempted, when that must be gone over as many times as is necessary to make one absolutely correct copy without an error or erasure. This being done, the student thereafter, when at the machine, copies the business letters and court and convention proceedings from five of our little ten cent Speed pamphlets, which we print for that purpose, and which we sell to. students for 35 cents, the five pamphlets containing sufficient material for typewriting practice during balance of term, as they should be written entirely through several times. At the end of typewriting period, the student returns to desk and continues the study and practice of shorthand lessons. It is expected that the full day student will learn thoroughly the twelve lessons of our Shorthand manual during first month of day attendance, at an average of three lessons each week, so as to begin in speed class the first day of second month Those who can learn four Shorthand lessons the first week will be that much ahead, and have so much more time at end of first month to master the longer Shorthand lessons which are last, and to review same. SECOND MONTH REVIEWS, ETC. As soon as the Shorthand student has satisfactorily recited the twelfth lesson of our Complete Manual of Practical Phonography, he or she is directed to review all those lessors by covering the shorthand of each lesson's Exercise, and looking at the Key alone, writing it in shorthand, the student then comparing his or her shorthand writing with the printed shorthand of the lesson and practicing until perfect every mistake made therein, as shown by the above directed comparison, being sure to ask teacher about any outline which is not clearly understood. This will not require more than two or three days of time, and is a necessary preparation for speed. Immediately after such review of the shorthand lessons, the student is directed to study whichever one of the A to K review pages of the shorthand manual, as ex- i6 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. plained farther on, is set for the speed class of a day, tvo days ahead of that, on which the les- son reviewing is finished, so as to give student time to thoroughly prepare that parti- cular A to K Re- view of manual, as those Reviews are only read in speed class, and there must not be more than three errors in each, in writing them, as explained farther on. The day for his particular A to K Review having arrived, the stu- dent is placed in speed class and said Review read to him, as explained farther on, in company with any other students who have also prepared for it, and thereafter he or she remains in speed classes full time, taking whatever can be taken of the other matter dictated, however little, the oVject at first being merely to train the ear, which years of experience has taught us should be done at as early a date as possible, if speed be desired quickly. SPEED PRACTICE. The order of dictation at each morn- ing shorthand speed class of one hour, is as follows : First, One of the A to K Reviews of the Shorthand manual ; :d, Dictation of Business Letters of the Shorthand manual for not more than 20 minutes to students entitled thereto, as explained in detail farther on, beginning with the student least advanced in same ; 3d, The reading of two pages of the numbered business letters from printed ten-cent speed readers not used in typewriting practice. 4th, Dictation of actual letters to graduating students; 5th, Read- ing of two pages of court testimony from printed ten-cent speed readers; 6th, Two pages cf convention from same, if time permits. GAINING SPEED. In afternoon speed class of 40 minutes, the order of dicta- tion is : -First, Reading Court or Convention pages from Short- hand manual arranged for that day, as explained farther on ; id, Dictation for not more than 20 minutes, of Business Letters of the Shorthand manual to those students who did not receive those due them at morning speed class ; 3d, Dictation of actual letters to graduating students who did not receive same in the morning speed class ; 4th, Short original lecture tostudents or readingof differentletters, court and conven- tion, two pages each, from the ten cent printed speed readers, as described for morning speed class. We stop anywhere in these speed readers when speed time is up. At night, thecne hour of speed class begins with onecf the A toK Reviews from Shorthand manual, Business Letters of the Shorthand manual as needed following; next, actual letters to graduating students, if any ; then the pages of court or con- vention from shorthand manual set for that night, concluding, as far as time permits, with business letters, court and convention, two pages each, from the ten-cent printed speed readers not used for typewriting practice. In any speed class we read the A to K Reviews of the Shorthand manual at rate of 20 words a minute ; the Business Letters of the manual 70 words a minute ; the court and convention pages of shorthand manual and the pages from the ten cent speed readers at 100 to 120 words per minute. The ten-cent speed readers used in speed class are 27 in number and are com- posed of letters, court or convention work different from the 5 pamphlets which are used for typewriting practice. Each student is required to buy these 27 speed class pamphlets as soon as speed class is entered, so that he or she may have them for comparison with notes taken in speed class, the price being but 93 cents for the 27. If purchased at same time as the 5 for typewriting, the price for both is one dollar. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 17 THE A TO K REVIEWS. These speed class Reviews are shown on pages n8to 137 of the Shorthand manual, and one of them begins each morning speed class and each night speed class, unless there should happen to be no students at that stage of progress, the Reviews being arranged differently for day and night. At night school they begin with the first school night of the year at Review A, and so run on each night until Review K is reached, the next school night again beginning at A and so on continuously throughout the year, those occurring on a legal holiday being set for the next school night, and the others following in order, so as not to skip any Review nor place any two Reviews on any one night. There are exactly ten of these A to K reviews, equalling two full weeks of day school five reviews each week; so, at day school we begin the first Monday in the year with Review A and follow with Review B on Tuesday, and so on to K, begin- ning every other Monday at day school with Review A. When a legal holiday occurs on a school day, then we omit the Review which would fall on that legal holiday until same Review occurs two weeks later, when it is then taken by student, its omission on a legal holiday at day school, not being permitted to interfere with the student's progress otherwise. The student hands to teacher his writing of these A to K Reviews as soon as written for red ink marking of mistakes after speed class. The shorthand student does not necessarily begin with Review A. The A to K Reviews are set for certain speed classes and cannot be changed to suit student. We place a student in speed class the second day after he has concluded his first review of the LESSONS, no matter what school day it may be, and on that day or night Monday, Tuesday, or whatever day or night it may be the student starts with the Review set for that date, A, B, J, K, or whichever it may be. THOROUGHNESS OUR OBJECT. Whenever there are more than three errors made in any A to K Review, that Review must be taken again when it reoccurs ten day or night sessions later, and so on as many times as necessary to get each review accurate within not more than three mistakes. Similarly, when the student be absent from any one of these A to K Reviews, he or she cannot receive dictation of that review, until it appears in its turn ten school days or nights later. No two Reviews will be given to any student on same day or night. Over three mistakes in any review or absence from that review thus delays the student's progress, as it is only absences on legal holidays that are not permitted to interfere with advancement . This rule is to insure perfect attendance. While the student is taking the A to K Reviews' said student remains full time in Speed Class, both morning and afternoon (or night, if a night student) with the more advanced students, merely taking in shorthand what little can be taken by him or her, thus training the ear, learning to analyze the sounds of words as heard. On whatever date the shorthand student finishes correctly his last A to K review, he is directed to again review, outside of speed class, the LESSONS of the Shorthand manual from page 23 to page 115 inclusive. BUSINESS LETTER DICTATION. When the student is through the second reviewing of the shorthand lessons, he or she is told to study carefully the two busi- ness letters shown at top of pages 144 and 145 of the Shorthand manual, representing the first day of Business Letter practice ot the manual, practicing the shorthand out lines of same enough times to write them absolutely correct when, dictated by teacher at proper period of next day's speed class. The student's writing of those letters isex- amined after speed class, mistakes marked in red ink and if more than three devia- tions from the shorthand, as shown in manual, are made the student must take them again the next day ; also if they are not written as rapidly as 70 words a minute. Similarly with each day's letters, as shown in the manual, the student con- tinues to take them in speed class daily until each day's letters have been written with no more than three mistakes for any day before taking the next two letters, and so on throughout the 18 days' Business Letters of Shorthand manual. No student is advanced to the Business Letters of the Shorthand manual until the Reviews A to K are absolutely mastered, as before described. Unlike the A to K Reviews, no special day is set for any particular Business Letters of the Shorthand manual ; so that, as soon as the student is qualified in the A to K Reviews, he begins next day with dictation of the first day's Business Letters; and, as students on that plan will start at very different times in those letters, on the day one takes his first, another student maybe on the letters of the third day, etc. i8 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. If there are more students in those letters than can be dictated to during 20 min- utes of morning speed class, the others should be given their letters at stated period of afternoon speed class ; and, if the Business Letters of the manual due each student that day cannot be completed within 20 minutes of afternoon speed class, then there should be two or more speed classes, sufficient to accommodate all. Only one day's letters will be dictated to any student upon any one day. Bright students who feel that they can thoroughly accomplish more work than designated for one day by the Shorthand manual, can easily utilize spare time by each day studying ahead the court and convention cf manual, as explained below. Each shorthand student in second month also receives regular morning and afternoon typewriting practice, the same as during first month. THIRD MONTH ACTUAL WORK. The Business Letters of the Shorthand manual which the student has not finished at the end of second month, he or she continues with this third month, until the i8th day of Business Letters of page 159 of the Shorthand manual is satisfactorily completed without more than three mistakes any one day, the student remaining in speed class during full time, taking, as far as possible, every- thing read therein, whether dictated to other students or the class gen- erally, and getting also the regular typewriting practice of half hour morning and 20 minutes afternoon from his or her typewriting pamphlets. COURT AND CONVENTION PRACTICE. When the i8th day of Business Letters of page 159 of the Shorthand manual is satisfactorily completed, the student is directed to again review the twelve LESSONS of the Shorthand manual exactly as done just before entering speed class, after accomplishing which, the student is directed to study for the next day the shorthand pages of court or convention which are to be read from the Shorthand manual on that next day. We read all the court and convention pages of the Shorthand manual each month at afternoon speed class, beginning the afternoon speed class of first Monday of any month with the reading of page 177 of manual, page 179 on Tuesday; each afternoon reading one to three pages, as designated in manual, up to loth day (second Friday); reading pages 219 and 221 on third Monday, 223 and 225 third Tuesday; page 235 of convention on third Wednesday, and thereafter each day reading one page of convention from Shorthand manual until end of week immediately preceding first Monday of following month, the last day reading sufficient pages to conclude the reading of page 279 in manual, so as to begin again at page 177 on first Monday afternoon of each month. At night speed classes we begin with page 177 of manual on first Monday night of each quarter, January, April, July and October, reading one page per school night until end of quarter, which will nearly finish the book, reading the last night of the quarter as many additional pages as maybe necessary to complete page 279, so as to begin each new quarter at night speed class at page 177. All shorthand students who have finished the 18 days business letters of the Shorthand manual should thus each day study ahead the shorthand pages of court or convention that are to be read from shorthand manual at next day's speed class, practice which other students, not so far advanced can also take to consume anv spare time theymayhave. Advanced students should also utilize spare time by trans- cribing their shorthand speed class notes. THE SPEED PAMPHLETS. -As before stated, we conclude all our speed classes, when a lecture does not intervene, with the reading of the business letters, court and convention pages from a collection of 27 of our little ten-cent printed speed pamphlets. These 27 little pamphlets contain j 100 business letters, 80,000 words court testimony and 80,000 words convention,, making 99 printed pages of letters, 103 pages of court and loo pages of convention 302 pages in all. We have the pages of those speed readeis arranged so that certain pages are set for certain sessions. Thus, beginning with the first Monday morning speed class of each month, we find marked for that speed class, the first two pages of letters, first two pages of court and first two pages of convention. Whether we finish reading those first six pages or not at morning speed class, we take for afternoon speed class the next two pages of letters, court and convention, and so on. taking six different pages each speed class 12 each day which permits us to read new matter daily for a month of 25 day HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. sessions, if a month should be that long. How- ever short of that number we should come, we never fail to start at the be- ginning of the speed readers on first Monday of each month, and never read at any session any unfinished material c f a previous session, always beginning at the proper pages for that session. At night, the contents of these speed readers furnish enough reading to last four months, six pages a night, so we begin on the first night session of January, May and September, with the first two pages of letters, first two pages court and first two pages convention six pages and thereafter every night session six other pages, similarly treated. When third month students become perfect in the 18 days Business Letters of the Shorthand manual, then it is their duty to try to take the speed reader letters verbatim as fast as dictated in speed class, and when they succeed in taking any as quickly as read, they should read them back at once to the teacher in speed class. In reading back these speed reader business letters in speed class, no letter must be read which does not contain 60 to 70 words. There are all sizes of letters in those speed readers some containing only 20 or 25 words, others 200, though the majority average from 60 to 1 20 words, and it is only those of 6} and over which will be accepted in reading back letters in speed class. The teacher must be informed by the student that he or she is ready to read just as soon as the teacher has read the last word of a letter and before teacher has begun to read the next letter, for the student must have written the last word immediately after the teacher pronounces it. TEST FOR GRADUATION. -As soon as a student has ac- quired sufficient facility to read back promptly two or three letters at several speed classes without a mistake or hesitancy, then the teacher dictates three actual letters, or at least three test letters not printed any- where nor ever read before in the presence of any student present. These actual test letters are dictated in morniug speed class at a natural speed, about 100 to 120 words a minute, and the student is not permitted to ask questions respecting what was said or misunderstood while such dictation is going on, nor afterwards. The student under the test, must hear every word and get it correctly in shorthand without any interruption or question, the taking of those three test letters occupy- ing about three minutes of speed class, at either morning, afternoon or night sessions, the student's shorthand notes being at once handed to the teacher, who retains them until that student's turn for typewriting machine arrives, when the student has the notes handed back by teacher, together with three letter sheets, and the student is to write those three letters in typewriting at rate of 30 to 40 words a minute without a mistake of any kitid, either in wording, punctuation, spelling, etc If student be not thus successful at first attempt, three new letters will be similarly dictated to student on succeedingschool days or nights, at morning, afternoon or night sessions, and as soon as the requirements are all fulfilled, but not before, the student has earned diploma, and will be given same upon payment of fee. The ordi- nary student can accomplish this by the end of the .third month. Students by mail may take this test at home, if certified before Notary Public. Above test is for office positions. To gain speed for court and convention reporting, it is merely necessary to continue same speed class practice daily until required speed is attained a few more months. 20 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. THAT WORD "SYSTEM." The public sometimes use the word "system" as though each book on phonography had nothing in common with the others, when the fact is that they are all built from the same parent stem and each simply represents the art in its best form at the time the author of each book first introduced his work to the public. For instance, when Isaac Pit- man, in 1837, printed his first manual, it represented the art as it was written by the best writers then, and that author has noL greatly im- proved his books since. In 1855, Ben Pitman printed his book repre- senting the art nearly as it was written in that day; though Graham, three years later, more thoroughly illustrated the art as used by the swiftest writers at that period, the art having wonderfully improved among the profession since Isaac Pitman's first work. Next, Munson and Marsh, in 1868, published works showing improvements made by the profession up to that date. Since the books of those authors appeared, however, the art has progressed in a greater ratio still, yet those books, though in their new editions bearing the date of each year since, have not kept pace with the improvements made by the profession.because it would necessitate great expense in changing their book plates; so they have printed year in and year out mostly from the same old plates, or duplicates of them, that their first editions con- tained, and thus, though new editions are published each year, yet said editions only represent the art in the days when those authors first printed their books, so that those authors each represent phonography as it was written professionally when they first essayed authorship, but the profession has long ago left them behind. And, as many other mod- ern authors who were not reporters, but mere theorists, have simply copied the old editions of the above named authors or their contempo- raries, this book is therefore the only one representing the professional outlines as used by the best professional writers of all "systems" at the present day. It is not a new "system," but the latest professional representation of the art as used by the best writers. PRELIMINARY INFORMATION FOR THE STUDENT. It is necessary that the student be impressed with the fact that he is to write only by sound. It should be borne in mind that the phon- ographic signs given in the lessons are not substitutes for the letters of the Roman alphabet, but are simply signs used to represent the differ- ent elementary sounds of the human voice. Hence, the difference be- tween the names of the phonographic Visible Alphabet and the usual HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 21 A,B,C,or Roman Alphabet. For this reason, when the student desires to spell the words mew, sigh, etc.,phonographically,he must not expect to spell them in accordance with the English and American dictionaries. He must govern himself entirely by the elementary sounds contained in each word. He will then correctly spell them; m-u, mew, s-i, sigh. In explaining this to an early student, the author was asked: "If, in shorthand, we spell by sound entirely, then I suppose there are some words which may be spelled by the use of only one letter,like, for instance, spelling the word be by the use of the letter B alone." To which the author replied: "Certainly, the shorthand letter B spells the word be quite as correctly as it represents the letter B. In fact it spells bee equally well. STUDENT (in dismay.) Then, suppose, in the future, I desired, or was required, to read some other phonographer's writing, or even my own that had lain by for some time and perhaps become almost or quite forgotten, and that in those notes occurred the shorthand sign for B, how could I be certain as to whether it was written for the words be. bee, or was simply a letter? AUTHOR Yours is a very natural question. Allow me to answer it by asking one. The sounds of those two words and the letter being precisely the same, .how would you know which was meant should you hear them spoken by some one addressing you? STUDENT. The subject of conversation or the meaning of the sen- tence in which they occurred would inform me. AUTHOR. Exactly. Besides, neither of them can be employed in the same sense. But suppose, for illustration, either word (be or bee) or the letter, were spoken alone, without any attendant conversation, would you understand which was meant? STUDENT. Possibly not. AUTHOR. Then you must not expect more of phonography than of spoken language, than which nothing is more universally useful. It is the province of the former simply to photograph the latter. One thought more: The subject of conversation was mentioned. as being a guide to the meaning of spoken words; or, in other words,the context is the key. This is often, though not always, the case in phonography. Words preceding or following a doubtful word will invariably deter- mine its meaning. To be sure, in this particular instance, the words may be isolated and have no connection with each other, as in regular sentences. But, let'us take a sentence. Just for sake of illustration, suppose, instead of declaring to your sister "Katie,! envy you," you J2 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. merely repeat to her the six letters/ 'K-T, I N-V U," is it not possible that Katie would comprehend your meaning quite as well ? Undoubtedly she would, because the sound is the same in both instances, and there, fore the meaning is the same. People do not spell words when they speak. Custom has determined that, in correct long-hand writing, the dictionaries must be regarded as containing the standard rules for spelling; but the student is reminded, that, in photographing the utter- ances of a speaker, the two phonographic signs V and U spell view quite as well as Webster's unabridged dictionary can, even with the help of four letters. The foregoing illustration of spelling by sound, commencing on preceding page, was written by the author, Curtis Haven, and was printed by him in the first edition of this book, but it has since then been copied, without permission, by the publisher of a garbled shorthand book, and printed in his book as if original with him, together with other portions of this book, original only with the author, Curtis Haven. This notice is given here, so that persons who should see both books, will understand this one alone deserves the credit for originality. Every sentence in this book is strictly original with the author, Curtis Haven, and if any portion of same should be found in any other book, the reader will know that it is copied from this book. 300-WORDS-A-MINUTE The lessons of this book were originally known as "Haven's 300- Words-a-Minute Shorthand Lessons", and the author has been severely criticised for using that title, his critics claiming that the public might imagine that the title meant that the lessons would give that speed to any student in three months. To this the author begs to say he does not agree to give a speed of 3OO-words-a-minute in three months, nor in any set time. Very few professionals have it or require it, many speakers not using over 1 20 or 1 50 words a minute. For office work 70 to 1 20 words a minute is the mini- mum and maximum. It is this speed that can be given ordinary students in three months, and the volumes of praise which business men have given re- specting the superiority of work of Haven quick-time graduates over the long-time ones of other schools, prove the value of this plan of teaching. These lessons are known as ' '300- Words-a- Minute Shorthand Lessons " because they contain abbreviating material, sufficient, with proper practice, to give that great speed to those few persons who have a natural aptitude for the art, whose brains and hands act very quickly by nature, and who are well educated. Once in a while a shorthand reporter meets with a speaker who talks at the rate of 180 to 200 words a minute, sometimes 250 a minute, and there have been a few public speakers like Philip Brooks, whom reporters writing the Pitman and other systems could not report verbatim, because the speaker uttered 300 or more words a minute at times, the system of shorthand written by the reporter not being capable of that speed for most systems fail at anything over 150 words a minute. But Haven's Practical Phonography contains the speed elements of fully 300 words a minute, as the author and numbers of his brightest pupils have re- peatedly written at that rate and over, at many public tests ; but, it cannot be done by other systems, and, as before stated, is seldom necessary. The point that all would-be students should remember, is that any speed desired is much easier obtained from lessons containing the possibility of 300 words a minute as a maximum, than from those old lessons used by most teachers, which, at their best, have only the elements of 150 words a minute. PART IL THE INSTRUCTOR. LESSON I. DEFINITION. Shorthand writing is of two kinds stenography and phonography. Stenography was the shorthand of the ancients, and is not much in use today. It involves the learning of hundreds of arbitrary signs for words, and is very difficult to master. Phonography is the shorthand of the present, and is the one employed by nine of every ten shorthand reporters, although all shorthand writers are called stenographers, because the old name still clings to them. Phonog- raphy is the only scientific shorthand, and is quite easily learned, if the instructions contained in these lessons are followed. The name phonography is a union of two Greek words, /&?#?) S K Gy Gay N D The straight characters are readily enough distinguished as to slant, but sometimes beginners are apt to make mistakes in relation to the slant of the curves, and in order to impress the direction of the curves well upon the HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 2 - r beginner's mind, the following diagrams, showing the exact slant of each curve in comparison with the straight letters, is given: T Thd) 5 From above, the student will observe that the points of the curved letters F and V begin and end at the same position, regarding the line, as the straight letter P would; that the curves Th and S begin and end in similar positions to T, L and Sh to Chay, and M and N to K. Pronounce the double letters Ch, Th, and Sh, as indicated in the list: Chay, Ith, and Ish never C-h, T-h,and S-h. The sound for G should also be always pronounced Gay. These four signs require special pronunciation, for reasons which will be better appreciated by students as they progress. Always write the signs for K, Gay, M, and N from left to right. Write L upward. The other signs in foregoing list are written downward. Other letters of the visible alphabet will be given in subsequent lessons. SPELLING BY POSITION. The invisible alphabet also need not necessarily be altogether presented in this first lesson, but its use and three of its letters are best given. The invisible alphabet is really a method of spelling by position. That is, writing a visible letter (any one of those in foregoing list, for instance) in a certain position in accordance with the ruled line of the paper you are writing upon, and by that position indicating after the written letter the presence of some other letter not written. The letters written to indicate invisible letters are called consonants; the sounds indicated without being written are called vowels. Three of the vowel sounds, which are thus indicated invisibly, are I, A, and U, the mode of indicating them being to write a consonant above the ruled line of your writing paper when you desire to indicate I; write the consonant resting on the line to indicate A; and strike the consonant through or place beneath the line to indicate U. For instance, suppose you desired to write the word nigh in shorthand: That word in shorthand would be spelled with only the two letters n and i, thus, n-i, nigh. Now, N is a visible consonant, as will be seen by referring to your list of letters at the beginning of this lesson. And we have just said that the sound of I may be indicated after a written letter without writing I, by placing any visible consonant above the line of the paper you are writing upon. So, by simply placing our shorthand letter N above the 20 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. line, we indicate the sound of I after it, and thereby spell n-i, nigh, as with sign i in Exercise. Then, in accordance with the rule for indicating the sound of the letter A, without writing it, we have only to place our letter N on the line, and we invisibly indicate after N, the sound of A, thus spelling n-a, nay, as with sign 2 in Exercise. Finally, by writing N under the line of our paper, we indicate after N the sound of U, and thus spell n-u, knew, as with sign 3 in Exercise. By the above description, the student sees that it is ihe position of the written consonant that indicates the sound of the /^visible letter; and, there- fore, any consonant of the visible alphabet may thus /^visibly indicate the sound of I after it, if such written letter be placed above the line of writing; A, if placed on the line; and U, if struck through or placed below the line. The horizontal letters K, Gay, M, and N can not be written through the line, which is why they are written under the line to indicate U after them, the other letters being easily struck through the line, as in signs 6, 7, 15, 17, etc., in Exercise. The dotted lines in our Exercise represent the ruled lines of ordinary writing paper. If the student has carefully read all of Part I, of this book, especially noted the explanation under heading of " Preliminary Information," on pages 20 to 22, and also memorized the sixteen letters so far given of the Visible Alphabet, commencing this lesson, he or she is now ready to pro- ceed with the study of Exercise I, at end of this lesson, which should be done in accordance with the following plan: 1. Read carefully the entire Exercise, tracing over with a dry pen each shorthand letter, as you read it. The tracing helps to train your hand to a familiarity with the correct formation of the shorthand letters. 2. Write with pencil each separate word or combination of Exercise at least twelve consecutive times on your practicing paper. 3. Transcribe the entire Exercise into long hand, afterward comparing your interpretation with the Key below Exercise. Repeat until perfect. 4. Looking only at the Key, write it into shorthand, afterward com- paring your shorthand writing with the shorthand of the printed Exercise, repeating this wholesome practice until satisfactory, but without attempting to write faster than you can write well. Speed will come with careful practice. These rules are alike applicable to every lesson of this course. And, in addition, in private study, the name of each sign should be repeated aloud as it is written, a proceeding which will train the ear to recognize the proper tound, and, at the same time, train the hand to form the sign upon the writer hearing the sound represented. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 27 Use a soft pencil for practicing, holding it between the first and second finger, keeping it in place by the thumb. This position enables the student to write with more ease than by holding the pencil between the thumb and first finger, besides insuring quicker writing generally, and more perfectly formed shorthand. The best pencil for shorthand practice or professional use is a soft medium pencil, called by different manufacturers No. 2, or SM; and the best paper is ordinary ruled foolscap, providing it does not have too smooth a surface, as pencil writing can not be done well on highly calendered paper. The more common the foolscap, therefore, the better, the finest qualities being only suitable for pen and ink, with which shorthand practice should never be attempted. EXERCISE I. V y. ......... %....! -^ ..... yff..) ..... 4&..1 ..... zoS ..... M..Z., 25 \ ...... ... ........ ^....C ..... ) ...... KEY I. i, Nigh; 2, nay; 3, knew; 4, pie; 5, pay; 6, chew; 7, Jew; 8, jay; 9, cue; 10, gay; n, bay; 12, by; 13, tie; 14, fie; 15, few; 16, vie; 17, view; 18, sue; 19, sigh; 20, thy; 21, shy; 22, lie; 23, lay; 24, die; 25, day; 26, due; 27, They say May knew my shoe. NOTE i The figures accompanying each word or outline in the above Exercise and Key, and others of this course, are inserted for the student's convenience in referring from the one to the other. They are not to be considered as any part of the phonographic signs. The same is true of all subsequent lessons as well. NOTE 2 Home students should learn every lesson of this course per- fectly enough to write each sign correctly when the key is slowly read aloud to them. This practice of writing from dictation should be done with every Exercise, and done well, before commencing another lesson. The lessons may be learned without such aid, but speed comes more quickly with it. NOTE 3 Students of these lessons, desirous of having their written exercises criticised, or desiring to ask any questions whatever, in regard to the lessons, or relative matters, can address the author, CURTIS HAVEN, P. O. Lock Box 1162, Philadelphia, Pa. 28 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. LESSON II. TIMELY SUGGESTIONS. Become perfectly familiar with one lesson before another is attempted. A careful revision each day of the exercises written on the previous one will prove an invaluable aid to the memory. It is only by repetition that you will obtain a complete familiarity with new exercises, therefore do not fail to write every new word or sign at least a dozen times before writing the exercise as a whole. For every hour spent in writing phonography spend a similar one in reading and rereading. This time will be well spent, while a non- compliance with this suggestion may cause infinite trouble in the stu- dent's early attempts at reporting. While practicing the exercises of any lesson, students should form the outlines both carefully and slowly, paying particular attention to the proper formation of shorthand characters, both regarding length and curvature. Careful practicing while learning will bring speed far more quickly than carelessly written exercises, besides bringing with such speed that without which speed is useless legibility. SMALL VISIBLE LETTERS. [Pronounced! [_as in oil.J A ( / H [PronoiiTiccol ^ Orv[ProTiounced as in owl. _ 87 [Or Ai df in ai^ Oo [Pronounced i w e U The letters Hay, Way and Whay, like the letters of first lesson, are used to spell words by position, above, on or beneath the line, signs i to 7, inclusive, indicating invisibly I by position above the line, A on the line, and U beneath. Do not imagine, because some signs of above list have capital let- ters near them and others small letters, that such distinction is repre- sented by them. There is no occasion for capital letters in Phonogra- phy, any more than in speech, and the use of a small Roman letter op- posite a sign is simply to help the student to remember that that sign has a short sound; and, upon the same principle, a Roman capital letter near a shorthand sign in the shorthand alphabet simply means that such shorthand sign possesses a long or ordinary sound. Write the shorthand letters of the present list in the following directions: E and short e, either upwards or downwards, according to convenience; Ai, Oo, Yay and U, from left to right. The other signs in above list write downwards. The signs representing the sounds of H, W and Wh, must always be called and referred to as Hay, Way and Whay; the signs opposite the small letters i, a and e should be called short-i, short-a and short-e; and the other signs in accordance with the letters opposite them, & or Ai being either pronounced and, or the same as A, excepting perhaps a trifle more prolonged, like the two a's in the word Baal, though even if A and Ai be pronounced exactly as one sound, no difficulty would arise in their use, as will be seen by future lessons. The signs represented by the small letters i, a, e and u require par- ticular attention, and, explanatory of their use, it is necessary to say that to spell by sound (which is the only way spelling is done in pho- nography), there must be, when writing them, a separate sign for each and every distinct sound; and, as I, A, E and U have each more than one sound, we, therefore, in phonography, when writing each sound, repre- sent it by a separate and distinct letter, the long sound of I, as heard in the word bite, being represented by the first sign in the list heading this lesson; the short sound of i, as heard in the word bit. being indicated by the ninth sign in same list; the ordinary sound of A, as heard in the word Jate, by the third sign in the list; the long sound of Ai, rs indi- 30 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. cated in pronouncing the word fail, by the seventh sign in the list; the long sound of E, as heard in the word feet, by the fourteenth sign in the list; the short sound of e, as in met, by the thirteenth sign; long sound of U, as heard in the word // Z- r ,n VX-L -K/r [Pronounced v y*s Mb orMpyrjjfS orMP\ i i^ -~* Nd" [Pronounced o [Short -o as in orj oo[Short-oo R - Ai or fat ^ Arm or Ivem. . Oo __ R v. /Short -i ^ r c Way ( Ith or Thee y 3Kort - o ) S j /Short - e ) z> r E J Ish or Zhee r L n Yaj or 3hort-u V U ^ M w 3Kort-oo ./v Emb or Emp ^ N a Ah \ s 3hort - ah w Ing 5 Aw The above Complete Visible Alphabet ot Practical Phonography is composed of twenty-one large letters, about three-sixteenths of an inch in length, and twenty-one small characters, made about one-eight the size of the large ones. Twenty-four of these letters are called con- sonants and eighteen vowels. All the large letters and the small ones Hay, Way and Whay are the consonant letters, the remainder of the small letters being the vowels. 34 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Now, for further successful progress in these lessons, it is especially necessary that every sign of the Visible Alphabet be so thoroughly familiar to the eye of the student that any of those signs be known when not presented in the ordinary order of their arrangement, and hence, for memorizing, they are illustrated in comparative form below: CONSONANTS. VOWEL2. \ 1 \ v_ -^ 1 C c , ) ) * \ V. ^> 1 > / j r * r j -- ^* ass ^ w no Students should practice memorizing the alphabet until the letters in foregoing schedule can be read with considerable facility, both from left to right and right to left, before attempting to learn further exer- cises. Such memorizing will not only give a thorough acquaintance with the names of the signs of the Visible Alphabet, but the separation of the vowels and consonants, as in the schedule, will also serve to im- press upon the mind which signs are consonants and which visible vowels. The use of the vowel signs in spelling personal names is shown in signs 4 to 20 in Exercise, though all spelling, even in personal names, should be done phonetically, viz: R, long- 1 and T, as in sign 4 in Exercise, spells the personal name of Wright, etc. , etc., because even in writing personal names, all that is necessary is to write sounds, for, in speaking Mr. Wright's name, we would simply utter the sounds of R, long-I and T, and hence we need no more representation in phonography, but we generally write the vowel sign in personal names instead of in- dicating it invisibly, for reasons which will be explained in a future lesson, though in spelling the common words, right or write, we would have indicated the vowel sound by position. The numeral eight is spelled ai-t, as in sentence in sign 45. The proper place for all outlines which do not indicate invisible vowels is on the line of writing, hence, all the proper names of signs 4 tc 20 in the Exercise are commenced or rest on the line. It is only when vowels are indicated /^visibly that outlines are commenced above, HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 35 through or beneath the line, and even then it is only the first consonant which takes position, other consonants taking whatever position is con- venient at the time, as with signs 27 and 33 in Exercise, wherein the second wnitten letter is written out of position simply because the first consonant must have position, and both cannot. It will doubtless be no little satisfaction to the beginner, however he or she may love study, to know that with this lesson terminates all visible alphabetical memorizing, enough means having now been pre- sented to represent, phonographically, any sound of the English lan- guage. The elements of phonography being now within the grasp of the learner, future lessons will be entirely taken up with interesting contractions and practical application of the system. THE CIRCLES S AND Z. Rapidity in writing shorthand frequently necessitates, for the representation of the oft-recurring sounds of S and Z, a much shorter method than that found in our Visible Alphabet. A small light circle is therefore often used to represent the hissing sound of S, and a shaded small circle to indicate Z under similar cir- cumstances. These circles are joined to other consonants by writing them on the most convenient side of curved letters, and on the right or upper side of straight ones, though they may be placed at either end of any letter, as in following diagrams, the circle being read where written: St 3k SI 33 Ps L$ RS Ls The superiority ot these circles in point of speed, over the long signs for S or Z, is a fact which will be more or less appreciated and taken advantage of by the student. But, lest there be a disposition to do away entirely with the original signs representing these sounds in the Visible Alphabet, it is necessary to state that there are instances wherein the signs for S and Z, as written in the Visible Alphabet, must be employed. They are: 36 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. First. When either the sound of S or Z constitute the only con- sonant of a word, as in sign 21 of this Exercise. Second. When either of the sounds of S or Z is the first con- sonant in a word, and is preceded by an invisible vowel, as in sign 22. Third. When an invisible vowel sound terminates a word in which either S or Z happen to be the last consonant. Signs 26, 27, 33, 35 and 36. Under the above three rules, the long S or Z of the Visible Alphabet must be used, and in the second and third rules, the student, when reading, has an infallible guide whereby to determine when an in- visible vowel precedes or follows either S or Z in a consonant combina- tion. In other words, when he sees the S or Z of the Visible Alphabet, beginning such a combination, he knows an invisible vowel must be read before and in conjunction with it, and that, when either of those long letters ends such a combination, there is an invisible vowel following it, as part of the word. Under all circumstances not covered by above three rules, use the circle S or Z wherever possible. For instance, when either the sound of S or Z begin a combination, with no vowel before it, use the circle as in signs 23, 29, 30, 37, 38 and 40 in Exercise. When the sounds of S or Z end any combination, with no vowel sound after, use the circles, as in signs 24, 25, 28, 32, 34, 39 and 41 in Exercise. Compare sign 22, indicating a preceding vowel, and sign 23, with no vowel before the S. Also compare sign 25, indicating no final vowel sound, with sign 26, indicating the final vowel E sound of Y. Also compare sign 34, maz, spelled in shorthand with no final vowel sound, and sign 35, ma-zy, showing the final E sound of Y by full sized Z. Just here the student may ask how it is known that the vowel sound is E following long-S in signs 26 and 27, or following Z in signs 33, 35 and 36. The answer to this is, that in English the final sound of such words ending in Y is always pronounced nearly like the vowel E, and therefore all that is necessary is to remember that when a vowel sound ends a word whose last visible letter is S or Z, the shorthander is to write the long S or Z, as in the instances -just named, and when he or she reads those letters, to pronounce after them the vowel sound of E, when the key to the outline will be at once evident. The E in case, (sign 24), race (sign 25), sire (sign 30), maze (sign 34), etc., is of course silent and not considered in shorthand spelling. A double-sized light circle, written alone or joined to other letters in accordance with the rule governing the small circles, represents the sounds srs, sez, size, zes, zez, etc.. See signs 42, 43 and 44 in Exercise. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. ,7 This double-sized circle must not be mistaken for double-s (ss) in the English spelling of the word /ass, etc. In phonography no letters are wasted and lass and kindred words terminating with double-s, are spelled quite as legibly, and much more economically, thus: 1-a-s, lass. These small and large circles are joined to the letters R and Arm in the same manner and upon the same sides as those circles are joined to K or Gay. See signs 24, 25 and 30. This is no more than proper, for R and Arm are written from left to right, as K and Gay are, and should, therefore, be treated similarly in this respect. This rule the student will have frequent cause for recalling in future lessons and he or she should bear it well in mind and on all occasions where junctions are made with, or circles added to, the letters R and Arm, such junctures and additions must be made to R and Arm in precisely the same manner that they would be added to K or Gay. When joining shaded circle-Z to letters, shade most convenient way. C, Q AND X. There are three letters which students who have had but little experience in spelling by sound will look in vain for among the letters of our Visible Alphabet, viz. : the Roman letters C, Q and X. The Roman C is not contained therein, because, in spelling by sound, phonographers do not need the help of that letter, the soft sound of C, as heard in the word city, being represented in phonography by the phonographic S, that word being spelled sit-e, as in sign 29 in Exercise; while the hard sound of C, as heard in case, is represented by K, and that word spelled k-a-s, as in sign 24 in Exercise. The soft and hard sounds of the Roman letter G are similarly dealt with in phonography, J being used to spell such words as gypsy and sagt (thusjip-se)gy/sfy; s-a.-j,sage~) as in signs 27 and 31 in Exercise; the hard sound of the Roman letter G, as heard in the word game, being in- dicated phonographically by the letter Gay of our Visible Alphabet, aa seen in sign 28 in Exercise. The letters Q and X are not incorporated in our Visible Alphabet, because those letters are not needed in spelling by sound, and are neve*- so used, they being themselves composed of more than OAC simple sound and therefore made by the union of other letters and really spelled thus: K-u, Q; short-e, K and circle-S, X; as in sentence 45 in Exercise, in which sentence is also shown how to represent the letter C as the initial of a person's name (by spelling it thus: s-e, C) which is the plan upon which all initials are represented in shorthand writing, as is fully explained in the last lesson of this course. 449514 38 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. HOLDING THE PENCIL. In Lesson I the student is requested, when writing phonography, to hold the pen or pencil between the first and second fingers, merely keeping it in place with the thumb. Most phonographers employ this method, though there are a few who profess to prefer the ordinary pen- manship style, saying that a special method for shorthand writing is sim- ply affectation. This is a mistake. The philosophy of the matter is, that in ordinary penmanship the letters all slant in one direction, and are written always either downward from the right or upward from the left, and hence the regular penmanship manner of holding the pen is de- cidedly preferable in ordinary writing; but in writing phonographically the shorthand characters are formed in such a variety of directions, downward from the right, perpendicularly, horizontally, etc., etc., that a special position of the hand, if one would make the characters easily and rapidly, is a requisite which is best secured by holding the pen or pencil between the first and second fingers, by which plan the hand is less liable to become cramped from excess of work. . ..2 9. ...... So S f.. KEY III. i, rye; 2, ray; 3, rue; 4, Wright; 5, Coyle; 6, Gale; 7, Coke; 8, Power; 9, Bain; 10, Roote; n, Rich; 12, Mack; 13, Dodd; 14, Wren; 15, Peel; 16, Kurr; 17, Cuba; 18, Foote; 19, Shah; 20, Pawn; 21, say; 22, ask; 23, sack; 24, case; 25, race; 26, racy; 27, Gypsey; 28, gas; 29, city; 30, sire; 31, sage; 32, dies; 33, dizzy; 34, maze; 35, mazy; 36, lazy; 37, same; 38, save; 39, vice; 40, safe; 41, face; 42, faces; 43, paces; 44, races; 45, Miss C Q X. Cook buys eight laces a day. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 39 LESSON IV. ADDITIONAL USE OF THE VISIBLE VOWELS. In words wherein visible vowels are necessary, and where the junc- ture of a visible vowel with the required consonant or consonants would be difficult or impossible to accomplish, a sign representing another sound of the same Roman vowel is substituted. For instance, it would be impossible to recognize the straight sign for long I, when joined to the letter P, and yet to properly read the word Pine, when it is a person's name, it is necessary to visibly represent the vowel sound. To do this we join the sign for short-i, and, in order to show that we in- tend the sound meant to be long-I, we thicken short-i, as it is shown in sign 26 in Exercise, which thickening tells us that it is substituted for long-I. Similarly, as shown in other signs in this book, other light vowels may be substituted to represent the long ones by thickening, excepting the sign for short-a, which is not needed to be substituted for long, ordi- nary A, because the sound for Ai can be better employed, as in sign 24 in Exercise, though as A and Ai represent sounds so very similar that most people make no difference in their pronunciation, it is not neces- sary to thicken either A or Ai when substituted for each other, either sign being used for the other without particular indication. In instances where the long sounds of O and Oo need to be shown, but will not join, the signs for their short sounds are used, and bowed in the oppo- site direction to show substitution, short-o being turned around in the form of a heavy letter Way, and short-oo, like a heavy short-u, as in signs 27 and 28 in Exercise. Short-oo, when made in the shape of a short-u, will not be mistaken for that letter; because, when the sign for long-U is substituted for the short one it is only shaded at one end of the curve, while short-oo is thick all over. The latter is shown in sign 28 in Exercise. For a similar reason short-u, when shaded to indicate the sound of long-U, will not be mistaken for the substituted short-oo. When Oi is required to be added to B and similar shaped charac- ters, it may be bowed in the shape of short-a, as in sign 31 in Exercise, and being written heavy will not be mistaken for short-a, as short-a is never thickened when substituted for any other sound of A. To accommodate the downward stroke of Ow, the letter Hay is written upward, as in sign 25 in Exercise, but as Hay should generally be written downward, Ow would have to be written upward upon such other occasions. Ah may be used for Aw by thickening beginning stroke. Sign 29. 40 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Ah and short-ah may be substituted for each other without thicken- ing. The sign for Ah or short-ah may be substituted for A or short-a in instances where the regular sign for A or short-a would not join, as in illustrations iuriher on. This substitution of the vowel signs for one another, as shown in signs 24 to 31 in our Exercise, as above described, illustrate instances which will, however, very seldom occur, and need not cause any fear of connection on the part of the student. The vowel signs will, in general, join easily when required, as they do in last lesson, without substitutes. If students prefer, they need not join the vowels. Signs 31 and 32. COALESCING VISIBLE VOWELS. Besides the preceding described uses for the visible vowels, they are also employed in instances where two vowel sounds together ter- minate a word, as with the vowel sounds of a and e pronounced ter- minating the word payee. Sign 18 in Exercise. In such case and others illustrated in the Exercise, it would be impossible to invisibly represent two sounds by one preceding consonant sign, and a visible vowel cannot indicate an invisible one, nor a consonant indicate one invisible and one visible vowel at the same time. Hence, the necessity and wisdom in writing both vowel sounds when they together terminate a word. In some instances, however, as in such words as Uriah, Noah, etc., the final Roman ah possesses a sort of neutral sound, in which the aspirate sound of H seems to take so important a part, the sound being eh, that, in such cases, especially if the sign for short-e would not make a perfect juncture, the sign for Hay may be joined terminating the outline, providing Hay be written upwards when so joined, as in signs 21 and 22, etc. in Exercise. This use of the letter Hay will not cause it to clash with its ordinary use as a consonant, because, as a consonant, it would not occur following a visible vowel, and also because of the fact that it is written downwards as a consonant, while, in the representation of i-ah and o-ah, it is written upwards. I-ah and O-ah are written the same when they occur preceding a word, as in O^ccn, where the sound is O-eh-n. If Owen were to be written simply O-n, as some suppose, it might be read as Own. Therefore, indicate the eh sound, as in sign 23. It will be noticed in writing the names Uriah, Noah, etc., that no provision is made in phonography to indicate capital letters. In other words, the capital letter N in Noah (sign 22), is represented by HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 4r the same sign which is used to indicate the small letter n in knew, sign 3 in Lesson I. This principle is founded upon the fact that, as people do not indicate capital letters when they speak, it is, therefore, equally unnecessary to represent them in phonography, and as phonographers write from sound entirely, no confusion can arise in reading one's short- hand notes even without capital letter indication. VISIBLE VOWEL JUNCTURES. As it is in only a very few words of our language wherein it is necessary to write vowels, the student will seldom be required to write such cumbrous outlines as predominate this lesson, vowels in general being indicated invisibly, as in Exercise of tirst and succeeding lessons. The principal object of this lesson is to show students how to join vowels when necessary, in personal names and initials, and though, in writing the latter, the vowel signs should always be employed for reasons which studeiits will understand better as they progress, yet, even in personal names, if students are thoroughly familiar with the personality they are writing about, they need not insert vowels unless they so desire, bu: - simply write the consonant outline in position to indicate the vowel, just as common words are written phonographically. THE INVISIBLE ALPHABET. In Lesson I was explained the application of the main principle of the Invisible Alphabet of Haven's Practical Phonography, in indicating the vowel sounds of I, A and U invisibly by writing a consonant, after which one of those vowel sounds occurred, either above, on, through or beneath the line of writing, according to whichever vowel was intended at the time, and such principle has been used throughout the Exercise of each lesson preceding this, but the positions of the consonants were given no technical names. The student now being prepared for further explanation concerning the entire Invisible Alphabet, it becomes neces- sary to state that those three positions above, on, through or beneath the line of writing are known respectively as the first, second and third positions, and the vowels represented by such positions are known as first-place vowels, second-place vowels or third-place vowels, the sound of I, therefore, when represented invisibly, being a first-place vowel; A., a second-place vowel, and U, a third-place vowel. But those three vowels are not the only ones so represented and so named. On the contrary, the entire .eighteen vowel sounds of the English language are divided into those three classes first-place, second-place, and third-place vowels and are represented invisibly by those three positions only,in accordance with the table at top of next page: 42 Fl RST PLACE VOWELS SECOND PLACE VO\VELS TPIIRD PLACE VOWELS 01 A O U i OO ow HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. j Long sound, as heard in b^ Vel, Ter 1 r Tel TKer ( C TKel Der 1 \ Del E$er 5 JN Cher / r CThel 3her J) i ... Jer / f Jel Ler r TRIPLE AJJD QUADRUPLE CONSONANTS. The time-saving principle of double consonants has just been explained; but there are two still greater consonant combinations, known as triple and quadruple series. The triple series is of two kinds the Pier and Prel series and the Sper and Spel series, both of which are illustrated at top of next page: HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Rle Krel e/ Srel ^ Srmel Sker 3ger Sper 3ber 3ter 3c_Ker 3jer 3fer Stiv er S^el The above Pier and Prel series of triple consonants are made by en- larging the hooks of the Per and Pel series of double consonants. See signs 23 to 32 inclusive in Exercise. This is merely the adding of both beginning hooks R and L, on same side of the letter at one time. The written hook itself remains the R hook or L, hook according to which side it is on, the other hook being read between the the full sized letter and the hook, the fact that the written hook is far away from the full sized letter, indicating the insertion of the invisible hook. Pronounce the full sized letter first, invisible consonant next, and written hook last. The Sper and Spel series of triple consonants in foregoing plate is formed by converting into a circle the R hook of the straight letters of the Per and Pel series of double consonants (signs 55, 58 and 59 in- clusive); by writing the S circle inside the L, hook of the straight letters of the Per and Pel aeries of double consonants (signs 56, 57 and 60) and inside both the L, and R hooks of the curved letters, Signs 63, 65 and 66 inclusive. Where curved letters are only shaded to add L or R, the circle S is added naturally, as in signs 61, 62 and 64. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 51 Sper, Sjer, Sker, etc., (signs 55, 58 and 59), will not clash with dp, Sj, Sk, etc. ; because in Sper, Sjer, Sker, etc., the circle is written on the left and lower sides of the main consonant to add R, while in the latter, the circle S is on its natural side. Compare signs 55, 58 and 59 of this lesson with 29, 31 and 23 of Exercise to Lesson III. The quadruple series of consonants, like the 'triple, are of two kinds, the Spier and Sprel series and the Sesper series. The Spier and Sprel series are formed by adding a circle S inside the hook of the Pier and Prel series of double consonants. See signs 67 to 71 inclusive and the following diagram: Srraler Skier Sgler Spier SHer iSrrel Srmrel Skrel Sdler ScKler Sjler N Sbrel P Sdrel 5jrel $mler <5^ 5N Smrel Snler ^ ..6S d f/i?" S ..s r a.c-^..$'i\.,8 f zt?\ foClkfe^J^fef^^ KEY V. i, Win; 2, wing; 3, wave; 4, week; 5, wag; 6, warm; 7, wire; 8, windy; 9, whale; 10, whistle; n,rare; 12, rule; 13, cry; 14, goal; 15, pry; 16, blow; 17, try; 18, deal; 19, chair; 20, jail; 21, drew; 22, dowry; 23, roller; 24, rural; 25, collar; 26, girl; 27, pillar; 28, barrel; 29, dealer; 30, trial; 31, jailer; 32, Charles; 33, rarer; 34, fall; 35, fare; 36, veer; 37, vale; 38, Ethel; 39, their; 40, icer; 41, user; 42, share; 43, shawl; 44, lore; 45, more; 46, mill; 47, nail; 48, near; 49, rail; 50, armor; 51, kill; 52, shilling; 53, facial; 54, shellac; 55, spree; 56, sable; 57, settle; 58, sieger; 59, soaker; 60, saggle; 61, safer; 62, civil; 63, savor; 64, slur; 65, sinner; 66, small; 67, sabler; 68, sprawl; 69, settler; 70, sidereal; 71, secular; 72, buckler; 73, tunnel; 74, tippler; 75, treacle; 76, strainer; 77, sisterly; 78, cobbler; 79, corporal; 80, grammar; 81, viper; 82, labor; 83, leers; 84, descry; 85, straggle; 86, straggler; 87, stickler; 88, George tore May's silk dress. fjf HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. LESSON VI. FINAL HOOKS. A small final hook, written on the right-hand side of upright and slanting straight characters, and on the upper side of horizontal ones, represents the addition of either F or V. Signs i, 3, 5, 7 and 9, in Exercise. S or Z may be added to this hook by writing the circle within the hook. Signs 13, 15, 17, etc. This F or V hook is not in- tended to be added to the curved letters F, V, etc., although some writers use a small shaded final hook on curves to represent F or V, as in signs 41 and 46. A similarly sized final hook, written on the left-hand side of upright and slanting straight letters, on the lower side of horizontal ones, and added in the most convenient manner to curved letters, represents the addition of N. Signs 2, 4, 6, 8 and 37 in Exercise. The S or Z circle is added to this hook, on curved letters, by writing the circle within the hook (signs 40, 43 and 50); and to the straight consonants, by converting the N hook into a complete circle (signs 14, 16, 18, 20 and 22), in a manner similar to that by which S is added to Per in Lesson V. This conversion of the N hook into a circle, forms what is called the Ns circle, which need not be mistaken for the plain circle S, because the original circle S is written en the right hand side of straight, upright, and the upper side of horizontal characters. The following cut illustrates these hooks exactly and also the manner in which the S and Ns circles are added to them. H-n ^ ^^G R-n$ ^'v > ^ R-vS fWn-n. ^, ^^^& Rm-n$ ^ ^ RttL-Jl R-n 3 o K-TI5 M v K- s __j> _^ rv vs Gray-n 9 -75 (iay-n$ Gay-* _ TI? g> Gay- P-n \ \ P-n.$ P-f ^ ^ p-vi B-n N % B-nS B4 \ \9 B-^| T-n J J T-n$ T 7 1 IP T-& D-n. J J D-ns 1 1 T> fS t w l/~ v Ch-n y / Ch-nS Ch4 / / CK-$4 J-n / J J-nS j / / J- S (o v yg The Ns circle may be enlarged to represent the sounds of Nses or HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 55 Nzes, signs 51, 53, etc, the Nses circle really being a Ses circle written on the N hook side. Neither the Ns circle nor the Nses circle are ever added to curved letters. A large sized final hook, written on the same side of full sized con- sonants as that to which the F or V hook is added, represents the ad- dition of the sounds Vive, Viv or Tiv. Signs 26, 28 and 30 in Exercise. The Tiv hook, like the V hook, is not intended to be added to curved letters, but some writers use a large shaded final hook on curves to in- dicate Tiv, as in sign 48. The objection to these shaded final hooks is that generally they have to be written backwards and as it is often hard to form them, it is quite as easy to write the V or Tiv in full. A large final hook, written on the same side of full sized consonants as that on which the N hook is written, represents the addition of the sound Shun, as heard in the words represented by signs 25, 27, 29 and 31 in Exercise. By consulting below diagrams, it will be seen that the Shun hook is an enlarged N hook, the letter N being the last sound in Shun. Similarly, the Tiv hook is an enlarged V hook, the sound of V being the terminating sound of Tiv. Vt/ SKun orV ^ Tiv Some phonographers write the Shun and Tiv hooks transposed, but this is very inadvisable, for many reasons. For instance, by writing the Shun hook on the under side of K, the word affectionate (sign 104) is very easily written, but write the Shun hook on the reverse side and the student will find that he can write as far as the sound Shun in the word, but when he attempts to add the final syllable ate, his Shun will be spoiled entirely. This will never happen in writing the syllables Shun or Tiv in the positions prescribed in these lessons. The only syllables which are most likely to follow Tiv are ly or ness, the latter being easily added in either case and the former (7y) being easily added to Tiv only when Tiv is written upon the side prescribed in this lesson. See sign 102 in Exercise. Then again, it is much more reasonable to suppose that Tiv, containing a V sound, should be written on the same side as the V hook, and the syllable Shun, containing an N sound, should be written on the same side as an N hook, an arrangement which is also a great aid to the memory. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. The circle S or Z is added to both the Shun and Tiv hooks, by enclosing the circle S or Z within the hooks in the manner illustrated by signs 24 and 44 in Exercise. In adding the circle to these large hooks, care should be taken that this addition does not crowd those large hooks into a resemblance to the smaller F or V or N hooks. This is easily avoided by making the large hooks somewhat larger, when adding the circle, than ordinary. The following schedule, which shows how the Shun and Tiv hooks are added to straight letters, gives the proper sizes for the hooks, with or without the circle S. R-ghun ^o ^> R - shuns R-tiv *? O T) x^ J>-tlV5 Rrm-shun ^o XQRm- shuns Rra-tiv ^ ^ Rtn-tiv^ K-shun D ~~^> R- shuns K.-tiv _? __S) K-tivs Gay- shun """5 "^5 Gay- shuns Gay-tiv _j S Gay- tivs P-shun o e> P- shunS P-tiv V> \9 ?-tivs B-shun 3 O B-shujiS B-tiv V V B-tiv5 T-shun J J T- shuns T-tir L Is T-tivs D-shun iJ Ifet As will be seen in Exercise, the St and Str loops are added either beginning or ending a word, and in some combinations may easily be employed in the middle of a word. See sign 100. When the circle S is the last consonant of a word, and is imme- diately preceded by the loop St, Sd or Str, the circle S may be added to those letters, as in signs 91 and 92. The St and Str loops are added to the curved letters on the most convenient side, in the same manner as the circle S is added. Signs 72, 77, 93, etc. The word lesson is written downwards in sign 106, where the words a single lesson, are joined together. This joining is called phrasing and is fully explained in other lessons. When lesson is written alone, it must be written upwards, because L is written upwards when alone. The word ten in sign 106 is written on the line, because it is a fre- quently occurring word and ma}' be easily read in that position, which is the fastest position in which to write. This ignoring of position-vocalization to place words in the posi- tion in which they may be most easily read is a principle which students had best not apply to words not explained in these lessons. 60 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. EXIBCISX VI. ^^ ^^J.jM.^ M KEY VI. i, roof; 2, remain; 3, cave; 4, gain; 5, puff ; 6, bone; 7, tough; 8, down; 9, chaff; 10, June; n, puffy^ 12, downy; 13, roofs; 14, remains; 15, cave?-; 16, gains; 17, puffs; 18, bones; 19, staffs; 20, downs; 21, chiefs; 22, Junes; 23. China; 24, revives; 25, ration; 26, active; 27, caution; 28, po-tive; 29, potion; 30, dative; 31, tuition; 32, stations; 33, stationary; 34, fun; 35, frown; 36, fashion; 37, vine; 38, evasion; 39, loan; 40, loans; 41, love; 42, man; 43, man's; 44, missions; 45, known; 46, knife; 47, nation; 48, native; 49, shown; 50, shines; 51, dances; 52, prances; 53, tenses; 54, bounces; 55, possession; 56, decision; 57, transition; 58, transitions; 59, translation; 60, Johnson; .61, Wisconsin; 62, post; 63, praised; 64, blest; 65, trust; 66, staid; 67, roast; 68, storm; 69, stick; 70, stag; 71, streak; 72, stream; 73, test; 74, toast; 75, toaster; 76, stride; 77, fast; 78; list; 79, steel; 80, stiff; Si, mist; 82, stop; 83, stopper; 84, strop; 85, stropper; 86, chaste; 87, chanced; 88, poster; 89, punster; 90, coast; 91, coasters; 92, spinsters; 93, fluster; 94, bolster; 95, faster; 96, strife; 97, strive; 98, string; 99, strangle; 100, justify; 101, affect- ive; 102, affectively; 103, affection; 104, affectionate; 105, affectionately; 106, A single lesson well gotten surpasses, ten merely glanced through. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 6 r LESSON VII. THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. T and D occur so frequently in words of daily use, and the repre- sentation of those letters, by writing their full phonographic outlines, is often so cumbrous, that a shorter way of expressing their sounds was devised early in the history of phonography. It is done by halving the consonant which immediately precedes T or D, and is termed the Halv- ing Principle. Therefore, all full-sized consonants, whether simple or compound, excepting Ing and Emb or Emp, when halved, express the addition of either T or D. Signs i to 41 in Exercise. Ing nor Emb and Emp, not being halved, when the sound D is re- quired to be added to the light strokes of M and N, those letters should also be made heavy, besides being halved. Signs 9 and 10. When the sound of the letter T is required to be added, the signs should remain slight. Signs 8 and n. Always write the light stroke L-t (sign 6) upwards, and the heavy stroke L-r-d (sign 7) downwards. A halved S is sometimes more conveniently stricken upwards than downwards, as in sign 59. In making use of the half-length consonants, care should be taken that such use does not become an abuse. For instance, while the word might may be rightly written as in sign II in Exercise, mighty must be written as in sign 12, because, though both words possess the same phonographic consonants (M and T), yet there is a concluding vowel sound in mighty which renders it a necessity, for complete pronunciation and vocalization, that the extended form be employed. This rule ap- plies to all words terminating with a vowel sound. T or D are added after N or V hooks, by shortening the main con- sonant to which the hook in question occurs, as in signs 14, 27, 31, 32, 43 and 57. This is really equivalent to shortening the entire sign. In signs 42 and 43 the hook V is made in the most convenient shape. It will not, so made, clash with any other hook. CONSONANTS OF DOUBLE AND TRIPLE SIZE. To express the addition of the sounds ter, der, cher and ther, full sized consonants are made twice their .usual length. Signs 69 to 90 in Exercise. . This principle is also taken advantage of by experienced phonographers to represent the addition of the words their and there. This doubling principle may also be employed to add the sounds of ker and ger to Ing, and the sounds of per and bcr to M. Signs 99 to 103. In applying this doubling principle to the heavy consonants B, D, 62 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. etc., as in such words as debtor, be careful, throughout the entire length of the double letter, to preserve the heavy stroke, as in sign 70, in order that it may not be taken for the word deity, sign 71. When, in a sentence, any of the syllables ter, der, cher or ther is immediately followed by either of -the words their or there, the syllable and word may be spmetimes together represented by tripling the pre- ceding consonant, as in signs 91, 93, 95, 97 and 98. This principle of doubling and tripling consonants is, of course, not applicable to any of the small letters of the Visible Alphabet, excepting Way and Whay, it being applied to those last named letters in the manner shown by signs 87 to 9 1 in Exercise. Consonants, when made double and triple size, indicate the invisible vowel by the first half of their outline, the vowel O of the word bol der being shown by the position of the first half of sign 69, the position of the second half of that outline taking no part in invisible vowel indication. INVISIBLE INDICATION OF PRECEDING VOWELS. In one of the paragraphs of Lesson III, the necessity for economy in word outline is incidently referred to, the word lass being used in illustration. By reference to the paragraph in question, it will be seen that the student is directed to spell lass and kindred words that end in double S, with a single S, thus: 1-a-s, lass. This exercise of economy in the use of the consonants is still more essential in words of more than one syllable, the young phonographer having most need for caution in those words in which the same consonants occur together in the ordinary spelling, as // in illiberal, rr in irregular, etc., etc. Young phonograph- ers are very prone to write illiberal with two commencing phonographic L's, when one commencing L is sufficient illiberal, irregular, immoral and kindred words being divided into phonographic sound syllables, .thus: short-i and li-brel for illiberal; short- i and re-glar for irregular; short-i and mrl for immoral. In other words,there are exactly the same consonant sounds in immoral and such words as there are in moral, etc. that is, m-r-1 the only difference being the commencing short-i; there- fore moral and immoral should have the same consonant outline in short- hand, illiberal the same consonant outline as liberal, etc., etc.; the dis- tinction between them being made by placing the word commencing with the short-i abort the line of writing, as in signs 105, 107 and 109 in Exercise, the words moral, regular and liberal being placed on the line of writing, independent of their vowel sounds, they being words not needing invisible vowel indication, but needing to be in easiest position. This brings us to the subject introduced by the heading to this por- HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 63 tion of the lesson the Invisible Indication of Preceding Vowels the preceding vowel, in the case of such words as immoral, irregular, etc., being indicated by placing the outline in the first position, above the line. This is for one class of words having a commencing vowel. An- other class, whose commencing vowel is followed by the so-und of S, we indicate that commencing vowel by writing the long-S, as in sign 22, in Lesson III. If the commencing vowel should be immediately followed by the sound of L, we can indicate that preceding vowel by writing L downwards, as in signs 112, 114, 115, in this Exercise, as could also be done in the case of sign 107, if the student prefers, though in sign 107 it is not necessary, for the rule for // applies there. The writing of L downwards to indicate a vowel preceding it, applies also to syllables which are not the first syllables of a word. For instance, the syllable el of fuel, contains a vowel preceding the letter L of el, and therefore the Lin that outline is written downwards. Sign in in this Exercise. Wherever a vowel follows L, write L upwards, as in signs no and 113. A vowel preceding S is indicated, as explained in Lesson III, by writing the S of the Invisible Alphabet, as in the word ask, sign 22 in Lesson III, above refered to, and as in signs 66 and 67 of this lesson. Occasionally, a commencing vowel may be indicated by what is known as the fourth position i, e., writing the first consonant of the word in question just under and touching the line of writing, as in signs 119 and 1 20. This position represents any commencing vowel, it being used only when the character of the vowel itself is not important, the writer merely needing to know that there is a preceding vowel to be able to read the outline. It is best not to use this plan excepting' where the word has also a conspicuous third-place vowel elsewhere in its sound. The author does not particularly commend this fourth position plan; and, in fact, rather than hesitate between rules, the author would remind students that they can always use visible vowels to words commencing with a vowel, when they so desire, and it is often quite as convenient, as in signs 116, 117 and 118, though there are many occasions where the consonant outline alone is so plain that a Deginning vowel does not need indication, as in such words as admission and attention, signs 121 and 122. This matter of indicating an invisible beginning vowel is, after all, one which students of all methods of phonography must regulate for themselves. Some will find nearly all outlines perfectly legible without indicating invisible preceding vowels, while others who do not possess quite as good a memory of sight may need to make such indications frequently. Above rules, however, apply to all cases. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. EXER-CISE VII. [ AZ .<*43 :^44^4v N f ^ '^^ ^.Sl\.faJ.ff3 ^4.. 75, culture; 76, fitter; 77, father; 78, farther; 79, falter; 80, uther; 82, zither; 83, meter; 84, mother; 85, furniture; 86, sweeter; 88, water; 89, weather; 90, whether; 91, whether HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 5 C their; 92, enter; 93, enter their house; 94, center; 95, center their ideas; 96, further; 97, further their laws; 98, surrender their homes; 99, jumper: 100, hamper; 101, lumber; 102, tinker; 103, finger; 104, moral; 105, immoral; 106, liberal; 107, illiberal; 108, regular; 109, irregular; no. sickly; in, fuel; 112, alum; 113, likely; 114, elective; 115, elocutionist; 116, else; 117, item; 118, Edmund; 119, answer; 120, another; 121, ad- mission; 122, attention; 123, ablution; 124, intimation; 125, intention; 126, indicates; 127, indication; 128, indicated; 129, undivided; 130, injunction; 131, No brave man employs slander. LESSON VIII. There are a small number of brief words in our language, mostly one-syllabled, whose frequent occurrence and consequent rapid utter- ance precludes the possibility of writing them, even phonetically, as fast as they can be spoken. To provide for such emergencies, all methods of shorthand writing employ brief arbitrary characters called Word- Signs, some phonographies containing long lists of them. But, because of a better construction of principles, Haven's Practical Phonography requires only fifteen such arbitrary characters, all of which are contained in the following list: THE WOTVD-SIGHS. ...A... O JJ . All To ...>.... Two Too N .' Or Already But J Before The ....!.. On ...'.' . Ought ..., Who Whom An * The above list of , word-signs, being entirely arbitrary, students must not expect to find in them any element of previously explained principles that is, they must neither expect them to agree in position with their vowel sounds nor their outline to be composed of any portion of the consonants of the words they represent, the instances in which previously explained principles will be recognized being very few. 66 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Commit the list of word-signs thoroughly to memory in the manner described for memorizing the Visible Alphabet and repeatedly test your ability to write the proper signs without referring to the list. In the list of word-signs, the signs are placed beneath, on or over dotted lines. These dotted lines must not be mistaken to be a part of any of the signs. The dotted lines are supposed to be the lines of the paper on which one is writing, and are merely placed there, as in the Exercises of these les- sons, to show that the same word-sign, in order to represent different words, is sometimes written on, above or under the line, as in the case of the indication of invisible vowels. Thus, students find that, in phonography, words are sometimes denoted by position in the same manner that a vowel sound of a word is generally indicated by the position of a consonant. No difficulty need be apprehended in regard to deciphering such signs when met with in regular sentences. They will never be mis- taken for halved characters, nor for any of the small letters of the Visible Alphabet, which they may seem to resemble, as their uses are entirely different. They are not in same positions when written alone, and when used in sentences words preceding or following them are always perfect keys to them. It is well, however, to explain clearly their particular uses. In the list of word-signs there is one representing the article the. It is the fifth one of the light outlines presented in the list. Particular attention is called to that sign because it looks like the letter Hay, and because, for that reason, it must always be written in a particular direc- tion, that is, upwards, from left to right. As the outline stands alone in the list, the student may suppose that it does not matter in which direc- tion it is written, and if it were always written alone in actual use it would not matter; but even if it be but occasionally joined and then joined upwards, as is the case, it would be better to write the sign up- wards even when written alone, in order to form the habit, for very rapid writing is greatly a matter of habit. And, as it is particularly neces- sary, both for the purpose of speed and for legibility, that this sign for the be written always joined when possible, it will be understood how important it is at the outset to form the habit of writing the sign for the upward. The main object, in fact, of all the fifteen word-signs in Haven's Practical Phonography, is to facilitate junctures with each other, forming a principle of phrasing viz, writing two or more words connectedly with- out lifting the pen a principle which means a great deal in point of HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 67 speed in writing shorthand and can be made an efficient aid to reading one's notes if the simple directions in regard to junctures are carefully observed. Commencing with sign i in Exercise, some three lines of said Exercise will be seen to be devoted to illustrations of how these fifteen word-signs are joined into beautiful little phrases, which, by their brevity, give much speed, and, because of the fact that they look nothing like anything but what they mean, are also an important aid to legibility. By looking carefully at these first three lines of our Exercise, it will be noticed that the word-signs are joined to other characters. For in- stance, in sign i, the word-sign for of has the letter a joined to it, the juncture forming the phrase of a. In sign 4 the word he is joined to the word-sign for all, the word he being expressed by the letter Hay, the combination making the phrase all he. In sign 6 and is joined to all, the word and being expressed by the & or Ai of our Visible Alphabet, the phrase thus formed representing all and. In sign 12, the personal pronoun I is joined to the word-sign for or, making the phrase or I. Thus, by these four instances just noted, we have introduced the four words, /, he, a and and into the phrases, these four words not being needed in any list because a, I and and were given in the Alphabet in Lesson II, and the word he is, of course, naturally spelled with the letter Hay of the alphabet. In the same manner as the word he is spelled, we we can also spell the words we and you, the word we being spelled with the letter Way, and you by either of the signs for U or short-u of the Visible Alphabet, according to whichever of those two signs of U joins easiest. This gives us six words which we can join to these word- signs, and a peculiarity of all six is that they are attachable in any position, those six words when joined taking the position occupied by the other words to which they are joined. This is also the case with the word-sign for an and the word-sign for the of our list, so that those eight words, namely, the conjunction and, the articles a, an and the, and the four pronouns /, he, we and you, should always when possible be joined to other words in the sentences in which they occur, and they may be joined in any position, remember. In the list of word-signs, the sign for the is placed on the line, and the sign for an is placed under the line, but those positions are intended only for instances where it might be impossible to make a juncture, and where those words would have to be written alone, in which seldom- occurring instances, to read them, it is necessary they should have their own positions. They should always be joined when possible, in which 68 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. cases position does not need to be observed. Now, while position does not need to be observed in those eight words above-named when joined to other words, yet there are three words whose particular direction cf writing must be observed, and these simple rules here given, if observed strictly, will make them always clear in their meaning, where a violation of the rule would cause uncertainty. The three words referred to are the, he and /. If the sign for the be always written upwards in junctures and he always written downwards, notwithstanding they are both the same sign, they can never clash, as will be seen by comparing sign 4, all he, with sign 7, all the, in which instances it will be noticed that he is written downwards and the upwards. Sometimes students may suppose that they can distinguish the difference between he and the by position without re- gard to the direction in which the signs are written, but if it is borne in mind that those words are written in any position in junctures, that they must be joined when possible for speed purposes, and that the words to which they are joined must have the preference of position, it will be understood that the outlines for he and /// ^ e ar e too apt to say " I told you so;" 74, He showed great sense by the selection; 75, Before he saw the city he loved the farm; 76, The muscles move only by the law of the brain; 77, Why should you go on that journey that early? 78, None of the men seemed disposed to step aside; 79, The king may rule the nation, but a midget may rule the king; 80, A slovenly boy gains no deference a slovenly girl still less; 81, No two scientists hold like views on the departments of the art they follow; 82, The rain poured down steadily, but the soldiers remained erect and motionless through all; 83, Solomon gave attention to the wants of the nation he ruled and thus bene- fitted posterity; 84, Benefactions multiplied may create a growler, while a scarcity may cause an opposite effect; 85, To see a friend's faults one needs no spectacles, but one's own we fail to see even aided by a microscope; 86, Youth presents the best occasion to gain mind-capital old age weakens the energy, subdues one's ardor "too late" thus happens across one un- awares; 87, One's desires alternate with one's necessities. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. LESSON IX. COMMON ABBREVIATIONS. ...\ ..Up , party , patent ..N^.Hope ..\. Be, been, object V.To be Time, what v .. .It, take ;. ... At, out,tooTc .../..Dollar ...'...Do ....I. ..Had, today, to do ./...Each S- If, off Important-ce ....V_ For,4,4th,fortn ...X^-.Far.fact ....V- From ...^.Form .1. Ever ...7^\ Have, five ...TV. However ...TV. Value 7 Think .. x*N..Improve-d-ment In, any, never Thing, long .. >*/.. Language Young , '...With .... c ....Were, 1 .Would c .... 3 .. Where ...\ ...Them .../.. ..Though, thank if .......Either, author (. .. Other When _ Year ... I .Which, change ..../..Much, charge ../..Jesus ../..Advantage .../.Large n...YOU Beyond J w . gh "...Yet \.. Shall, usual-ly i Issue Yes u Yes sir ^.Qur ,hour .TTTT.Kingdom, common Can, came -Country, come Give-n _ Together" ....Y...Us,use^eaning ....V...Use fpronounced of use)..?.Is,his uz\..o..As,has the cipher . .Was ^~x o ........ Is it ..XTTTN.. Him, make Home ...<^ First, as it, has it ...Was it te.. o o *=* - x O> a/ Q/ .9$...96...9y.O'..9S r ....99....400. 6 .Witha-1 ../..Juvenile ...^.Religion ,.\ Able, belief .believe. \ ....\Liberty ...\Re-member ,.!Y. Brother, number ._>f..Pleasuf e, sure ..J}.. Measure, as sure (T..Well Mr . , remark-ed-able- ..J. .Ph i 1 anthr opy .... .Within ..,!.. Dear ./.. Angel \...Punish-ment \j..Above / Danger \j . .Twelve-fth ..\>....Then /....Than i..... Alone , eleven, learn !TTT7.Call, equal-ly niffir.ulf-.-y .J...Internal-ly 3 .....Eternal-ity Christian .. Divine, defendant (.....Revelation f_Gl ^ry-if y-f i ed .L...Differ-ent-ence /?. Revolution Human Agree, degree .xWork 1 Advance J . Denominate Opinion .^...Workmen jX?. Workman .. J Done Union Ll Condition 82 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. WORDS INDICATED BY HOOKS. As Emb is frequently employed in professional work to represent the words may be, sign 3 in Exercise, Way-Emb may be quite as readily employed for the phrase we may be, sign 3 in Exercise. This is on the principle that, as the letter Way represents we, the letter M, may, and B the verb be: therefore, Way-Emb, which really contains the consonant elements of all three words, can quite consistently be written for them altogether. Reasoning from this point of view, as Ith on the line spells they and the letter R will do for are, the combination Thr will answer for the phrase they are, as in sign i in Exercise. Upon the same plan, as the word w/7/is represented as a word-abbreviation by the letter L, we may occasionally use the hook L for the word will or even all, as in signs 6 to 17 in Exercise, and the N hook for the words own, been, than or one, as in signs 18 to 26 in Exercise. As sign 26 represents at one, sign 27 would, of course, by making the N hook into a circle, represent the words at once. To the word-signs or, biit, etc., and to any halved characters, such as did, the N hook can be used for the word not, as in signs 40, 41 and 42. To full sized characters, however, such as do, had, be, have, etc., the word not must be spelled by writing an N hook and halving the words do, had, etc., to add the T of not, as in signs 44 to 53 inclusive. We will not, sign 49, is a case in point. In that outline, analyzed, we find the beginning hook-Way represents we, the letter L, will, and the final N hook, together with the shortening of the entire combination to add T, indicates not. Result: We will not. May not, sign 53, and other similar abbreviations, are sub- ject to the same manner of analysis, the letter T being quite correctly added after a final hook by shortening the main consonant to which the hook is attached. Signs 57 and 58 illustrate instances where not must be written with a halved N to distinguish might and meant, to which not is there attached. Continuing the above plan, the words are and our may be represented by the hook R (signs 29 to 34 and 36 to 39) and off, forth, of, {/or have by the V hook (signs 59 to 76). Signs 35 and 36 show how your and our are distinguished in such combinations. The circle-S may be quite legibly employed to represent the pronoun us, when joined to some words. Signs 79 to 81 in Exercise. In many words possessing the same consonants, a difference of outline is taken advantage of, in order to aid legibility. The words last, lost and lowest possess the same consonant sounds (L-S-T) and have some position vowels, but should be distinguished by indicating the consonants in the three., different ways shown by signs 90 to 92 in Exercise, the most HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 83 frequently occurring word being given the shortest and easiesi made outline. Other instances of distinction are illustrated in signs 93 to 102. Without regard to size, when there is a choice, make use of such outlines for word representation, as are easiest made and afterwards interpreted. Thus, though both the outlines of sign 103 are proper ones for the word murder, yet the largest sign is best, because the crook in the shorter sign, caused by the juncture of R, necessitates the ex- penditure of more time than is required for making an uninterrupted outline such as the large outline for murder presents. As illustrated in Lesson IV, by the word customary (sign 67 in Ex- ercise to that lesson) many words are perfectly familiar by their con- sonant outline alone, and hence are written in the second position, that position being the easiest in which to write. Some of the word-ab- breviations are of that character, and so are the outlines for the words saith and said (pronounced seth and sed^) and also survey and circle, signs 105 to 109 in this lesson. In sign 5 in Exercise, the word certain is written cert, the letter N being omitted. This is one of a number of easily remembered contrac- tions which the student will meet with in these concluding lessons and which are to be accepted unconditionally as being the best forms for those words. Many of such contractions are really word-abbreviations, which it was thought best, for the purpose of memorizing, to give the pupils in their Exercises rather than arranged in the list-forms. The words in the sentences of this Exercise are also words of this character. In fact, there is no precise limit at which one need stop in this matter of abbreviations, providing the student keeps within the bounds of legibility, the latter being a matter upon which every phonographer must bring individual judgment to bear those whose memory is more retentive than their fingers are agile, being able to abbreviate with more safety than persons whose quickness of hand exceeds their capacity for mem- orizing the latter class not needing as much abbreviation as the former. But do not permit the thirst for abbreviations to interfere with the rep- resentation of SOUND SYLLABLES, in words of not very frequent occurrence. A proper appreciation of the sound syllables of language is a great aid to students in building cut- lines for infrequently occurring words, and it is, therefore, an aid that should be cultivated as much as possible. A good way to attain this result is to write words in as few syllables as possible, consistent with 84 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. legibility. ' For instance, do not divide the word vagrancy thus: va-ga- ran-see, sign 112; nor yet omit the final vowel sound as in va-grans, sign in. The shape of sign 112 forms too extended an outline for speed ? and that of sign 1 1 1 is too brief for legibility, while, by the use of the Ns circle as a termination, sign in fails to provide for the final invisible vowel, which is always entitled to representation by writing the last consonant in full. Vagrancy should be divided into sound syllables as in sign no va-gran-cy thus giving its final vowel full representation by the use of the full-sized letter S, and at the same time rendering the word outline sufficiently brief for rapid writing. NS VERSUS S. The small circle S, when occurring in such junctures as task (sign 83 in Exercise) is frequently misunderstood, until its formation is properly explained, to be an Ns circle. While its shape is exactly that of the Ns circle, yet its right to be written in the same manner, is very conclusive. This can be best illustrated by clo ely observing the com- binations of the consonant sounds of t-k, t-s-k, t-n-s-k, as they are shown in the words talk, task and transaction in signs 82, 83 and 84 of Exercise. The letter T of sign 82, it will be observed, is written directly on and touching the dotted line. To add Ns to that letter one must necessarily first turn the end of the T, which rests .on the line, into an N hook and then bring it round into a circle, after which, if we want to add K, the K will appear somewhat above the line on which the T rests, as in sign 84. When, however, only S-K is to be added to T, the S is written under the dotted line, at the lower end of the T, thus bringing the final letter K on the line (sign 83) as perfectly as T-K is written without the S in sign 82. This arrangement clearly isolates the circle S (sign 83) from any col- lusion with the letters T or K, excepting as a joined letter, and clearly indicates that it is not written on the left-hand side of T, as might be supposed, but rather on the under side, which as perfectly declares its individuality as though it were written upon the right-hand side, an arrangement which, in this sort of a combination, would be quite awk- ward; and, as this similarity between the S and Ns circles will never, under any circumstances, cause them to be mistaken, the one for the other, is a needless one. Convenience in writing is as necessary to rapid writing as brevity is, and clearly formed angles are as necessary to speed. The manner in which the circle S in sign 83 is added, is the most convenient way it can be added, prevents the K from degenerating into the shape of an N, as it would if the circle were written on the right HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 85 hand side of T, and therefore preserves the shape of all the letters in the combination, and the circle S in such outlines never clashes with the Ns circle. Always place the circle on the proper side, when possible, but sometimes, as in instances above noted and in signs 5 and 85 to 88, the S circle has to be joined in the most convenient way for the reasons first given. The juncture of the word has, in signs 77 and 78 of Exercise, in which case it is apparently turned upon the left side of the word //, is also in accordance with the placing of the circle S in the word task. RESPECTING PRACTICE. A plan of practice in writing which will much accelerate the student's proficiency, is that of practicing in precisely the same manner a regular phonographic reporter works. To accomplish this object, procure a reporter's note book, either by purchase or making it yourself. These books are about the size and shape of a common pass-book, and nearly half an inch thick, to admit of lengthy reports being taken; but, unlike most other note books, they open at the bottom instead of at the side, and when in use, only one side of the paper is written on that which is nearest and, afterwards, when those pages are all written upon, the book is turned and the other sides are ready for use. This method always secures a good foundation for the phonographic writing, and pre- vents in a great measure awkward illegibility. Some teachers claim that a good plan of study for the purpose of gaining familiarity with a large number of words, is for the student to get a common spelling-book and practice on all the hard words therein. Practice of this sort, it is claimed by such teachers, will go a great way toward making easy the path which leads to rapid writing. This is in a measure true, though only of the student who has thoroughly memor- ised all the Exercises of the lessons for others it will simply delay pro- gress. In fact, any attempt of the student, until he has finished the lessons, to write words not in the lessons as far as he has learned, is to be deprecated, for the reason that, until all the principles of the art have been learned, he is sure to make imperfect outlines for words containing principles at v/hich he has not arrived, and his eyes are unfortunately too apt to make mental pictures of such wrong outlines, and when he comes to practice for speed, after the lessons are finished, he will find difficulty in avoiding those bad outlines. Every lesson should be well learned be- fore the student makes any attempt at writing words not in the lessons he has learned. Then, when all are learned, he will, by having in mind all the principles, be enabled to more readily form words not in the lessons. 36 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. EXERCISE X. ' I <\ Kyj..,^V^^^ i/ _ ' _" v _ \ j ^|..W./O..9d!..^.3 <:r^409.oS*.. 4ia\rr?.4d^rr*:il^i~s3^ ... . /JtZ/^M^Titf^^ j> y V ^ L, ..... ./-I. HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. gy KEY X. i, they are; 2, may be; 3, we may be; 4, they may be likely; 5, you may be certain; 6, it will; 7, which will; 8, much will; 9, at all; 10, for all; n, of all; 12, to all; 13, on all; 14, and all the; 15, and will you; 16, who will; 17, in all; 18, my own; 19, our own; 20, have been; 21, more than; 22, softer than; 23, no one; 24, none; 25, some one; 26, at one; 27, at once; 28, and our own; 29, on our; 30, but our; 31, of ours; 32, of our own; 33, to ours; 34, to our own; 35, by your; 36, by our; 37, who are; 38, each- are; 39, which are; 40, or not; 41, but not; 42, did; 43, I did not; 44, I GO not; 45, I had not; 46, be not; 47, have not; 48, I will not; 49, we will not; 50, we are not; 51, I think not; 52, am not; 53, may not; 54, we mean; 55, we meant; 56, we may not; 57, we meant not; 58, we might not; 59, clear off; 60, set off; 61, set forth; 62, call forth; 63, we are of; 64, which are of; 65, out of; 66, or if; 67, but if; 68, and of; $9^ v/nich have; 70, all have; 71, who have; 72, I have; 73, to have; 74, Ihay~ been; 75, I have to be; 76, to have been; 77, it has been; 78, such has been taken; 79, let us; 80, sent us; 81, send us; 82, talk; 83, task; 84, transaction; 85, desire; 86, dissection; 87, destroy; 88, desolate; 89, dissolute; 90, last; 91, lost; 92, lowest; 93, wheat; 94, white; 95, stock; 96, stack; 97, marked; 98, market; 99, greatly; 100, gradually; 101, read; 102, re(a)d; 103, murder; 104, days; 105, saith; 106, said; 107, survey; 108, circle; 109, circular; no, vagrancy; n i, va-grans; 112, va-ga-ran-cy; 113, member; 114, remembrance; 115, brother; 116, brethren; 117, equal; 118, equaled; 119, imaginary; 120, imagination; 121, govern; 122, governor; 123, again; 124, against; 125, angel; 126, angelic; 127, Dear Doctor; 128, measured; 129, measure their; 130, over; 131, over their; 132, overthrow; 133, overcome; 134, every; 135, everyone; 136, everything; 137, organs; 138, organize; 139, organic; 140, organism; 141, organization; 142, Tell the difference; 143, The truth of a question; 144, Liberty is the best government; 145, Till you agree to call; 146, The organ, then, belongs to Mr. White; 147, To the Christian, eternity means union; 148, Delivered from an awful internal danger; 149, Many people appear to be more able than lucky; 150, Mercy and Truth are attributes of Jehovah; 151, The very measure I began to fear is on appeal; 152, Learn to humor the aged, but kindly govern the child; 153, Denominate alone a degree of juvenile philanthropy; 154, A providential revelation was the defendant's testimony; 155, Poverty often applies the lash which leads to ultimate honor; 156, We base our opinions upon information often second-handed and withal faulty; 157, Above all things remember that principles need not be prejudices; 158, Until you assure me to whom they belong, you shall retain them; 159, Punishment is the pleasure of the cruel, the manner of a darkened mind; 160, Phonography has had its revolution here and most of its difficulties have vanished; 161, This generation can only imagine the remarkable glory which awaits the human race of the future; 162, True religion is from within, and is that divine belief which sees a brother or sister in every human countenance; 163, Generally the work which is well begun is nearly done; moreover, it is equally sure that the conditions will be less wearisome; 164, Your next lesson is number eleven. When through with it and the twelfth, begin all the lessons again and review each one thoroughly until your advance in the art has brought speed and ease in reading. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. LESSON XI. COMPOUND ABBREVIATIONS. .... ...Speak, speech J... Audience ..../ . Especial-ly .....Y.S'pecial-ly J... Providence ..? Secession .$ Cessation ...A..Spiritual-ly . \>..Person " Dignity ...(^....Justification ...^....Association ..J.... Yesterday ...ST... Salvation ../^...Manufacture Minimum . . .Peculiar ...^...Jurisdiction ...(fo.. Jerusalem .-cX... Juxtaposition ..^.... Archangel ..^\\. Represent .... ..Business ...\.. Subject ........Strength xr^vrrrx Memoranda Memorandum 1 .External-ly ..s?\-. Reform ..s?\. Respect-ful-ly ,...fj Construct /r^>__D Maximum Imoossible ....P.. .Satisfy . . .. Because f .. ..System Scripture, describe. Somebody ..!.. Extreme-ity Inscribe -d. Stenography t . J.. Strange Signify, signature 9 Influence ....!K..Instruct-ed ....[...Utilize l b ..!.. ..Advert is^nisni ...< P.. No sir Nacessary T^ ..Universe-al-ity / ....vo.. This ..s_P.. United states ./.. Knowledge ,..c.... Advert ise-ments ...(T... Thbse The above list of compound abbreviations is of equal importance with those which have preceded it, should be as thoroughly memorized, and is as adaptable to the formation of derivative abbreviations as the other lists, illustrations of which are given in signs 153 to 255, subjection, sign 154, being formed by adding a Shun hook to subject, sign 153; sub- jective, sign 155, by the addition of a Tiv hook, etc., etc., etc., through- out the lesson. The beginning hook preceding the circle-S in the word-abbreviations HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 89 for instruct and inscribe in foregoing list, is used to express the sound of in, en or un before the S-circle only where the long N will not readily join. If students will note carefully how the particular sort of word- abbreviations in this list are often made up of short-cuts of speech, such as bis or biz for business (the seventh abbreviation in the list), ad for advertisement, dig for dignity, sig for signify, etc., they will be able to make many similar short-cuts for themselves, in words which would be other- wise cumbrous, and will understand why such outlines as pnsl, sign 162 in Exercise, does for Pennsylvania; bach, sign 170, for bachelor; cab, sign 171, for capable; kath for Catholic, sign 172; pop, sign 188, for popular; pub, sign 189, {or public or publish, and the reasons for many other simi- lar abbreviations in this lesson. Then of course, if pub does iot publish, add an R to it and we have publisher, as in sign 190; add a Shun to pub, as in sign 191, and we have publication; begin pub with an R and we have rcpub, as in sign 193, meaning republic; put an N hook to that and we get republican, sign 192, etc., etc. On the same plan, kath being Catholic, put an R in front of it and we have R-katli, which will naturally be read for Roman- Catholic, as in sign 173. This use of the letter R for a whole word as in Roman in this instance, we may extend to other words or collection of words, representing each word of that collection by one letter, as p-r-r for Pennsylvania Railroad, sign 163 in Exercise; 1-j-k for Lord Jesus Christ, sign 167, etc., etc. All these methods of abbreviation are done in words and phrases, names, etc., which are familiar to the writer, and whereof he needs only a suggestion in order to read them. With words or phrases which are not familiar, this shortening should not be attempted, but all that are given in these lessons can and should be used, familiar or not, as they are necessary to speed. The student should, therefore, practice them until they become familiar, and employ these principles of abbreviation on all possible occasions not illustrated in the lessons where similar words and phrases are familiar. Practice in such invention will soon make it easy and as spontaneous in actual rapid work on words never attempted before, as if it was being done at ease, giving the writer possibilities which no dictionary or phrase-book can give, so long as it is borne in mind to write all words and phrases in these lessons exactly as the author gives them. In such words as are represented by signs 24 to 38, the letter Way may often be entirely omitted without destroying legibility. In phrase numbered 51 in Exercise, the word -well is represented pimply by writing the letter L. It will not be found to conflict with the word-abbreviation for will, even though written in the same position. 90 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. This dropping of the Way hook in well should not, however, be attempted when well is written alone. It is used only in junctures with other words. It is sometimes expedient to slight the formation of some words in order to accomplish phrase-writing; but such means will not interfere with the correct reading of the words so slighted. Note the formation of must in signs 79 and 80, and postpone and postage, signs 74 and 75, etc. PHRASE POSITIONS. The general rule with most phonographers, when joining words, is to write the first word in its proper place-position, and let the other words in the phrase accommodate themselves to the position of the first. There are times, however, when this rule will not apply. For in. stance, when some other word in the phrase requires, in order to be read correctly and with ease, that it shall be given its proper position in preference to commencing word. For the above reason, there are phrases, as well as words, that should occupy the second and third positions, even though the com- mencing word be a first-place word. Hence there are first-place, second- place and third-place phrases. A first-place phrase is one in which there occurs a word (either ini- tial, intermediate or final) which, in order to be read as joined, necessi- tates the placing of the entire phrase in the first position, above the line of writing. A few such phrases are illustrated by signs 41 to 48 in Exercise. A second-place phrase is one in which the necessity of reading a certain word within it causes the entire phrase to be placed in the second position, on the line, as illustrated by signs 49 to 56 in Exercise. A third-place phrase is one in which the important word happens to be a third-place word and thus gives third position to the entire out- line, as illustrated by signs 57 to 64 in Exercise. Signs 65 to 73, inclusive, illustrate these three sorts of phrases comparatively, and by attentive notice of how a difference of position changes the meaning of the same phrase outline, students will find a rule for the proper placement of other phrases which they will come in contact with when engaged in actual work. No principle in phono- graphy is so unimportant that it may be only casually acquired, and memorizing these phrases will especially repay for the time consumed. WORDS COMMENCING WITH X AND Q. The compound sounds of the English letters X and Q-prove the most difficult for the student to analyse when writing English words in which those sounds occur, or writing English words spelled with those letters. The purpose, therefore, of the first part of the Exercise to this HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 91 lesson is to make this matter an easy one for the student, commencing with the presentation of an easy form for the sound of X, which is com- posed of the sounds short-e, K and S. Where that sound commences a word, the student need not spell it out in full, but -can, instead, write a shaded circle like the circle Z, as in signs i to 16 in Exercise. This shaded circle readily does for the sound of X, beginning words, and in each instance will not be mistaken for the Z circle, for the circle Z always ends words. Use, therefore, a heavy circle for the sound of X beginning words, attaching to it the balance of the word, just as a halved R is added to that circle in sign i in Exercise, the whole outline being therein placed above the line, for the vowel in the last syllable ert in that outline for exert, is entitled to the position, the circle X taking any posi- tion, it only being necessary to indicate the principal vowel of the balance of the word. This X circle, being merely a shaded circle S, is added to all other characters on the same side as the circle S, the right or upper side of straight characters, and like the circle S, may denote the indication of R to the main consonant, by putting the X. circle on the R side of straight consonants, just as the X circle is placed to the letter P in such words as experience, sign 9 in Exercise, the shaded circle being read first, then the full consonant and next invisible R. Signs 185 to 187 illustrate words containing the sound of X inter- medially, as in the words next, mixed and fixed. Phonetically, these words are spelled n-e-k-s-t, next, m-i-k-s-d, mixed, f-i-k-s-d, fixed; but the student may omit the K sound of X from them, spelling such words as though they were nest, fist and mist; and if there is fear that they will clash with those words, the loop may be shaded to indicate the K sound of X. The sound of Q and the letter Q are apt to give more trouble than the sound of X. All words in English which are begun with the letter Q, have the sound of K and Way, the word queer, sign 17 in Exercise, being properly spelled phonetically K, Way, long-E and R, so that all words beginning with the English letter Q, are easily analyzed if we simply write their sounds, as will be seen in signs 17 to 23, wherein the Way hook follows the letter K in giving the exact sound of Kway, which the letter Q always has when it commences a word. Sometimes there are words which, in English spelling, do not con- tain the English Q, but, in their pronunciation do, such words being cute and curiosity, which are pronounced as if begun with a letter Q. This is because the primary sound of Q is a K, as K-u, Q, and, as the English letter C in such words has also the K sound followed by U, the phoneticion hears the equivalent of the English letter Q only, such 9 2 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. words being therefore treated just as if they were spelled with the let- ters K and U beginning them, the K being written and the sound of U indicated by position, as in signs 39 and 40 in Exercise. EXPEDIENCIES. The word it may often be readily expressed by halving the last full- length consonant of a preceding word, as in signs 132 and 133. Many word-signs may also be halved to represent the addition of /'/, without writing /'/. See signs 134 to 136. A halved-V is often used to rep- resent the phrase of it, providing it is written above the line, as in sign 137. This spells vit, which is very near the sound of of it. In this, V has been used for of. A double length V, upon a similar plan, may be used to represent of their, as in signs 138 and 139. The halving principle can also be used to add the words ought and would or had on the same plan that halving adds // in the phrase take it, sign 135. In that instance, the word rests on the line when adding //, while in signs 140 and 146 and 150, the words //., which and suck are placed above the line and halved to add ought. It must be observed that the halved outline must be above the line to add ought, as in above instances, and must be below the line to add would or had, just as sign 141 adds would or: had to the word it, reading // would or // had. But it is only such common second-place word-abbreviations as // or which that may be taken out of position to add the words ought and would or had by halving. First or third-place abbreviations must keep their positions. By adding the V-hook meaning have, the N hook for not, or the L hook for will, more extended phrases may be made from these small outlines, as illustrated by signs 143 to 145 and 148, 149, 151 and 152, and, in some instances the word to may be also implied, though not indicated, as in sign 142, in which instance the halving of the character is done to add the word ought, to being merely understood in that phrase. In sign 157, the circle-S is added on the most convenient side. Signs 159 and 161, 165 and 166, show what sort of derivatives may be formed from the signs immediately preceding them, while signs 174 to 184 illustrate how portions of words may be used legibly for entire words. Signs 168 and 169 are partly of this character. Signs 194 to 201 represent the best derivative forms for those words. Difference of position is chosen to indicate the difference of meaning be- tween words having same outline, signs 194, 195, 196 and 197, 256 and 257. Signs 258 to 260 are phrase-abbreviations for those words. The beginning letter O is omitted from the word oblige, in sign 261, because unnecessary, blige being just as legible. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 93 All these differences in outline, shading, position, direction of writ- ing, size, etc., should be noted well by the student, and carefully heeded, whether they occur in separated words or in the sentences terminating the Exercises to the concluding lesson of this course. Such words and phrases are incorporated in these lessons for the particular bene- fit of students, and they can depend upon it that there is a reason for both the position and outline of every one of them. For instance, the con- text will seldom tell the difference between write and read; therefore, write is an R halved to indicate the T, and read is written with the K and D in full. For a similar reason, a distinction is made between read (pronounced reed) when meaning to read, and read (pronounced red) when meaning have read, although spelled the same in English; thus, put read (pronounced reed) above the line when it means to read, because of its more distinct vowel E, and write read (pronounced red) when meaning have read on the line, as in sentences in this lesson. Other necessary dis- tinctions are particularly shown in the sentences represented by sign 266 of Exercise, wherein are illustrated differences between six words sounded much alike, viz: ceasing, season, session, secession, cessation and association. The word of can occasionally be expressed by the V hook, as in the phrase /a/-/ of tJie in the sentence represented by sign 266 in Exercise. The N-hook may occasionally do duty for the sound of Ng, as in sign 8i,b-ang-k, bank, but this should only be when no other letter follows Ng in same word, for Ng, when final, is written long, as in sign go. Signs 82 and 83 are instances of brevity in formation only to be followed when it can be safely done. The consonant sounds are all there, but syllable indication is not observed. Sign 84 is the best outline for the word eye, as the pronunciation of that word is the same as the letter I. And, when any one pronounces the word aye the same as the letter I, the letter I will do for that word also, but when aye is pronounced like the letter A of the alphabet, then it should be written as in sign 85. The interrogative Eh is sometimes pronounced like the letter A of the alphabet, in which case that letter should be written for it, as in sign 85; but when it is properly pro- nounced, it sounds like short-e, and that letter then should be employed for it, as in sign 86. For the sound of the interjection Ah, the alpha- betical letter for that sound should be used, as in sign 87. The word now is best spelied in full, n-ow, as in sign 88. The word once should be written as in sigvt 89. In junctures of the letter Ha> with N or Ing, the Hay may be written upwards, as in sign go. 94 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. The sound of P is omitted from the word impugned, sign 91, wherein it is written with a letter M halved and thickened to add D, and at the same time placed under the line to indicate the very prominent sound of U, with its preceding vowel sound unprovided for, because unneces- sary. Signs 92 to 125 contain outlines for words and phrases, the former mostly compound, for which the student needs special outlines for dis- tinction sake, or to provide easy forms for words difficult to write according to rule, the latter sort being mainly and meanwhile, signs 92 and 93, and the distinctive outlines being such as the provision for the difference existing between the words />//>, unto and onto, signs 94, 95 and 96, also adopt and adapt, signs 100 and 101. The termination crs and fries, occurring in such words as distillers, distilleries, and similar words, need to be clearly indicated, ers being indicated in hook and circle form as in sign 98, and cries by the full sized R and circle as in sign EXERCISE XI. c^o^ _ \ ^ (K (* D ff . J .. ^ 2,. . .. .ly....4S l&.r7r^.20.cS.Z-rrr>i?.22rrrts3.3.-r7*~24 2f. 26 *~\ c i p ^ I i i V~ L_ r s^~/^ .Zy..^ZS...\.l9...\..$0 ...3.*.3Z..J.33..\.3*..tt.^~. i 36.\ J .3f...38...d9. ..4057f ^ / | ...4-1 42^T..4:3 , lt .44r 45" 46 4y .-^S". i t r *tu 4* ft" i ^O /JO / ^?9 ^*^l /^*4_ ,.v 7. . ,.,..v O....I .. ,.O C> *.....V V 4 ...C.....*JD jL......,..O /v. .. ..*.*O t'* . .x*^ V ^" ^. j y^:.f^~. yz^^^s^ye^C.yi^ys. c^y 9.^^. _ 96 .P^./r/..9A...d4-.-.'W...I ^*^ HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. g^ 99. These differences and many others which the student should care- fully note, are plainly shown in this Exercise. It will be noticed that in sign 119 the preposition to is omitted in the word tomorrow, the outline for morrow being written in the third position to indicate the to in tomorrow, just as it is indicated in the phrase to be and to do, in list of Common Abbreviations in Lesson IX. This preposition to is often understood at the end of a phrase, without being written, as in signs 121 to 125. When a hyphen separates to from other words in the key, it implies that the outline represents the ad- dition of the to, on some occasions, and not on others, according to cir- cumstances. Signs 121 and 123 are allowable instances of abbreviation in the case of frequently occurring phrases, the former, in order or in order to being simply an N with an R hook, halved to add D, spelling Nerd, which is sufficient for that phrase, while sign 123 is an N, with Rel and Shun hooks, forming Inrehhun, which nearly spells in relation-to. Both these outlines are placed in position for in. Sometimes the word to is indicated by halving an outline, as in sign 130, wherein the word able, of sign 129, is halved to indicate able to, as in sign 130. KEY XL i, exert; 2, exercise; 3, exercisist; 4, exact; 5, exactly; 6, expect; 7, except; 8, accept; 9, experience; 10,. experienced; n, extend; 12, excel; 13, excellent; 14, examine; 15, examined; 16, examination; 17, queer; 18, query; 19, quaint; 20, quart; 21, quartz; 22, quarto; 23, quake; 24, quick; 25, quicken; 26, quadrant; 27, qualify; 28, quality; 29, quantity; 30, quinine; 31, quiet; 32, quote; 33, quota; 34, twill; 35, twig; 36, twelve; 37, require; 38, request; 39, cute; 40, 'curiosity; 41, I am; 42, I am glad; 43, I am inclined; 44, if you; 45, if it is; 46, if it is not; 47, of course; 48, in all cases; 49, I may; 50, take you; 51, it may as well; 52, for you; 53, for it is; 54, for it is known; 55, till you can; 56, the same cases; 57, put you; 58, took you; 59, to whom; 60, has had it; 61, used some; 62, was not; 63, whom you will; 64, some cases; 65, in each; 66, in which; 67, in much; 68, give these; 69, give this; 70, give thus (those); 71, and if; 72, and for; 73, and few; 74, postpone; 75, postage; 76, postal; 77, postal card; 78, you must; 79, you must be; 80, you must have; 81, bank; 82, surprise; 83, surprised; 84, eye; 85, aye; 86, eh; 87, ah; 88, now; 89, once; 90, hang; 91, impugned; 92, mainly; 93, meanwhile; 94, onto; 95, into; 96, unto; 97, distiller; 98, distillers; 99, distilleries; 100, adopt; 101, adapt; 102,. adoption; 103, adaption; 104, nevertheless; 105, notwithstanding; 106, here- after; 107, herein; 108, hereinafter; 109, hereinbefore; no, hereinto; in, hereunto; 112, hereon; 113, hereof; 114, heretofore; 115, hope to have; 116, I beg to say; 117, morrow; 118, the morrow; 119, to-morrow; 120, in order that; 121, in order-to; 122, in reply-to; 123, in relation-to; 124, in reference-to; 125, with reference-to; 126, reference; 127, reform; 128, per- form; 129, able; 130, able to; 131, to be able to; 132, read it; 133, shave it; HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. \ r~ <\ 6 V V - \J) \J2/ lSS^.tS6:?..iS7....JS& ..... 4f9.... W v/ ...... o C ---^-^ : -e- \ ) P ...... *- HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. cj 134,, make it; 135, take it; 136, have it; 137, of it; 138, of their; 139, of their own; 140, it ought; 141, it would-had; 142, it ought to have; 143, it would have; 144, it ought not; 145, it would-had not; 146, which ought; 147, which it; 148, which would have; 149, which will it; 150, such ought; 151, such would not; 152, such will have had; 153, subject; 154, subjection; 155, subjective; 156, business; 157, businesslike; 158, necessary; 159, necessarily; 160, United States; 161, Constitution of the United States; 162, Pennsyl- vania; 163, Pennsylvania railroad; 164, university; 165, University of Pennsylvania; 166, Universalism; 167, Lord Jesus Christ; 168, character; 169, children; 170, bachelor; 171, capable; 172, Catholic; 173, Roman Catholic; 174, Savior; 175, several; 176, visible; 177, technical; 178, dignity; 179, dogmatic; 180, discover; 181, England-ish; 182, possible; 183, positive-ly; 184, system; 185, next; 186, mixed; 187, fixed; 188, popular; 189, public-ish; 190, publisher; 191, publication; 192, Republican; 193, republish; 194, workman; 195, workmen; 196, workingman; 197, working- men; 198, manufacture; 199, manufacturer; 200, manufactures; 201, manu- facturers; 202, advertisement; 203, advertisements; 204, advertising; 205, advertiser; 206, advertised; 2o7,especial-ly; 208, external-ly; 209, impossible; 210, impossibility; 21 r, justification; 212, justification by faith; 213, repre- sent; 214, representation; 215, representative; 216, represented; 217, mis- represent; 218, misrepresentation; 219, misrepresented; 220, peculiar; 221, peculiar case; 222., peculiarly; 223, peculiarity; 224, respect-ful-ly; 225, salvation; 226, salvation of thesoul; 227, satisfy-fied; 228, satisfactory; 229, satisfaction; 230, scripture; 231, scriptural; 232, signify-fied; 233, significance; 234, significancy; 235, significant; 236, signification; 237, significative; 238, similar-ly; 239, similarity; 240, simple-y-fi-ed; 241, single-singular-ly; 242, singularity; 243, somebody; 244, special; 245, speak; 246, spoke; 247, spoken; 248, spinal column; 249, spiritual; 250, spiritualism; 251, spirit- ualist; 252, spirituality; 253, stenography; 254, stenographer; 255, stenogra- phic; 256, sometime; 257, somewhat; 258, substantial identity; 259, Supreme Being; 260, temperance society; 261, Oblige me, and while I write, you read those memoranda which you read before; 262, No sir, you can never construct a minimum or maximum jurisdiction; 263, The universe grows, as our knowledge* of it expands; 264, Strange was the idea of the manufacturer who hoped to succeed with no advertising; 265, A special business needs the audience which is best secured by a satisfactory advertisement; 266, This memorandum of secession of part of the association last season was read, without ceasing, before the cessation of yesterday's session; 267, A desire to be somebody, though mere pride, is far more creditable than to be satisfied with being nobody; 268, Because his answer was not inscribed in juxtaposition with signatures on the opposite page of the book, the man- ager was dissatisfied; 269, The city of Jerusalem of old has been used to describe a state of future existence for the just in old pictures an arch- angel is seen guarding it while its inhabitants sleep; 270, Providence deals not in the impossible, but seems always willing to influence knowledge to perform wonders for the person who utilizes extremity as a justification for reform in business methods; 271, I speak especially of the respect which should be shown to Scripture as representing a peculiar spiritual revelation which must instruct by its acknowledged external strength even to those who may not see in it a necessarily saving significance. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. LESSON XII. HALF- -LENGTH ABBREVIATIONS. Between .A Body Beauty, about Quit-e .""".God X.After C Thought Without C Throughout c< On either hand On the other hand C .:...Establish-ed-ment ..). .. Ast oni sh-ed-ment ...,>.. Met /s Immediate-ly ...On the one hand ...W-. Hundred, hand ,. Under .. With the above list, all the abbreviating word-forms have been given necessary, with the derivative abbreviations which may be made from them, for a speed of over 300 words a minute, if well memorised and used in connection with the other instruction given in these lessons, the pres- ent list being the shortest, and, in realit)'-, also the easiest memorized, because most of the Half-length Word-abbreviations contain nearly the entire consonant elements of the words they represent. These abbrevia- tions are subject to the same plan of derivative word-building as the other list. Thus, the circle-S may be added to any sign, making thoughts of thought; ing may be added to form establishing from establish; and combi- nations such as joining the signs for behind and hand may be made, as in sign 269, forming the phrase behindhand, etc., etc. Other short-hand authors have taken the trouble to compile cum- brous phonographic dictionaries, containing brief forms for many thou- sands of English words, thus conveying to learners the false impression that it was necessary for them to learn innumerable word-signs 'before HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. they could become adept at the art of 'the shorthand writer. The author of this work, therefore, desires to assure all who may labor under such an impression, that it is an erroneous one, the most skilled phonogra- phers of the day not using more than are contained in these lessons. And, in fact, such phonographic dictionaries do not contain more, their ten or twenty thousand outlines being nothing more than variations of the ones these lessons contain, but arranged so that they seem more, and, so arranged, require years to learn, even by the few that can mem- orize them at all. In these lessons we give all the root abbreviations from which are formed all the other words those useless shorthand dic- tionaries contain, and our explanation enables the student to make them better than a dictionary can show him, while in addition he will have the principle at his fingers' ends. Another equally useless work is the phrase book issued by other authors, and made only to sell. It requires years to memorize phrases thoroughly in that shape. We give, in Lessons VIII and IX, the simple rules which govern them all, and in those and Lessons X to XII sufficient examples to enable students, for themselves, to properly make any others. The Half-length Abbreviations would not conflict with the word- signs, even if both were made about the same size, but it is best to distin- guish them by writing the word-signs much smaller than the half-length abbreviations, as directed in previous lesson. THE J.-io.. .Liz. .o..The cipher .C...A. ........ __..6 jf.I ...-,..16 .L..20 /.. 30 ^...40..... -..60 ..i..rA... .O..40O.... -D..600.. .L.iooo ..*..2OOO. cx.300O. .^4000 x\ T. ...9000. ..4,000,000 ^.3,000,000 ~-C0,000,000 The adoption of shorthand signs for the Arabic numerals has been attempted by writers on shorthand before the compilation of these les- ioo HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. sons, but such attempts have been of the crudest character imaginable, one author employing as many as three different signs to represent each Arabic numeral, all of which certainly tends to confuse rather than en- lighten the pupil, or save time for him. Again, they have been ob- jectionable from another reason, that of being entirely arbitrary in their^ character, not a single symbol being used which would phonetically afford any clew whatever to its meaning. In the list presented on foregoing page, however, the author believes, will be found that unity of character which is so important in a matter of this kind. By looking carefully over the numeral list, the student cannot fail to recognize the simplicity of its arrangement and its entire legibility. The figure i is represented by its word-abbreviation, and 2 by the word- sign for its common name. The other figures are each represented by a conspicuous consonant element of their several names, the figure 3 be- ing a letter R, 4 a letter F, 5 a letter V, 6 a letter K, 7 a letter S, 8 is spelled in full, and 9 is a letter N; 10 is spelled in full, n and 12 partly so, while the "teens" are represented as in 13, 14, etc., by halving the original sign to add the sound of T, and concluding with an N hook; 20 is practically spelled in full, 30 is indicated by simply halving the pri- mary letter representing the numeral 3, and similarly with 40, 50, etc. A small circle-S is used for the cypher, because it n':ost resembles the unit, and from this principle the word hundred is properly represented by a large Ses circle; thousand is well represented by the phonographic con- sonant Ith, and the letter L does for million. The adding of the "teens" in which the hook is read after the halv- ing principle, can of course, only be applied to our figures. In regular spelling the phonographer must read the hook before the halving principle. At first students will be disposed to fear that these phonographic numerals will conflict seriously with their word-abbreviations. But, if they persevere in the use of them, they will find this to be anything but the case, especially if they have much figure work in which to make use of these signs. In writing some ordinal numbers, such as second, twenty-first, etc., a full phonographic outline is preferable, as in signs 6, 4, etc., in Exer- cise, but where the name of the number ends with tk, that part of an ordinal must be omitted, or it will conflict with the sign for thoitsand. Compare signs 42 and 43 in Exercise. Sixteenth, written without the ///, as in sign 42, would never be mistaken for sixteen when met with in a HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. IOI sentence. Signs 25, 34, 41, etc., representing fourth, fifth, sixth, etc., will be seen to be the same signs as four, Jive, six, etc., in the table of numerals. In joining these phonographic numerals where the word thousand or million are intended, though omitted, it is best to join the signs in groups, separating such groups at the point wherein the words thousand or million would have occurred had they been spoken, as in sign 74 of Exercise. In the same manner, the words dollars, pounds (sterling) and shillings should be indicated when omitted, as in signs 75 and 76. But it is best not to omit those words in sentences where the context would not indi- cate them. In book-keeping no numeral junctures whatever are allow- able, excepting in dates or prices, as the columns of amounts require the figures to be written separately in order to add them. For that reason, calculations by multiplication, subtraction or division must all be made by separated figures, as in examples 77 to 80 of Exercise. Other than the above exceptions, the more figures joined the better. Where the sign for thousand would be difficult of juncture to a hooked figure, such hook is run into a circle, as in signs 24 and 29, pro- viding the circle of straight letters is placed on the N-hook side. Such transformation of the hook on curved letters, which makes them into a circle, as in sign 29, will not be mistaken for a cipher, because the cipher is only used separately never joined. It is only the large circle for hundred that is ever joined. The hundred circle can be joined upon the most convenient side of either straight or curved characters, as in signs 69 to 73 in Exercise. In instances where the large circle for hundred will not readily join, that word can be represented by a shaded halved N of the Half-length Abbreviations, shown in sign 32 in Exercise. Signs i and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 to n, etc., etc., etc., in Exercise, are placed near each other for the purpose of showing the stu- dent their contrasting outlines. Lest there should be any misunderstanding in regard to the use of the shorthand numerals, a considerable part of the Exercise of this lesson is devoted to their illustration. Signs 9, 10 and n illustrate how to distinguish between 3, third, and 30. The first and last named are not apt to give trouble by clashing, provided the halving principle is carefully observed, but as some students are apt to wrongly halve the R of three to indicate third, this last word is snown as in sign 10. When possible, the word the should be indicated by the letter I, in junctures with numerals, when there can be no conflic. 102 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. lion with a halved R of thirty, in instances where the proper sign must be joined. If joined at all to numerals, the should therefore appear as in the phrase the first, sign 13 in Exercise, seldom as in phrase the second, sign 15, though, as a rule, it is best not to join the or any word to numerals. In junctures with other numerals, the student should remember that 30, 40, etc., are not always halved, being distinguished from 3, 4, etc., by sort of junctures shown in signs 19, 20, 46, etc., just as with the ordinary Arabic numerals used in print. For instance, in writing the Arabic numerals, 34, 75, etc., one does not show the cipher of the 30 or 70 which compose them, the added figures 4 and 5 of 34 and 75 taking the place of the cipher which would otherwise be there, and hence, in shorthand, 3 and 4 make 34, and 7 and 5 make 75, just as they do in our common Arabic numbers. To write a halved 3 for 30, and then add a 5 to it in shorthand would be as misleading and wrong as to add the Arabic figures 30 and 4, as they would make 304 instead of 34. So the student should remember that the numerals 3, 4, etc., are only halved to indicate the cipher of 30, 40, etc., and therefore this should only be done when they are either written alone, as in signs n, 30, etc., or appear at the end of an outline, as in sign 72 in Exercise. Therefore, remember that when the shorthand numerals are joined together, 3 and 4 make 34, 7 and 5 make 75, etc., etc., none of the letters being halved. This ex- plains the letter R for 3, of signs 12 and 14 of Exercise, the R for 30 being made full length because it has another letter after it to show that the R means 30. For the same reason, when we write 33, we should write two full-sized letters R, joined together as in sign 16, which really forms a double-length R. Of course, when we want to write 30,000, etc., the R is "plainly shown to be halved, for the reason that it is there necessary; but if it were 34,000, the R should be written full-sized. The lower end of the letter S for 7, had better be slanted a little to the left, almost like an Ish, which' will plainly distinguish the S of 7 from the V of 5, even in the most rapid writing. Care should be exercised in these numerals, as well as in any principle of phonography, but not more so, and if the halving principle is observed strictly and the other' hints herein given, the shorthand numerals will be found to be as legible as the ordinary figures, and far more rapid, being, in fact, the only plan by which a number of figures can be taken verbatim when read at a convention, or occurring in court cases. The numeral 9 and its derivatives, 90 and 19, particularly the two latter, should have the right end written a little higher than the left end. as in sign 61. This will prevent junctures with other characters causing HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. I0 3 it to conflict with the figure 4 and its derivatives. In all junctures where you intend a full-sized figure, be sure to make it full-size, and your halved characters less than halved, if possible, a rule which is equally applicable to any shorthand outline. The figure eight, in the list of shorthand numerals, is spelled in full. This should ajways be done when it is written alone, as in signs 53 to 55, and if it is the first numeral in a juncture with other characters, as in sign 70; but, when it is the second character, or in any instance where it is preceded by another figure, the vowel A is omitted from it and only the letter T used for 8. This adding of the letter A to 8 and its derivatives, So and 18, when written alone, furnishes a complete plan of distinction between the shorthand 80 and the letter A of our Alpha- bet. Note the difference between the outlines in signs 89 and 90. Fractions are sometimes spelled in full, as in signs 81 and 83, but may be written, and should be ordinarily, as in signs 82 and 84 to 87; that is, just as one would unite the common Arabic fractions, omitting the lines which separate denominator and numerator in ordinary English- Arabic fractions, as such line is unnecessary. Just as one when a word-numeral, occurring alone in a sentence, is spelled in full, as in sign 85 of Lesson VIII, so should any numeral be when alone in a sentence, nine being spelled with a letter N and hook-N above the line, etc., in such instances. PROPER NAMES AND INITIALS. The writing in shorthand of proper names and initials being a necessary element to speed in shorthand, since no person can write a proper name in long-hand quickly enough to do verbatim reporting, par- ticular directions are necessary respecting this important subject before concluding the instructions in these lessons. We, therefore, devote several lines of our Exercise to this, beginning with sign 91. The list of initials pretty thoroughly treats of that branch, and the writing of proper names was somewhat explained in an earlier lesson, but there is one point in particular that was not dealt upon viz: the writing of vowels disjoined in those few instances where it may be advisable, such as in the name of Pike, sign 91; Peck, sign 92; Boyd, sign 94, and in other instances shown herein. The rules which have been given for making vowel junctures are sufficient for most purposes, excepting where the phonetic outline has been written without the visible vowel, in in- stances where the writer thought it unnecessary at the time, but wherein the writing of subsequent word outlines caused the reporter to fear they n\j. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. might clash with others before written, and he, therefore, has thought it advisable to turn back and insert the vowel. Where this is desired, the vowel can be inserted, as in the instances above illustrated, so long as it is placed between the consonants to which it is to be read, or at least directly after the consonant which immediately precedes it, as in signs 91, 92 and 94, so that it will be read immediately following the proper consonant. In those instances it is comparatively easy to do this, as it also is in the word Price in sign 97, but where the proper name written has been partially formed by a hook, and the vowel is to be read between the main consonant and the hook, then the vowel should be struck through the main consonant, which will indicate that it must be read immediately after the main consonant, and before the hook, just as the vowel E, struck through the letter P in outline for the word Pierce, in sign 96, is read after the P and before the heok R. This will show the distinction between the word Price in sign 96, and the word Pierce in sign 97, aside from the difference in the vowel sound. The vowel Ow may be written upward, when it is desired to write Hay downwards, but when Ow is written downwards, it is necessary to write Hay upward. This is illustrated in signs 106 and 107. Many other peculiarities are also illustrated in this Exercise respecting the writing of proper names. A distinction should be made in some titles. For instance, Miss is of course written with the letter M and circle S above the line, as in sign 98, and Mrs. should be written as in sign 100, that is, with a Sez circle attached to the letter M, as this is the exact sound of that word, but for the word Misses, the plural of Miss, as it occurs very seldom, there should be a distinct form, and it is therefore written with two small circles-S attached to the letter M, as in sign 99. This will clearly distinguish Mrs. from Misses, which are both pronounced the same, and to which the context generally furnishes no key. The word Katie is written several ways in this Exercise, sign 99 showing it with a vowel ah substituted for a to make a juncture. Some easily read words, names and titles are not vocalized either with visible vowel or position. See sign 93, etc., cf Exercise. All the substitutions of visible vowels for each other, as shown in this Exercise, are in accordance with the explanations regarding same, given in Lesson IV, to which the student is referred. The principle of spelling the sounds of a letter by the union of visible characters, as described in Lesson III in regard to X and Q, extends also to the representation of all consonants when it is desired HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 105 to represent the initials of people's names, but not to the vowels. The Roman vowels A, E, I, O or U, when such vowels are used as the initials of personal names, are represented by our phonographic visible vowels, as in signs 98 and 104 in Exercise. But the names of the Roman consonants, when pronounced, always possess a broader sound, and therefore, when representing initials, should be actually spelled with visible signs, as: b-e, B; c-e, C; etc., etc., as in Exercise. This spelling of the sound of letters when they arc initials rep- resenting personal names, gives them a distinctive appearance and enables a reporter always to recognize an initial at a glance. Other- wise, a plain initial might be mistaken in hurriedly written phonography for a word. The following is the complete list: INITIALS. , 7 i "V V ^ V I ]- ^ *-* r r ^ \- >-*. \r } 4 ^ u SYLLABLE ABBREVIATION. An efficient means of avoiding some very cumbrous written forms is that of abbreviating the phonographic outlines of a number of the prefixes and affixes of our language. And, as this method of syllable- abbreviation can be affected without the least sacrifice to legibility, it becomes a very important factor in rapid writing. All works on phonography present this principle, but as most of the abbreviations recommended by their authors cannot be joined to the rest of the words of which they are a part, they therefore fail to give any extra speed in writing. The time saved by their abbreviation of form is lost by the time consumed in lifting the pen or pencil from the paper, in disjoining, it being a much slower method to write two dis- joined characters than even a half dozen joined ones. The method taught herein, by being both abbreviated in form and easy of juncture. gives extra speed from two sources, besides relieving writers of the pos 106 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. sibility, common to those old methods, of mistaking the disjoined por- tions of a word for separate words. There are, of course, many more prefixes and affixes in use in our language than presented in the lists herein explained, but those not found here are either of very infrequent occurrence, or are ones not in need of abbreviation, such as the affixes ly, ness, etc., -whose ordinary phonographic outlines are sufficiently brief in themselves. PREFIXES. Con, Com or Cog. These short prefixes (as one is not at all likely ever to clash with either of the others) are represented by the same sign the consonant outline K, which is joined as in signs 1 1 1 to 1 18 in Ex- ercise. This use of the phonographic K to express the sounds of con or torn, etc., when prefixes, is in accord with the construction of the word- abbreviation for the words can or come, which words the student will re- member are also represented by the letter K. When the syllables con com or cog are not prefixes, but occur between other syllables of a word, they may still be represented as though prefixes, as in signs 123 to 125. In words in which con and com occur together, it is best to write con in full as in sign 122 in Exercise. Accom is formed by adding a short-a to the letter K, of the prefix com, as in signs 119 to 121. Contra, Contri, Contro or Counter are represented by a halved K in most cases. Signs 141 to 144. Exceptional instances are junctures with the letters K or Gay wherein the N hook is added to the prefix as in sign 145. In this instance the part of the prefix count is spelled, the prefix taking position of Ow. Circum or Self are represented by the circle S, as in signs 148 and 153. When the circle S also begins the next syllable, as it does in stance,, in the word circumstance, enlarge the S circle of stance to indicate the addition of circum, as in sign 149; write it within an initial hook, as in sign 147. For and Fore are represented the same as the word for is expressed in list of Common Abbreviations in Lesson IX i.e., by the phono- graphic letter F. Signs 155 and 156, this Exercise. In and Un, when joined preceding the circle S, may be very con- veniently expressed by a backward beginning hook, as in signs 157 to 166. ///, as a word, may also be similarly indicated. Phrase 161 in Exercise. Intel, Inter, Enter, Intro or Under are represented by a halved N joined as in signs 167 to 173. Magne, Magna and Magni may be expressed in a few words, such HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. IQJ a.Sf Magnify, magnitude, etc., by the phonographic consonant M, as in sign 174 to 177. AFFIXES. Bl ,Bly or Bility are represented by the phonographic stroke B, as in signs 180 to 183. Bleness, by joining a letter N and circle S to the letter B, as in sign 182. for or Pore as affixes, and Ful, are indicated by the same sign as when prefixes. See signs 186, 187 and 194 in Exercise. Ful or Full may be indicated by an F hook to some words, as in sign 1 88. N and a circle S can be added to this book to represent fulness, as in sign 189. Ing, as an affix, is represented by the phonographic letter N, as in sign 196. Ings and Ingly are therefore properly written as in signs 200 and 201. To some halved characters, where the letter N nor Ng does not join well, it is preferable to attach a small horizontal curved line similar to the juncture of short-u and U, as in sign 203 in Exercise. The circle S can be attached to this hook when necessary, as in sign 204. Mental or Mentality are each expressed by a halved M, terminating with an N hook, as in signs 209 and 210. Ment is, of course, written the same. See sign 208. Self and Sameness^ as affixes, are represented by the same sign used for the prefix self the circle S. Signs 211 to 215. Selves and Lessncss are represented by the Ses circle, as in signs 216 to 222 in Exercise. Ship, as an affix, is represented by the phonographic letter Ish, as in sign 223, etc. Soever is expressed by a joined circle S and an R. Signs 225 to 227 in Exercise. Ted, as a concluding phonographic syllable, in instances wherein a halved letter T cannot well be joined, can be represented by the double tick shown in sign 230 in Exercise, such double tick somewhat resem- bling a juncture of two letters Hay, the first written upwards, and the second downward. Ded is indicated by shading the downward stroke of this tick, as in sign 231. When ted or ded can be spelled out, it is done as in sign 232. THE USE OF THE PREFIXES AND AFFIXES. In making use of the phonographic prefixes and affixes students are probably more apt to lose sight of the two grand principles of phono- io8 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. graphic writing sound-spelling and outline-brevity than in any other range of practice. Hence the necessity for extra caution. Remember, the prefix for com, con or cog represents the sounds of those prefixes, not simply the letters; and therefore the sign for those prefixes may also represent the sounds for conn or comm, as in the word commend, which is therefore correctly written, as in sign 112 in Exercise, that word being phonographically spelled kom-end, according to the rule of brevity in word-outline. Frequently the prefixes com or con, or the affix ing, may be alto- gether omitted from some words, the context being generally a sure in- dication of their omission. See signs 126 to 140 and others in Exercise. Where one sign is used to express different prefixes or affixes (as K for com, con or cog, and B for ble, bly or bility) the groups are those in which there is no danger of mistaking which word the sign is intended for at the time. The instances are very rare wherein words containing abbreviated prefixes or affixes can be phrased with other words; and, when done, the word containing the affix or prefix must occupy its proper place position, no matter in what position the other words of the phrase are thus com- pelled to be placed. Furthermore, whether written alone or in phrases, all words containing abbreviated prefixes or affixes take position in ac- cordance with the principal vowel sound contained in the main portion of the word, not the vowel-sound of the prefix or affix. Prefixes or affixes are only secondary to the rest of the words to which they may be attached, and are therefore subject to no particular position, occupying simply whatever position the rest of the word may give them by their own position. For instance, contradict, sign 141 in Exercise, is written in the first position to indicate the vowel sound of the syllable diet, thus compelling contra to be written above the line, even though the vowel sounds of contra are second-place ones. In brief, the prefixes and affixes are to be treated precisely as though they contained no vowel element whatever. Compare signs in and 112. The prefixes in our language which are not given in abbreviated form in these lessons are spelled in full, and mostly they are such simple ones as that of re in regret, regard, etc., and these prefixes, like the others illustrated, must not be purposely given their vowel position, for the balance of the word is entitled to the position. For instance, in regard, the main portion of the word, the syllable gard, must have the position, as in sign 178, while gret takes position as in sign 179. This dis- tinguishes clearly between those words, and the rule must be observed HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. IOQ in all dealings with prefixes, which never take their vowel-position ex- cept by accident, the rest of the word being entitled to the position. Were it not for this rule, one could never distinguish regret from regard, a very important matter. In some words it may be somewhat difficult for the student to de- cide which prefix belongs to a word for instance, whether the prefix con or contri should be written to the word contribute. In that word the difficulty is caused by the last vowel of contri not being very conspicu- ous, and also by the fact that tribute being a word of itself the student is therefore apt to think the prefix in this case should be con. This would be an erroneous impression, however, contri being the proper prefix. The rule is to use the briefest form consistent with legibility. PHRASE COMBINATIONS. Beginning with signs 205, 206, 207 and 240 in this Exercise, and ending with sign 307, are given a number of phrase combinations, some- times made up of word-abbreviations, joined often with unimportant words omitted, and sometimes abbreviated in an apparently arbi- trary manner, the object being to gain an outline the most service- able for speed with legibility, they representing, as a rule, phrases which are uttered very rapidly, and whose outlines in any other shape could not be written rapidly. They cover the entire field of political orations, sermons, legal arguments, and work where the utmost rapid- ity is absolutely essential, and, as they represent also the most read- able forms, their position and outlines are strictly observed by all pro- fessional writers of importance, and should be learned as thoroughly and religiously as any principle in these lessons, or the word-abbrevia- tions. Be sure, however, to make that portion of them halved which is shown as halved, keeping full-sized portions full-size where herein shown* observing carefully their position, as well as the size of their hooks, circles and loops. They are the best outlines for these combinations of words, look like nothing else than what they are, if correctly written, and thus furnish exact distinctions between each other, and between outlines which are not illustrated in any lessons, but which may happen unawares in actual work. They are of vast importance, both to speed and legibility. Lest students should imagine that it is necessary for professional phonographers to allow a speaker to be a few words in advance of them> in order to write in their proper position the kind of phrases referred to in the preceding paragraphs on phrasing, the author would state that such a condition is not necessary. With a rapid speaker, such is natur. IIO HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. ally the case, and then, it is by means of these beautiful phrase methods and abbreviations that a lagging shorthand writer is enabled to catch up with a speaker momentarily excited. To further illustrate the explanation in last lesson respecting how, for purposes of phrasing, joined words are often written out of position, the student is referred to the phrase / am glad, sign 42 in Exercise to last lesson, wherein the word glad, although properly, according to its vowel, belonging on the line, is written, in such combination, above the line, because its position when joined is not important, and the word am must have the first position or it will clash with may, in most instances. This will explain why the word course, in the phrase of course, is written above the line in sign 47 in the Exercise to last lesson, it being neces- sary for the word of to have proper position. Signs 48, 56 and 64 of Exercise to last lesson, and which occur immediately under each other in that Exercise, illustrate this rule still more plainly. In each of those phrases the word cases occurs, and each time in a different position. In the first instance, cases is written above the line, because the word in, of that phrase in all cases, must have first position. In the third in- stance, sign 64 of the Exercise to last lesson, cases is in the third position because the word some of that phrase in some cases, must be written under the line or it will clash with same, sign 56, Exercise to last lesson. Similar instances will be found in this lesson, as in sign 244, Exer- cise to this lesson, wherein, in the phrase Son of God, the word God which when alone is written in first position, is, in sign 244 of this lesson, writ- ten in the third position under the line, because the word Son, to be read, must have that position. OMITTED WORDS. One of the most frequently occurring words in the English language is the word to, and, as it requires almost as much time to write as a much longer word, the author, early in his professional experience, adopted a method by which to may frequently be indicated without be- ing written. This is done by writing a succeeding word near the lower portion of the word immediately preceding to in a phrase. See signs 235 to 237 in Exercise. When the word to begins a sentence, above plan does not, of course, apply, the word to, as the initiatory word of any sentence, being written as in the List of Word-Signs. The oft recurring word of may be similarly indicated by writing the succeeding word near, but towards the upper portion of the preceding outline, as with signs 238 and 239. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. in Neither to nor /jf jQ ^~4 fyfi ..^l/W.* ry ""^t 6 ^J 23 26f. 269.^, ww <5~^_ C^-s-*-? --^-^* &** V>' 'i/ <0 "f^* 'Ui ~] ^^VA^. I 3 p ~ b \ HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. U^ 155, forswear; 150, forewarned; 157, in (the) experience; 158, inexperienced; 159, instrumental; 160, insult; 161, in seeming; 162, in as many as possible; 163, unseemly; 164, unselfish; 165, unstrung; 166, unscrew; 167, entertain; 168, interest; 169, introduce; 170, intelligent; 171, intellectual; 172, under- stand; 173, understood; 174, magnesia; 175, magnify; 176, magnificence; 177, magnanimous; 178, regard; 179, regret; 180, nobly; 181, feeble; 182, feebleness; 183, unstability; 184, whatever; 185, whoever; 186, therefor-e; 187, wherefore; 188, careful; 189, carefulness; 190, doubtful; 191, faithful- ness; 192, powerful; 193, truthful-ly; 194, useful; 195, usefulness; 196, beginning; 197, doing; 198, seeing; 199, racings; 200, musings; 201, know- ingly; 202, owing; 203, building; 204, spreadings; 205, everlasting; 206, everlasting life; 207, everlasting love; 208, supplement; -209, fundamental; 210, instrumentality; 211, himself; 212, myself; 213, itself; 214, yourself; 215, gladsomeness; 216, yourselves; 217, themselves; 218, of ourselves; 219, to ourselves; 220, by ourselves; 221, carelessness; 222, thoughtlessness; 223, courtship; 224, friendship; 225, wheresoever; 226, whensoever; 227, whoso- ever; 228, whosesoever; 229, fellowship; 230, dated; 231, dreaded; 232, freighted; 233, voted; 234, plentitude; 235, not to call; 236, right to the last; 237, sensitive to the touch; 238, habits of birds; 239, efforts of the press; 240, Kingdom of Heaven; 241, Kingdom of Christ; 242, Church of Christ; 243, Throne ot Grace; -244, Son of God; 245, Word of God; 246, Works of God; 247, choice of the people; 248, member of the press; 249, members of the Legislature; 250, members of Congress; 251, members of Parliament; 252, not to be; 253, not to have been; 254, little by little; 255, insult upon insult; 256, in the world; 257, on account of the fact; 258, on the one hand; 259, on the other hand; 260, on either hand; 261, on the contrary; 262, more or less; 263, every one of us; 264, off and on; 265, again and again; 266, around and around; 267, hand in hand; 268, under- hand; 269, behind-hand; 270, some one or other; 271, somehow or other; 272, as well as; 273, as good as; 274, as great as; 275, as soon as; 276, as soon as possible; 277, as a matter of course; 278, as a matter of fact; 279, the best and worst; 280, the first and second; 281, the first and last; 282, the first and least; 283, the first thing; 284, the first subject; 285, the first position; 286, in the first place; 287, in the second place; 288, in the third place; 289, in the next place; 290, in the last place; 291, in the least place; 292, at least; 293, at last; 294, utilized; 295, has met; 296, at first; 297, at length; 298, at the rate of; 299, at any rate; 300, at all times; 301, at all events; 302 v at the same time; 303, at the present time; 304, between them; 305, although; 306, could not; 307, A creature of God; 308, Gentlemen throughout; 309, To-night the beauty of that heavenly body will be particularly noticeable; 310, According to custom the world means the people; 311, The establishment is not in the nature of a corporation; 312, An accurate use of words is indispensable to the orator; 313, Begin no new movement without quite a good deal of proper thought; 314, The foundation (the stone-work) under the house was poor its consequent fall was about certain; 315, Opportunities must be seized immediately, if at all after they pass, it is too late; 316, The plaintiff gave subsequent testimony which aston- ished the hundred opposing witnesses; 317, The agent is certainly a gentle- man I cannot account for his action toward you to-night; 318, They were once the conquerors of the East they were once the keepers of the Shekinah. n6 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. REVIEW EXERCISES. Twenty pages, (commencing with page nS and ending with pr.ge 137) are herein devoted to reviews of the principles contained in the preceding lessons, by means of words and phrases for the most part different from any found in the lessons themselves. No new principles are introduced, as the whole art is clearly and thoroughly set forth in the lessons, but as students sometimes learn an outline by sight alone, with no regard to the principles contained in same, the new words and phrases given in these Review Exercises will show the student his or her weak points, particularly if they are used as follows: Before looking at the shorthand outlines on any review page, look only at the printed key on page opposite the review shorthand plate, and write the printed words and phrases in your own way. Then, when you have written a full page, compare your shorthand with the plate and your weak points will appear. If you have a companion or teacher to read them to you, so much the better, but do not omit writing any word given you, no matter if you think you do not know how to write it. Write some outline, if it is only done by spelling the word or phrase phonetically by the aid of the shorthand alphabet. If you know the shorthand alphabet, you can make some kind of an outline with which to make a comparison. The Review Exercises will not enable the student to neglect the o reviewing of the lessons on preceding pages. Not at all. The lesson exercises must be gone over and over again, until every word in those lessons can be correctly written and without hesitation, from dicta- tion, the correctness being provable only by comparison with the les- son key in each case. In fact, absolute perfection in the lessons is-the surest way to get these Review Exercises correctly, for the Review Exercises are merely tests of the student's knowledge of the preceding lessons. Lesson and Review Exercises help each other, but neither can be used instead of both, and perfection in both is very necessary. The Review Exercises, plates and keys, are lettered consecutively from A to K, (excluding I), and the words and phrases number from I to 200 on each plate. In addition, down the centre of each plate will be seen heavy black figures 1 to 25. Those black figures show the number of lines on each plate, but that is not their object. Primarily* they are for the assistance of teachers in reviewing students. For in- stance, sometimes students are apt to memorize review words and phrases in the order given in the Exercises, and a teacher might wish to ascertain this. In such a case, instead of reading line for line across HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 117 the printed page, the teacher could take only the first word of each line of the printed key from top to bot- tom of pa.ge; then the second word of each line of printed key, same way; next the third word of each printed line; lastly, the fourth word v of each line which would finish a printed key page, there being just four words in each line of printed page, fifty lines to the page, or twice as many lines on printed page as on shorthand page plate. When the first word on each line of printed key page is used, the teacher will find, as shown in the little illustration opposite, that he or she has read one word on each side of the black figures in centre of the shorthand review plates, and is thus provided with a perfect check upon a student's knowledge, the two sorts of numbering of the lines making possible the creation of a variety of ways of dictation. A very important principle, which is illustrated in signs 103 and 104 on page 127 of our Review Exercises, is made by employing the princi. pie of substituting short-i where long I will not join, even when the I is the pronoun and not a letter of a word. In Lesson IV of Part II of this book, there are shown illustrations of how this is done in such proper names as Pine, wherein the short-i is shaded to indicate the substitution of that letter for the sign for long I where that will not join and where it is absolutely necessary to have the long sound indicated. It is even more necessary in phrasing, to join the pronoun I to other words, because it is so natural for the speaker to run those words together in pronouncing such phrases. Therefore, in such sentences as I saw, I asked, etc., the student can join the short sign for i, shaded to indicate the pronoun I. It is the desire of the author to have students possess a self-reliance which will enable them to put down outlines without stopping to criti- cise whether or not they are the best. There are words which are illus- trated in the lessons, such 3&.read, write, etc., which must always have a certain form or position, but aside from such instances, students should feel unhampered in the writing of words, so long as they write strictly by sound. Students may find, in some of the plates of this book, that the same word is written in two or more different ways. This is due to a difference in treatment made necessary by the occasion that is, words are treated differently in some phrases than in others, or than they would be when not phrased. If a writer, when taking notes, fears that a certain word will not be legible abbreviated, and has time to vocalize it, this is best done; but when the utmost rapidity is necessary, words should be written as briefly as possible, consistent with legibility. Of course, the greatest speed is obtained by using ths briefest outlines. Ii8 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. REVIEW EXERCISE A. I, ought; 2, galley; 3, women; 4, In the United States District Couit; 5, United States; 6, attains; 7, plaintiff's machine; 8, noses; 9, twelve; 10, which ought to have; n, yell; 12, would a; 13, dreaded; 14, appealed; 15, shadow; 16, to be there; 17,. learn; 18, stepped; 19, for it is known; 20, block; 21, memorandum; 22, neighborhood; 23, pussy; 24, languish; 25, missions; 26, entirely; 27, check; 28, testamentary; 29, archangel; 30, jointed; 31, tooth; 32, in (the) experience; 33, long; 34, fantasm; 35, maxims of the age; 36, also; 37, union; 38, such will have it; 39, bloom; 40, explain; 4 1 , somebody; 42, vicious; 43, cheer; 44, president's message; 45, twentieth; 46, attained; 47, Terry; 48, denominations; 49, juvenile; 50, averted; 51, money; 52, contraband; 53, over; 54, strict; 55, wound; 56, we might not have been; 57, able; 58, putative; 59, you must have; 60, legacy; 61, intelligent; 62, your favor of recent date received; 63, wasp; 64, 65, nail; 66, we were; 67, void; 68, delinquent; [double; 69, came; 70, sprinkle; 71, secret; 72, Trinitarianism; 73, been; 74, and then; 75, drive; 76, I think we would; 77, on either hand; 78, mortuary; 79, such are to have; 80, gloss; 81, G (the initial); 82, by ourselves; 83, cured; 84, fixture; 85, & (and); 86, prancing; 87, lashed; 88, it may require; 89, it; 90, impugned; 91, refer; 92, gubernatorial; 93, doctor; 94, much are; 95, for he was the; 96, minute; 97, self-evident; 98, New Jerusalem; 99, ended; 100, leisure; 101, our; 102, taught; 103, as is; 104, ventilate; 105, liberty; 106, anybody; 107, broke; 108, chronology; 109, safer; no, swooned; in, psalm; 112, paralytic; 113, short-oo; 1 14, emigrate; 115, charm; 116, inconsiderate; 117, give; 118, service; 119, doubt; 120, temptation; 121, has; 122, holiest; 123, conquered; 124, yore; 125, Oi; 126, sitter; 127, eyes; 128, paragraph; 129, justification; 130, madder; 131, soon; 132, defective; 133, assure; 134, noisiest; 135, great extent; 136, group; 137, until; 138, does a; 139, lady; 140, microcosm; 141, cannot; 142, we will; 143, essay; 144, as much as; 145, lore; 146, tosses; 147, flow; 148, brilliant; 149, Mr.; 150, anything; 151, magnanimously; 152, guilt; 153, much; 154, you will; 155, twain; 156, influential; 157, principal; 158, altitudes; 159, been able to; 160, legal; 161, specially; 162, ambition; 163, cases; 164, you must not; 165, through; 166, tell of jt; 167, empty; 168, mannered; 169, truth; 170, save us; 171, words; 172, compulsion; 173, you; 174, whereby; 175, ought to have been; 176, mounds, 177, would; 178, tickle; 179, are; 180, structure; iSi.well; 182, mocker; 183, snow; 1.84, direction; 185, Jesus; 186, whereat; 187, and will they; 188, inside; 189, stickler; 190, occurred; 191, favor; 192, watchfulness; 193, strength; 194, one or the other; 195, wan; 196, paraphrase; IQ7, A; 198, and have; 199, Sarah; 200, discriminate. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. up I REVIEW EXERCISI A. .^ 2..J 3.. 4. .?.[.. ..10 J.. U..C... ;*./... JV....X...4* ..... : .. i * 105.. \ N ~^ *\ .. , 10&..:...lQ..\ _ ../. . 1 .. f .../- 3 4 5 6 7 81 9 YO 16 11 IS 19 ZO 21 ZZ 24 23 .1* 1 * ..... y. . ...... ^..^....\. . ...4.0 sT> V-p L ..... 4-6.. 3 ..... 4#K ;.* ..(,9 ..77. ..... ..93.. ....94-.. 7.. ...^^.. . 7.. .C ... \ .I9f. -^Lc-N. . M^ ^53\ ..64.. I.. V o- T N. e ..96 ..... . [.. .*^. . ./*. 92 ^_9 '^ i?o HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. REVIEW EXERCISE B. 1. was it; 2; hunger-ry; 3, at the present moment; 4, felt; 5, signature; 6, how; 7, get; 8, lam in receipt of your favor of the I3tb 9, Rem; 10, internal revenue; 11, earn; 12, tirade; [instant; 13, of; 14, mitred; 15, such had not; 16, such ought not; 17, danger; 18, lustrous; 19, blood; 20, suppression; 21, without; 22, signed; 23, combine; 24, combination; 25, moral; 26, peopled; 27, truly yours; 28, listen; 29, usual; 30, trainer; 31, yielded; 32, corruption; 33, scripture; 34, yoke; 35, it will have; 36, it will have had; 37, this; 38, complied; 39, scrawl; 40, deflective; 41, three thousand; 42, up the; 43, sinner; 44, profitable-y; 45, immediately; 46, bankrupt; 47, suffer; 48, considerable-y; 49, difficult; 50, defiance; 51, whilst; 52, such will have; 53, generation; 54, thinks his the; 55, all of; 56, trounces; 57, punishment; 58, welfare; 59, knelt; 60, peroration; 61, for-four-th; 62, continue; 63, masses; 64, Jewish Church; 65, wire; 66, golden; 67, weep; 68, fugitives; 69, strange; 70, versify; 71, versification; 72, versificative; 73, author; 74, I think not in; 75, hopes; 76, attended; 77, gentleman; 78, plenary; 79, winter; 80, preliminary; 81, yes sir; 82, treasure; 83, slender enough; 84, to our; 85, X (the initial); 85, can the; 87, I must; 88, rather than; 89, dollar; 90, tell it; 91, switch; 92, membership; 93, philanthropy; 94, smoother; 95, you do; 96, description; 97, races; 98, cabinet; 99, hasten; 100, philanthropic; 101, him; 102, perfect; 103, perfected; 104. perfection; 105, quit; 106, lads; 107, something else; 108, something less; 109, stopper; no, expert; ill, ninny; 112, you can be; 113, particularly; 114, accession; 115, accusation; 116, acquisitions; 117, wing; 1 18, contract; 119, lifter; 120, promulgation; 121, acknowledge; 122, cistern; 123, mounts; 124, disability; 125, influence; 126, for the; 127, fault; 128, which were; 129, Mack (proper name); 130, area; 131, tinner; 132, subscribe; 133, organ; 134, dangers; 135, creep; 136, redemption; 137, eternity; 138, consistency; 139, consisted; 140, consistent; 141, themselves; 142, explore; 143, ladies; 144, partnership; 145, man's; 146, strain; 147, airs; 148, such have; 149, have; 150, hoof; 151, recollect; 152, recollection; 153, about; 154, sources; 155, convenient; 156, taste; 157, accurately; 158, captives; 159, we may; 160, reflective; 161, short-i; 162, polled; 163, exaggerate; 164, exaggerative; 165, M (the initial); 166, definite; 167, attune; 168, physiology; 169, different; I/O, coasts; i/i, is in; 172, not to do; 173, established; 174, emphatic; 175, leaper; 176, embarrassing; 177, spreadings; 178, take a; 179, usury; 180, have them; 181, then; 182, consist; 183, writer; 184, Christianity; 185, important; 186, fairy; 187, suppressed; 188, neglect; 189, poster; 190, give the; 191, Viewed; 192, there can no; 193, behind; 194, connive; 195, I fear you; 196, accuse; 197, use (the use); 198, here; 199, astronomy; 200, astronomical; HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 121 REVIEW EXERCISE B. ........... IS ....... 16 Zi ..... ....23... ..4. .T 1.^.. *6^S - /^.. 4....... 48:. .X...43 ........ .3L ...... #. ..... .52 / ....... ^ ____ 6-^....^ / ..^3/r^)... ..70\V O ...... .^,.. ../.. . . . . .to 61. . fc i. o J O ~7 ./ ..1ZZ,...... Q. I _../s r . L .1 122 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. REVIEW EXERCISE C. I, racings; 2, open; 3, may it please your honor; 4, exstacy;' 5, who; 6, candle; 7, clay; 8, in the popular acceptation of the term, 9, will; 10, learned; n, woman; 12, unseasoned; 13, chanced; 14, cannot have been; 15, for a; 16, homeless; 17, on the one hand; 18, stands; 19, thee; 20, yours of thegth instant 21, glory; 22, solution; 23, store; 24, commission; [at hand; 25, body; 26, parapet; 27, I shall not know; 28, Walter; 29, minimum; 30, distinct; 31, any one; 32, we may not be; 33, eleven; 34, is in their; 35, offer; 36, portrait; 37, addition; 38, compiled; 39, we met; 40, wonder who can; 41, government; 42, Gertrude; 43, you have been; 44, reader; 45, short-a; 46, I cannot do that; 47, tried; 48, Prussia; 49, home; 50, dinner; 51, amuse; 52, there would (had) not; 53, far; 54, causes; 55, precedent; 56, president; 57, withal; 58, Kentucky; 59, to our; 60, objectionable; OI, utilize; 62, welcome; 63, watch; 64, defendant's machine; 65, cessation; 66, Atkinson; 67, judge; 68, churchyard; 69, accord; 70, you shall have; 71, school; 72, delivery; 73, began; 74, purity; 75, Annie; 76, I think you must have; 77, forewarned; 78, governed; 79, latter; 80, transitorial; 81, belong; 82, ends; 83, "denominated; 84, denomination; 85, I; 86, reproved; 87, which will not; 88, virtue; 89, mill; 90, lad; 91, irregularly; 92, irregularity; 93, advantage; 94, fled; 95, proportion; 96, preparation; 97, up; 98, properly; 99, proper; 100, prepare; 101, movement; 102, stout; 103, stated; 104, constituted; 105. member; 106, wealthy; 107, sways; 108, corruptive; 109, spree; no, no thing; in, apart; 112, said to have; 113, your; 114, .in this; 115, fully; 116, procession; 117, other; 118, have it; 119, stove; 120, may there; 121, yes; 122, compel; 123, recollected; 124, swine; 125, (Q) the initial; 126, phonographic; 127, renew it; 128, locker; 129, contribute; 130, clew; 131, appliance; 132, compliance; 133, external; 134, arise; 135, evangelic; 136, evangelize; 137, business; 138, subtle; 139, favorable; 140, feud; 141, can; 142, concern; 143, concerning; 144, concerned; 145, out; 146, polish; 147, owned; 148, everywhere; 149, advertisements; 150, hose; 151, driven; 152, undertaken; I-J3, natured; 154, humanely; 155, naval; 156, credibility; 157, remarked; 158, such are; 159, philanthropist; 160, let us; 161, D (the initial); 162, support; 163, separate; 164, separation; 165, treble; 166, over it; 167, swore; 168, collect; 169, equally; 170, rendered; 171, mourns; 172, I beg to say; 173, was; 174, teller; 175, jury; 176, externity; 177, measure; 178, collected; 179, collection: 180, collective; 181, establish; 182, portion; 183, normal; 184, philosophy; 185, friendship; 186, if there; 187, earned; 188, I shall have; 189, an; 190, stable; 191, through one; 192, gem; 193, revolution; 194, purpose; 195, around; 196, which have it; 197, whether there; 198, define; 199, meet; 200, posterior. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 123 124 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. REVIEW EXERCISE D. i, seventh; 2, we will not have been; 3, armed; 4, please; 5, has it; 6, going; 7, hiss; 8, in the United States Patent Office; 9, H (the initial); 10, Dunlap; u, which had (would) not; 12, whip; 13, sabler; 14, clothe; 15, extra; 16, extraordinary; 17, today; 18, attempt; 19, occur; 20, but for-have-of-if; 21, too; 22, sustains; 23, which are of; 24, loafer; 25, workmen; 26, generals; 27, generalize; 28, generalization; 29, respectful; 30, darkness; 31, wintry; 32, generalized; 33, given; 34, spaces; 35, holy; 36, there may be little; 37, Ai (long-a); 38, renew an; 39, follow their; 40, seemly; 41, peculiar; 42, suspense; 43, suspended; 44, suspension; 45, special; 46, suspend; 47, suspicion; 48, I fear you may; 49, under; 50, forsooth; 51, pretensions^ 52, clamor; 53, ever; 54, notion; 55, dissever; 56, disseminate; 57, quite; 58, applied; 59, unless; 60, thenceforth; DI, generally; 62, cumber; 63, walk; 64, I will not have you; 65, word; 66, power of the court; 67, acted; 68, misrule; 69, principle; 70, during; 71, did I not understand you to say; 72, lieu; 73, year; 74, pastoral; 75, August; 76, I think that; 77, rural; 78, graves; 79, held; 80, disbelief; 81, internally; 82, womanly; 83, evil; 84, it could have been; 85, S (the initial); 86, tells us; 87, we will not be; 88, in our; 89, strop; 90, sensitive to the last; 91, anger-y; 92, sermon; 93, improve; 94, pleader; 95, artist; 96, slaughtered; 97, defendant; 98, gentile; 99, frosty; 100, blushingly; IOI, change; 102, miner-or; 103, sentimental: IOJ, train; 105, inscribe; 106, tell us; 107, amount; 108, with their; 109, every; lio, guilty; in, you may have; 1 12, opened; 113, short-o; 114, perceive; 115, wash; 116, ambiguous; 117, providence; 118, homely; 119, ruin; 120, plaintiffs; 121, same; 122, rubber; 123, it is the; 124, dawn; 125, phonography; 126, deceased; 127, holier; 128, Connecticut; 129, done; 130, calm; 131, prefixed; 132, develope; 133, active; 134, twin; 135, rational; 136, rationally; 132, usually; 138, rather; 139, babe; 140, such would (had); 141, any; 142, expanse; 143, expansive; 144, expensive; 145, deliver; 146, expense; 147, cramp; 148, forefinger; 149, manufacture; 150, deft ; 151, circulation; 152, origin; 153, Coke (proper name); 154, had not; 155, humbug; 156, not to come; 157, system; 158, ruined; 159, poor; 160, versatile; 161, what; 162, gaiter; 163, bountiful; 164, beau; 165, fundamental; 166, crawl; 167, no other; 168, another one; 169, honor; 170, gibe; 171, characters; 172, characterize; 173, were; 174, duty; 175, depths; 176, furnished; 177, Y (the initial); 178, appeals; 179, anchor; 180, considered; 181, met; 182, joyful; 183, therefore; 184, coil; 185, universal; 186, reactive; 187, entire; 188, irksomeness; 189, instruct; 190, partial; 191, allows; 192, I shall not be; 193, jurisdiction; 193, desert; 195, express; 196, expression; 197, punish; 198, cayenne; 199, swayed; 200, occasioned. u HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 125 . 8i ..].... REVIEW EXERCISE D. <..L.*.?^ A.~r. A... / ..X) ..... *..J3.1...J o 106.. b. . tO? ......... . 146 *.. k . /6J... ^64- \ 9 10 11 12 13 14 U 16 it IS 19 20 iss^ .187 yQ < ^O 1' 21 22 ,.1..^5 24 P ./7J.. , 1 K I /3".' ^-/ ..96b... .1.... n x- .? .W.l.,-0*.^.., f'.^-v. 126 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. REVIEW EXERCISE E. . i, Jehovah; 2, stood; 3, industry of the times; 4, turn; 5, doing; 6, German; 7, balm; 8, 1 have no doubt of it; 9, caution; 10, it had (would) not; 11, dark; 12, meeting; 13, the cipher; 14, Louisa; 15, oppose; 16, opposition; 17, speech; 18, boldness; 19, it is entirely; 20, anyway; 21, improvement; 22, junction; 23, wampum; 24, construction; 25, accordingly; 26, easy; 27, mankind; 28, transubstantiation: 29, issue; 30, forget; 31, irreconcilable; 32, sob; 33, near; 34, revive; 35, toss; 36, Committee on Foreign Relations; 37, J (the initial); 38, punished; 39, there may be; 40, option; 41, believe; 42, literary; 43, literature; 44, baby; 45, in seeming; 46, constant; 47, higher; 48, we may not do; 49, Oo; 50, such ought to have; 51, self; 52, humored; 53, charge; 54, spread; 55, joint stock company; 56, trim; 57, party; 58, fickle; 59, cube; 60, something; 6l, establishment; 62, jealous; 63, dime; 64, in the discretion of the 65, in; 66, as made; 67,'this has not taken; 68, owns; [court; 69, satisfy; 71, I fear you will be; 71, grow; 72, nothing; 73, brother; ^4, surmount; 75, swivel; 76, wonderful-ly; 77, Hay (the letter); 78, verify; 79, clump; 80, I think not in any; 81, concomitant; 82, libation; 83, in all its; 84, tired; 85, very; 86, theirs to deserve; 87, wedge; 88, nowhere; 89, W (the initial); 90, mistrust; 91, clause; 92, individual; 93, kingdom; 94, northern; 95, northeast; 96, northwest; 97, tell; 98, rush; 99, north; ioo,you shall; IOT, armor; 102, secure; 103, I saw; 104, I asked him; 105, again; 106, raised; 107, worn; 108, would you; 109, especially; no, acts; ill, abbreviation; 112, cosy; 113, Zhee (the letter); 114, familiar; 115, operation; 116, oppression; 117, than; 11 8, September; 119, such; 120, forgot; 121, object; 122, in life; 123, deviation; 124, robe; 125, hundred; 126, suppose; 127, can I; 128, to be able; 129, vale; 130, prominent; 131, permanent; 132, preeminent; 133, together; 134, journal; 135, screw; 136, such a one; 137, call; 138, worked; 139, jute; 140, reception; 141, thirteenth; 142, diseased; 143, nondescript; 144, paper; 145, performj 146, may be not; 147, scrub; 148, empyric; 149, or; 150, pyramid; 151, bound; 152, inscription; 153, with; 154, greed-t; 155, fine; 156, a\vfulness; 157, unstability; 158, diction; 159, frequently; 160, could; 161, E; 162, southern; 163, southeast; 164, southwest; 165, humor; 166, delay; 167, south; 1 68, I will try; 169, took; I/O, pickle; 171, love their; 172, envy; 173, sprawl; 174, sold; 175, additional; 176, additionally; 177, throughout; 178, hurrah; 179, momentum; 180, momentary; 181, if; 182, dutiful; 183, peril; 184, you will be; 185, salvation; 186, coaster; 187, gloom; iSS, avaricious; 189, immediate; 190, reach; 191, and thinks his; 192, display; 193, advertise; 194, dispel; 195, displace; 196, displeasure; 197, C (the initial); 198, possess; 199, possessed; 200, possesses. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 127 REVIEW EXERCISE E. ...... J.'irs5...- 49- 4-2./ 43.C. 44-V..... ..yo. .r^r.^. 172 .. . -. 1 b. *94-<^ 3 4 S 6 r 8 9 iO il ^^ ^-2 4| 25 77- /... . .< 7e?.l.... . 50 . ^.. U.4.J.. .129..*?. .. ^ -i OX* 43 (T^... . 144 ........... '4ff.A. ........ ijo ^V. 3-2 . 6t ^...\....6J..!l 64-. .V .69 \ TRff^TfiS 6 -x -N ' :.....8-6..9. ?7...|..5^rB.., .. /ftp A ... 138 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. ABOUT PEOPLE WHO GIVE YOU SHORTHAND ADVICE Any professional writer of any system, providing that writer has done court aud convention re- porting, is competent to give good advice respecting study and practice ; but, as far as best outlines are concerned, no one can give you any good advice who is not a writer of the system you are studying ; because rules that would be good for one system, might seriously conflict in another. It is even dan- gerous to accept the advice of professional writers of the system you are studying, unless the adviser is, or has been, a professional court and conveutiou reporter of experience. A mere office stenographer may never have had any difficult work in his or her position, even if it has been held lor years Some office positions are only a detriment to the stenographer on account of but little shorthand work; easy letters; no variety of language ; aud an employer who is ignorant, or who does not care how his work is done. All the little law firms and business agencies, with offices in big buildings, even if they have only two letters a day to write, want those letters done in typewriting, because it looks more businesslike than penmanship, aud hence employ a stenographer to writethose letters, the stenographer occupying the balance of the time by merely keeping the office open and taking the names of customet s or clients, while the employer is out drumming up trade. Any clerk could hold such a position with- out shorthand, for, as a rule, such an employer does not dictate at all, but often writes the letters himself in lead pencil, aud has the stenographer typewrite them. As it is necessary that a shorthand writer have not less than one to two hours daily shorthand dictation and two to four hours typewriting practice daily to retain speed, it will readily be seen that such positions are a detriment to any shorthand writer, in a loss of both speed aud knowledge, and such stenographers are certainly not competent to give advice to anyone, even it they had fifty years of such experience. by above, it will be seen that not all who call themselves stenographers are really so. The ci.lv office stenographers who are competent to give advice to a student who has well learned all exercises anil reviews up to this page, are those who have fully fifty letters a day dictated to them. They are real stenog- raphers, and they will not tell you to write proper names, addresses, etc., in long band. Tt'ey are too hurried in their work to do anything of the kind. Just as soon asaperson whom you havesupposed to be an office stenographer of experience (because you know him or her to have held a position for several years) tells you that he or she never writes proper names, addresses, etc., in shorthand, then you may know that that person holds a position of no importance whatever, so far as shorthand is concerned, or he or she would have no time to write any longhand during dictation. Imagine a shorthand reporter trying to take a speech by writing the technical terms and names of cities and heroes in longhand with the speaker going at the rate of 150 or more words a minute ; or the court reporter at a trial every time a witness mentions the defendant or plaintiff or names of places, numbers of streets, etc., writing same in longhand ! Do you imagine it could be done? Not a bit of it. And it is just so, in the kind of office positions where theie are hundreds ot letters to answer daily and the dictation has to be taken at the rate of loo to 120 words a minute to get each (.ay's work done. There is no more time to write in longhand the proper names, technical terms, etc., occurring in the body of a letter in the dictation of suth offices, than there is in speech reporting. Of course, where, in letter dictation, the original letters received are numbered so that the stenographer may get from them the proper names and addresses of firms written to, there is no necessity to dictate such names and addresses at beginning of letters, and when an oddly srelled name occurs for the first time even in the body of a letter, its spelling is then given to the stenographer, but after that one time, he or she is expected to remember its spelling and to write it there- after as rapidly as any other word, which can only be done by writing it in - horthand. Even were it possible to write in longhand all proper names, technical terms, etc. in rapid short- hand work, it would still be better for the student, in his or her siudy,to write them in shorthand, be- cause of the ability it gives the student to correctly and quickly form any shorthand combination of sounds, a facility which every student must acquire before rapidity in shorthand work can be attained. Therefore, the shorthand plates of the actual business letters of pages 145 to 159, as well as the court and convention pages throughout this book, contain the shorthand forms for all proper names, addresses, technical terms, etc., and numerals as well. Any teacher who ad vises the longhand writing of any words or numerals does a great injustice to pupils. The dictators in a busy business house would be decidedly hampered and delayed, if they had to wait while their stenographers wrote in longhand all the names of goods, towns, and firms and persons referred to in the body of their letters. And, furthermore, it would be ridiculous for any stenographer worthy the name, to seek to write such easy proper names as Smith, Boston, etc., in long 1 and, nor are such things ever done by skilled stenographers. The most difficult kinds of words must be written in rapid shorthand office dictation when they occur in the body of a letter, just as certainly as the most difficult medical or botanical phrase, architectural or engineering term, in a court trial, convention or lecture. Any persons claiming to be stenographers, who te'l.you differently, and say it is never done in business offices, just because they or their stenographic friends have never done it, are assuredly holding positions which do not require anv real skill, no matter how many years they have been in the profession or how many positions they have held, or how nice they may be personally. Teachers who have had no professional experience, or of merelv the above kind, are also not competent to give any advice in opposition to directions in book you study. They may mean well, but ate utterly incapable of judging or of giving advice on shorthand outlines or professional requirements to others, no matter what their teaching experience may be. As the author of this book has had over twenty years of the most difficult sort of shorthand reporting and teaching experience, it is a safe rule not to accept any advice from others in reference to either shorthand outlines or methods of practice where the advice does not agree with the directions of this book. Particularly beware of changes, or so-called "improvements" by any teacher who has not had as much professional experience as the author of this book. Every improvement m^dehy Mr. Haven, was first proven to be practical by actual use lor a number of years in his professional shorthand reporting before being printed or taught by him. Changes by other teachers without such test are both valueless and dangerous. Any teacher, even though only a beginner, with no teaching or professional experience whatever, can produce as skillful graduates as the best, so long as all the directions of this book are strictly followed, but the best teacher living will fai', if our directions are violated in any way. PART III. T H E R BAD E R GENERAL DIRECTIONS. This portion of the book is intended for both reading and writing practice, the printed pages being the key to the shorthand engraving opposite them. Students should, therefore, not cease studying these pages until they can both read the shorthand engraving as rapidly as print and write the printed pages from dictation into as precise short- hand as they are herein written by the author. Before the student begins practicing the exercises found within this portion of the book, the author furthermore desires to state that, while this part is in a great degree intended to perfect students in the proper use of every principle illustrated in the lessons of Part II, yet its primary object is also to give them a concise idea of the manner of IN- VENTING EXTEMPORANEOUSLY THE SPECIAL ABBREVI- ATIONS explained in first paragraph of Page 89 of Part II, while en- gaged in reporting lectures, sermons, etc. To obtain a complete idea of rapid phrasing and the manner in which this is accomplished.it will be necessary for the student to observe the following rules in making use of this Reader: ist. Carefully read and note in the shorthand pages herein, every digression from the long way of writing words and phrases, for which word or phrase signs or abbreviations have not been already learned. 2nd. Write all the exercises from dictation, afterward comparing your shorthand writing with the original, as stated more fully else- where. Rewrite and re-rewrite from dictation until your shorthand writing compares precisely with that in this Reader. 3rd. Transcribe all your shorthand writing before comparing it with the shorthand plates, always comparing your transcription with the printed key. By this means, many slight but important contractions may be discovered, which otherwise might be overlooked. (139) 140 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. BUSINESS LETTER PRACTICE. The letters, given on pages 144 to 159 in this portion of the book, numbering 36 in all, two each day for 18 days, have been graded, the smallest ones first, for the purpose of enabling students to learn the forms in each one, before the next is attempted, the letters increasing in size with each day, because many words and phrases in preceding ones will be found to be duplicated, in addition to the introduction of new words and forms, so that the last day's letters, which occupy a whole page, are almost as easy to the student when that stage of progress has been reached, as the first two small letters were to the one who had just finished the lessons. These letters are selected from a large number of different busi- nesses, representing nearly all the lines of trade in which a stenographer would be most likely to be employed, the entire set containing prac- tically all the commercial phrases used in any business, together with their best shorthand forms, including those of each day of the week except Sunday, as well as the names of the months and all sorts of dates, all personal initials, the name of nearly every state and im- portant city in the Union, every style of names of firms, and street or post office addresses, home or foreign. This list of mock letters, there- fore, gives students more information in regard to correct shorthand out- lines than the mere title or their appearance suggests, and, on this ac- count, indispensable to the would-be amanuensis. It is not necessary for the first two letters to be commenced on Monday, although that is the day named above the first set, on page 144, nor is it necessary that any of those days be set apart for those certain occasions, the letters being commenced as soon as the student is through the lessons of the theory, and has thoroughly reviewed them; the words Monday, Tuesday, etc., like the different months and other particulars of names and dates, being used herein merely to give the shorthand student practice on those words. The best plan upon which to get the most good in the shortest time from these business letters, is for students to have some one dic- tate to them only two letters at a time, the student at once comparing his or her shorthand writing with the printed shorthand, noting every deviation therefrom, respecting shading, slant or curvature of charac- ters, size, position, phrasing, etc., and practicing at least twelve times the proper form for each deviation. After this has been done with all the characters of one day's letters, the two letters of the next should be similarly taken from dictation, compared and practiced, and so on throughout the entire course. HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 1^1 Two letters a day are sufficient, with other practice, and the/ should not be studied beforehand by the student, as it is advisable to ascertain the weak points of the student's writing, which are best dis- covered by the mistakes made in writing from their own unaided knowl- edge. If they do not know how to write a word correctly by prin- ciple, they can spell it with the letters of the shorthand alphabet, which is a much better way to do than to study the business letters beforehand, for, if they do the latter, they will be writing from memory of sight, which is not the proper way to learn and will not designate a student's weak points. As soon as any day's letters have bee i written from dictation, as well as the student can do it without much hesitation, then the student should compare his or her shorthand notes on plan above stated, prac- ticing strictly as directed. When the entire set is finished, continual review should be prac- ticed upon them until they all can be written without a mistake or differ- ent junctures, unless it be some minor point of phrasing. It is just as important to thus continually review these business letters as it is the lessons of the theory, but the review need not interfere with your progress. Continue with the Actual Court Cases as soon as through the last day's letters herein, and review the letters between times, but be sure to so review them. The student will note that at the end of every day of these letter ex- ercises there is drawn a double line. This is done the next morning when commencing a new day's work, to show that the letters coming after it belong to another day, which is additionally shown by a date separated from the letters below it by a single line, just as each letter is separated from others by a single line. In these lettters we have given the names of the persons to whom they are addressed, as well as the town, state, etc., all written in short- hand, because we desire the student to have practice in all kinds of out- lines.but this is not always done in business houses, as in some of them the stenographer is supposed to know the customers' names and the names of most of the correspondents of the firm. The employer" gen- erally prefaces a dictation by saying: " Take a letter to Mr. Smith, St. Louis," in which case the stenographer simply writes, " Smith, St. Louis, " in 'his notebook beginning his letter. Sometimes, even the address is not given by an employer, as some of the letters are to firms well known, and the employer may simply say: " Take a letter to Fuller & Fuller," in which case just those names are written by the stenographer in the note -book preceding the dictation; and, if he or she remembers the address in full from previous knowledge, it is after- wards written out in full on the letter without further looking up, 1^2 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. but, if the address is not known or remembered, the stenographer consults possibly the books of the firm, or, later on, if he is wise, he makes himself a little book which contains the names and addresses of correspondents, as they were given him. Often, however, no names whatever are given, but the letters which the firm has received, are numbered by the employer or sterfo- grapher to accord with a number in the book of the stenographer, and then the stenographer, referring to the letter to which reply is made, gets the name and address to type-write on his letter sheet, with his transcribed letter. This latter is the general plan when a letter is to be answered, but when a firm is writing an original letter which is not a reply to any received, then the name and address is given, except in first named instances. The printed keys to the letters in this part of the book are not ar- ranged in the manner in which those letters are intended to be written on a typewriting machine. In this book, the arrangement of the type is a matter of convenience respecting the size of our pages, the name and the address each being on a line by itself, and "Gentlemen" or "Dear Sir" written in even with the first line of the letter. In actual typewriter work the stenographer should write the name of the party addressed on one line, the party's address on next one or on two lines, while "Dear Sir" or "Gentlemen" should be on a line by itself, in any or- dinary sized letter, and only placed on the same line with first line of letter when the letter is anextralong one, and it is advisable to save a line. The illustration on opposite page shows how the first letter on pages 1 54 and 155 would be typewritten properly. The names of the days of the week, Monday, Tuesday, etc., are not placed upon a transcript, as they are only put in the shorthand note- book as a matter of memoranda, but the name of the town from which the letter is sent is placed on the finished letter, though not shown in the note-book. Compare carefully every detail of letter in typewriting on opposite page with the same letter on pages 154 and 155. Thestudent will notice throughoutthe shorthand plates of this book, that where a sentence ends at or near the right-hand end of the line of writing, the next sentence is commenced about one-half inch from the lefthand margin of the next line, as on last line of second day's letters of page 145, instead of a greater distance, as otherwise necessary when it is desired to show a period within the line of writing. This is done to distinguish between the end of a paragraph and the beginning of a new paragraph or interrogatory sentence, either of which would be im- plied were the space rule for indicating a period, given on page in, applied to such instances i. e., where a sentence terminated at or near the righthand end of the line of writing. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 143 A. B. SMITH ^^ i 1 C> D r-k R - M - BROWN Dealers in QENERAL MERCHANDISE Offices ir? all principal Qti^s. Chicago, October 22d, 1884. Mr. X. Idler, Hortonsville, Wis. Dear Sir: I received a letter this morning inclosing a remittance with the above name signed and the town of Hortonsville, but no State named, and the envelope was marked so poorly by the postmaster, from whose of- fice the letter was sent, that I could not get the State name from that source. I findj however, there is a town named Hortonsville in Wisconsin, and I therefore send to that town the article desired. If It should happen to reach you, please remember In the future not only to write your name plainly to every communication you send out, but be sure al- ways to give your address in full. Including State and county, espec- ially wnen you send money. This precaution will save you and others consiaeraoie inconvenience. Respectful ly. I4 4 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. (ist day.) MONDAY, JANUARY 2 d, 1870. Messrs. Wilson Bros., Burksville, Ala, GENTLEMEN: Please send the statement of unpaid bills which you have against us up to date, and greatly oblige. Respectfully yours. Messrs. Dennison &* Lawrence, Doi'epark, Clark Co., Ark. GENTLEMEN: We return bill dated February 28, amount $8.75. We presume that these goods were bought by the Wiley Mercantile Co.; they were never ordered by us. (2nd day.) TUESDAY, FEBRUARY ist, 1871. Mr. J. B. Black, 410 S. 15 th St., Oakland, Cal. DEAR SIR: We have received bill of $24.00 for advertising in Oakland Telegraph, and presuming it to be all right, have paid it. Please let me know by return mail, if it be correct. St. Joseph's Savings Bank, Denver, Colo. GENTLEMEN: The enclosed bank book and documents were picked up in our store to-day. Will you please see that they are returned to the owners, as we do not know where to address them? Very truly yours. (3rd day.) WEDNESDAY, MARCH 3rd, 1872. Messrs. T. Lewis 6 Son, Box 1213, New Haven, Conn. GENTLEMEN: We enclose letter from party in New Sharon. We have sent him catalogue and referred him to you for prices and terms. Hoping that you may be able to secure his custom, we remain, Yours truly. Mrs. Christine Martin, Rockland, Del. DEAR MADAM: We are in receipt of notice from the American Express Co., stating that the package sent you of laces and embroideries is at their office in your town unclaimed. Please oblige us by calling on them for same. ( 4 th day.) THURSDAY, MARCH 4 th, 1873. Messrs. Wilson Bedloe 6 Son, Frceport, Fla. GENTLEMEN: We have received several orders from local customers for you. - What are your best discounts? Please notify us and we may give you a trial order and perhaps do considerable business with you if prices are right. The H. B. Howe Co., Savannah, Ga. GENTLEMEN: Goods ordered on the first instant have been received, and must say that we are very much surprised and disappointed in them. The stock and finish is very poor and we cannot use them at any price. They are nothing like samples shown us. What shall we do with them? HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. .rr P...VJV. e? jk; c u ^ l ....r .^..n ^f..C^T..Tl^ V^ P <\ ^. A. l%V* v ^x>-/' ^/ -- o v_A ^-f -f^ ^^"'x^ ' A .L_ 1 <\ \ \ | 146 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. (5th day.) FRIDAY, APRIL 5th, 1874. Messrs. Bissett 6 Co., 25 Nattan St., Chicago, III. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter of the 3d instant, and note con- tents. We sent the seventeen cases of goods to the Indianapolis parties as directed, and forwarded them also the bill of lading. They have undoubtedly received them before this. Mr. A. R. Johnson, Memphis, Ind. DEAR SIR: We have your favor of the 4th instant, ordering shade rollers, and have shipped same to-day. We cannot send with them the full assortment of brackets named, as some of the sizes are out of stock, but we will have them in a few days, and will forward them to you then. Yours truly. (6th day.) SATURDAY, APRIL 6th, 1875. Messrs. Hanford 6 Sons, Limited, Waverly, Iowa. GENTLEMEN: Your favor of f'.e 5th instant, and also sample brush at hand. The brush apparently is well made, and -we shall be pleased to try sdme. While your price is above what we are paying, yet it is possible the goods are a little better. If we so conclude, we may at an early date try a sample gross of your goods. Martin H. Green, Esq., Garnett, Kas. DEAR SIR: Your note for $100, due March 26th, has been sent to the First National Bank for collection, and returned endorsed, " No funds." We regret this very much as we need the money, and shall be pleased to have some explanation of the reason you have in not paying this note. We shall expect remittance by return mail. Respectfully. (7th day.) MONDAY, MAY loth, 1876. Messrs. Planchett 6 Nephew, 4221 2$f/i Sf., Louisville, Ky. GENTLEMEN: We have received your letter in which you state that hereafter all of our bills will be post-dated sixty days. We were not in- formed of this fact by our buyer until yesterday, after we had sent you settlement. We are obliged to you for calling our attention to this fact, and here- after shall make our settlements accordingly. The Farwell-Parsons Co., P. O. Drawer 391, New Orleans, La. GENTLEMEN: Answering your favor of the Qth instant, we beg to reassert that the goods sent us were not up to the standard, and we cannot use them. We do not wish a discount on price, for the goods are not what we want. We want the goods we ordered and none others. As you gave us no instruction what to do with these, we have returned them by freight yesterday. Very truly. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL. PHONOGRAPHY. X^V-i-y^ "^ :. -o . v .?v?....\. e 1-, .^ .n .^ i -* ^_ O......J s-yi L t,.^..^^. _ -A-. ^^r^ i<. ^^\ / ^ ^^.T...!iA...-^..c>..c) -y 148 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. (8th day.) TUESDAY, MAY nth, 1877. Messrs. Lewis Carson 6 Co., 89 Franklin St., St. Paul, Minn. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter of the loth instant returning our statement and check, and stating that your terms are strictly 7-10 or 6-30. In reply we beg to say that we bought these goods of your agent here upon the following terms: " 7-10, 60 days dating." The extra i per cent, is for the sixty days' interest. We therefore return the check herewith. Respectfully. Mr. Samuel Hanson, Saco, Me. DEAR SIR: On weighing the feed billed to us on your invoice of the 8th instant, we make it 4,125 Ibs., which is 25 Ibs. less than your invoice above referred to makes it. We do not know whose scales are correct, but hereafter, to save trouble, please have weigher's certificate attached to all the feed you supply us with, and greatly oblige. Respectfully. (9th day.) WEDNESDAY, JUNE i2th, 1878. Mr. James Lane, Box 9403, Boston, Mass. DEAR SIR: Replying to your letter of the loth instant, we have looked through our books to find some record of the purchase to which you refer, but find nothing of the kind. From this we presume it was a cash purchase, in which case, in accord- ance with our custom, the sales slip was inclosed with the goods, and it would be necessary for you to send us the slip to locate the purchase. Mr. William A. Hopkins, East Saginaw, Mich. DEAR SIR: I send you herewith a blank form of report, which I wish made out by you in full and sent to the superintendent's office daily. You will note the word "time" at the bottom of the page, and a place to mark the time when you send this to the superintendent's office. Also the time it is received there. This is done to insure prompt delivery. We have had several complaints of late of cars not getting around on time, and hope in this way to avoid it in future. (loth day.) THURSDAY, JUNE i 3 th, 1879. Miss Dora Weir, 5918 Hanlon St., Baltimore, Md. DEAR Miss: In further reply to yours of the 3oth ultimo, in reference to the third installment, we have written to Mr. Evans, and he acknowledges that you paid him. The contract which we hold from you makes the installments payable at this office, and we do not want you to make any further payments to anyone outside of this office, as we will not be responsible for remittances made to other parties than ourselves. Hoping there will be no future misunderstanding, we are, Yours truly. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 149 ..[..... ^^ q QV ""^> / ... _ ...6...(n \^> L \~? . r *^o -* r i 5 o HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. The George J. Grimm Co., Glendale, Miss. GENTLEMEN: Replying to your favor of recent date, we beg to say that we do not object to signing the contract sent us, provided you will except the clause which states that: "We have not sold/' etc., as we are free to admit that during the present year we have in numerous instances given our best discounts to parties buying in smaller quantities than one gross. Hence, it will, in this case, be necessary to apply the old adage, " Let bygones," etc. Very respectfully. (nth day.) FRIDAY, JULY i 4 th, 1880. Drs. Q. 6 E. Venner, 59 Paternoster Row, London, E. C., England. DEAR SIRS: I have sent you by to-day's mail an electrotype of the inclosed copy of advertisement, which please insert in your paper for one month as per your quotations of recent date, for which I inclose check. Please, by return mail, give me rates of one year's insertion of this cut, upon receipt of which, if satisfactory, I will send you contract for one year's insertion instead of one month. Awaiting your reply, we are, Most faithfully yours. M. Zab risky 6- Co., Dallas, N. C. GENTLEMEN: We have your note of the i3th inst. Our experience in sending out goods by express without prepayment. has been unfortunate. In so many instances they are returned to us and we are compelled to pay express charges both ways that it makes the business as a whole unprofitable, and we have abandoned it. If goods are not as represented by us, we are always willing to exchange them and make them right, but we must insist on payment in advance, particularly where these goods are to be taken from a piece and the value of them very much diminished by doing so. Respectfully yours. (i2thday.) SATURDAY, JULY i5th, 1881. The Patent Ramrod Mfg. Co., Montgomery City, Mo. GENTLEMEN: Absence in Philadelphia has prevented an earlier reply to your favor of the first of May, received at Chicago a few days after I had started for Philadelphia. I shall be pleased to form the Acquaintance of your manager when he arrives in Chicago, and to discuss arrangements and hear what you may have to say additional on the subject stated in my former letter. Whether I can make any arrangements in reference to your ramrod machinery or not, you are at liberty to use any portion of my letter as a testimonial that you may care to. Messrs. W.& V O. Tcttler, Jacksonville, Or. GENTLEMEN: Yours of the i3th inst. received and noted. \Vc; ~:ave made all entries to bring our ledger to conform to yours. In regard to the HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. I \ r V, I A ...TC^'.N .^o .../... \ 6 c 152 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. two accounts of Johnson & Co. and F. C. Duvall we are not quite clear. The Johnson & Co. error must have occurred in April, and was carried forward into next month's balance sheet. As it appears to be an error in posting, we yet fail to see how you could fetch the May balance. Please itemize these errors and the counter errors of 14 cents. Your early attention will oblige. (i3th day.) MONDAY, AUGUST soth, 1882. Mr. F. Cecil, Maysville, Grant Co., W. Va. DEAR SIR; I gave Haas & Co. an order to-day for linen as per inclosed list. You will also perceive I bought sheeting from them. We compared samples with those you sent, and thought their's the better. If you know of any lower prices at which any of these numbers have been sold, try and get ours just as low. Stir Bernard Ulman people up about our goods. We need everything ordered badly. Ship by express. Let me know Berner's price for plaid cottons, 29 to 30 inch widths. I buy here at 8^. I want a case of one style they have if I can secure it. Messrs. P. Elverson 6 Nephew, Lock Box R, Montreal, Canada. GENTLEMEN: Acknowledging your favor of the i6th, which nas just come to hand on account of its having been directed to Chattanooga, would say that we would be pleased to quote you on sash-weights in 5,000 or 10,000 pound lots at $19.50 per ton, F. O. B. here; in carload lots 'of 15,000 pounds, $19, F. O. B. here. We make a large variety of weights in sizes, and those with a handsome and perfect eye. We have sold quite a good many in your territory, and would be pleased to fill your orders for such a quantity as you may desire. . Hoping to hear favorably from you at an early date, we remain, Respectfully. (i4th day.) TUESDAY, SEPTEMBER 2ist, 1883. C. Naylor, Esq., Box 49, Salt Lake City, Utah. DEAR SIR: Yours at hand. Early, in the week values of pig lead here were weaker, and sales were made at 3.75. Latterly there is a firmer feeling; 3.80 is freely bid, with 3.85, 3.87^, 3.90 asked. The amount of lead offering is very small, and it would not surprise us to see higher values rather than lower. Lead at London still continues strong, and since our last circular a rise of ;i per ton is recorded. There is no question now but what lead is in strong hands and \$ will be reached before a halt takes place. The general impression is that lead, with other metals, is good property. Messrs. L. Ulberman 6 Sons, Oil City, Penn. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter of the igth in which you state that you can not allow 8 per cent, discount, and ask us to remit what you call a balance of three dollars and nine cents ($3.09) on our bills of August igth and 2ist, duplicates of which you have sent us. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. '53 % -o/7\^ _~\- ) I .Zr. of ~> T '-** H , \ ""(""C"i>' C ^ j\^ <. k i I r\ *-^ v^ x k* 1 -^^ I V - ?0 *^V 154 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. The terms of the above bills are written thereon seven off, ten, sixty days dating. The extra i per cent, charges in your statement is for the sixty days' interest for prepayment. If you are not willing to allow interest at the rate of 6 per cent, per annum for prepayment of post dated bills, please advise us, and hereafter we will not remit until maturity of bill. (i5th day.) WEDNESDAY, OCTOBER 22 d, 1884. Mr. X. Idler, Hortonsville, Wis. DEAR SIR: I received a letter this morning inclosing a remittance with the above name signed and the town of Hortonsville, but no State named, and the envelope was marked so poorly by the postmaster, from whose office the letter was sent, that I could not get the State name from that source. I find, however, there is a town named Hortonsville in Wisconsin, and I therefore send to that town the article desired. If it should happen to reach you, please remember in the future not only to write your name plainly to every communication you send out, but be sure always to give your address in full, including State and county, especially when you send money. This precau- tion will save you and others considerable inconvenience. JV. Smith, Esq., Fargo, Dak. DEAR SIR: The popularity of our Impervious Packages has induced others to offer for sale packages represented to be the same as ours. All Impervious Packages made by us are fully protected by U. S patents, of which we are sole owners, and are the only Wood Packages that can be so prepared as to be impervious to oil without infringing on our patents. In all cases of infringements, dealers, users, and manufacturers are alike liable under the law. Therefore, for your own protection, we respect- fully caution you against all Impervious Packages represented to be the same as ours; also against infringements on any of our patents. See that all Impervious Packages offered you are made by the Impervious Package Co., and bear their name. All others are imitations or infringe- ments. (i6th day.) THURSDAY, NOVEMBER 23d, 1885. Messrs Z. I . Gypson 6 Co., Box S, Melbourne, Australia. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter dated November iQth acknowledging )ur remittance of $32.87 in settlement of bill of September 2d, signed ' Z. I. Gypson & Co., per Snyder," and in Snyder's hand-writing the following : "Gentlemen: You took off more discount than we allow for extra dating. After this please take off at the rate of 6 per cent, per annum." The terms of payment endorsed upon the above bill are as follows: ' 7 off 10 after Nov. ist." This made the bill due Nov. nth. You had the money in your hands on the 23d of September. Deduct Sept. 23 from Nov. n leaves 49 days. The face of the invoice is $35.63. Seven per cent, discount from $35.63 leaves $33.13^. The interest on $33.13^ for 49 days at 6 per cent, per annum is a fraction over 25 cents. We remitted you $32.87. Respectfully. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. '35 V t , V" * ...v> r - 156 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Rev. D. E. Yorick, El Paso, Texas. DEAR SIR: Inclosed you will find a postal-card which I have received and sent circulars to. At the same time I wrote to the party giving your name as my Texas agent. It would probably be best for you to write to, or call upon him and see if you cannot obtain his order. He should at least have a set of your circulars. Have you got the copy ready yet for the special circular you were think- ing of getting out? You may have it printed in your town, but be sure to send us a few copies of it, that we may keep track of what is being done in Texas, and place same on file. We think you are making a mistake in making special use of the No. o circular in preference to the No. 453, but as you are on the ground and get a better chance to feel the pulse of the business portion of your State than we do, we suppose you are in a position to know best. Let us have your weekly reports promptly, and oblige. (iyth day.) FRIDAY, DECEMBER 3 oth, 1886. Misses K. <5j L. Armour, Marion C. H. y S. C. MESDAMES: We have the inclosed statement in which you request us to " kindly note terms on invoice." You will observe by the duplicate invoice which we inclose that these goods were bought 2 off 10, as of Oct. 15, making the bill due Oct. 25. We remitted for the goods Sept. 23, deducting the 2 per cent, commission, and a ^ of i per cent, for interest for the thirty days. Would it not be a better plan for you to note on the page of your ledger on which our account is inscribed the terms upon which you sell us our respective bills, and thereby save us the trouble and annoyance of looking up these matters, only to find that they are settled correctly ? In looking up this bill, however, we find that there was a charge of $1.80 for packing-cases which was overlooked by us and not deducted from the bill. This amount we charge back to you and will deduct from the next purchase. Respectfully yours. G. U. Kline, Esq., Mt. Holly, N. J. DEAR SIR: We have your letter of the 29th, and note contents. We regret the occurrence as much as you do. We wanted the goods as ordered because they were cheap, and our trade needs them at the present time. It is, however, one of the invariable rules of the house, from which we never depart under any circumstance whatever, to reject every shipment of goods that is not fairly within the order, and particularly where there is any attempt to force upon us a greater quantity of goods than we ordered. In this case there were nearly twice as many goods sent us as we ordered from your Mr. Bach, and a line of goods which under no circum- stances do we want. We do not know where the fault lies, whether it was in Mr. Bach pre- suming that if you sent the goods we would keep them, or not. Next time you have any dealings with us you will understand better, and know that it is no use to send us goods we do not order. In fcct it is worse than useless, as it defeats the sale of the goods we did order, which we return with the others on principle. Respectfully. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 1 S7 f,Vr_> ""* f"\' ...- '"j"' ^| " i 9 C~" C^<-M % ^^ >-^ \ o<. . .. n c I ivTTv ..[ I.. ' J I \ W V ~> \ TO V I O ^ ~ \_ \fS ^~O~~ "^-s '^' ; V '" "1" S" 3- -L. ^.^ .V^^x.r 7 O d * *^*\ /** jv W '" """ >. * | -. -*(, 158 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. (i8th day.) SATURDAY, DECEMBER 3 ist, 1890. Mr. Y. Otter ly, Jr., 9314 Broadway 'Veiv York City. DEAR SIR : We have your letter of the 28th and note contents. It would be a useless bother "" i trouble for us to keep a bank account in New York. If New York mercrutits would rather have checks on New York in payment of our bills, it would be much easier for us to send them the drafts of our bank here on New York for payment of their bills. We send our own check as a matter of convenience, and it is all nonsense for people in New York to claim that our checks on our bank here are not current in New York, or that they have to wait until payment of those checks before the amounts are passed to their credit. There has not been an hour since the firm of Jones, Doyle & Co. com- menced business that exchange on New York has not been from ten to fifty cents on the thousand dollars discount at our banks here in Chicago, and when the merchants with whom we deal tell you that a bank in New York will refuse to take a check from Chicago on deposit, which is worth from one-tenth to one-half per cent, premium in New York funds, it is simply absurd. When you take into consideration that every bill of this firm is settled every Monday morning, averaging less than four days from the time the goods are received, it ought to be a satisfactory method of dealing to the merchants in New York, and if not, we can manage to buy in Chicago. Mr. S. Quarterman, Montpelier, Vt. DEAR SIR : Your favor of the z6th instant at hand; also the news- paper. The article is partially correct. This company has increased its- capital stock to $725,000, and bought out the Salt Lake City and San Fran- cisco owners of the mine. The writer's interest was merged into the present company, who now own and control the mine. The company is composed of St. Louis, Akron and Hamburg, Ger- many, stockholders. Up to the time of purchase, this company was simply the selling agent. Col. Conger, Thomas Welch, Judge Grant, and C. P. Cobbs are of the members of this company at Akron. We have no idea of forming a trust, but expect to run our business independently from any other similar concern. We have been doing considerable exporting, but expect to push it still more. Egyptian Asphaltum, here as well as abroad, has declined in conse- quence to six and one-half cents per pound, and in isolated cases, even a trifle lower. We have also made practical tests lately in the way of paving, which have, so far, in all cases proved a glorious success. The price of the mine is $111,000; the size of the fissure as stated is substantially correct. It is five and one-half feet wide, but tapers gently at both ends. It can be worked for eleven thousand feet, for it has been opened at that distance. The deposit is in a true fissure-vein, consequently it will prob- ably not be known in our life-time how deep it runs. So far the fissure is vertical, without any indications of the dip. Very truly. HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. '59 v_x L_ )x. e/vv^V ^ ~ / \ \r "^ ^ ir..v. \. S ^J-^ -" ip 160 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. ACTUAL COURT CASES. A great many young shorthand writers hesitate to enter the field of law reporting, and even to accept an occasional case when offered them, for fear their lack of knowledge of law forms will prevent them from producing a transcription satisfactory in form, and they also some- times hesitate because they fear they will not know how to proceed up- on entering the court room. The ranks of the court reporters are, therefore, because of this fear, mostly made up of young people who first assist an experienced law reporter, or they come from the army of young clerks who are em- ployed in law offices as amanuenses or law students. This latter class become familiar with court proceedings through their office connec- tions, and what is simple to them in legal proceedings is often a matter of a great deal of mystery to the ordinary aspirant for legal phonogra- phic honors. As the author of this work had to struggle against this fear, he has thought it worth while to explain away in this book all the supposed difficulties, so that a student of this book will know exactly, in his very first case, how to correctly proceed without ever having seen a court room or a legal form. Prefatorily speaking, these things are all a matter of common sense scarcely more and there is just as much difference of opinion among lawyers in regard to style in transcription, and just as many de- grees of ignorance among them as in any other vocation, from brick- laying up. Therefore, when an inexperienced stenographer is asked if he will report a case.the re is no need of his refusing, if he has the speed and the time at his disposal. If he can write 120 words a minute from new miscellaneous matter, he can report in full ninety-nine cases out of a hundred occuring in any court. The difficulties of court reporting are greatly magnified. It is very often easier than some office short- hand work. With this necessary preparation, therefore, he can confidently accept the case, and, having ascertained date, hour and place where the trial is to be held, and the name of the case, he needs no more informa tion until the day set for the trial or hearing. On that date, unless he is to accompany the lawyer from the latter's office, he should be on hand a few minutes before the time set for calling the case. The court and counsel are seldom on time themselves, but the new reporter had better be, and the later the others are, the more time the new reporter will have to become accustomed to his surroundings. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. lt>I THE REPORTING. Having entered on time, the reporter should, if the trial is to be lei ' in a court room, take his place at one of the tables within the enclo- ure, as near in front of the judge's desk as possible, just under it in fac f unless that is reserved for some officer or clerk, etc., and, as soon as th'- lawyer who has hired him, enters, he should ascertain from that lawyer if possible, the names of the different counsel who are to be employed on that case, as well as the exact and full title of that case. Such a re- quest is no evidence of a lack of knowledge of law proceedings, but wil< rather be considered by the lawyer as an evidence of your desire to please him by wording the title after his preferred style, if he has any, and by it you will learn a proper legal form, which will enable you to, although ignorant of all legal forms, gain that much knowledge. We present such a form on page 174, of which we will speak later. Do not hesitate to ask any questions of this kind, putting them, if you prefer, in a way that will convey the impression that you simply want to please, not that you need the information, although, as a matter of fact, a wise man never fears to ask for information. You should be sure to obtain the name of the judge, the name of the court, the number cf the case, the" term of court, the names of plaintiff or plaintiffs, defendant or defendants, parties which -have at times different titles. For instance: The plaintiff may be the Common wealth or may be called The People, or, in probate cases, the contestant or contestants; while, incases of appeal, the party appealing is called the complainant or appellant, in which latter case, the other side would represent the appellee. These are terms which will be more readily understood at the time of a trial, than here. In criminal cases, you must also get the name and address of every juror, as they must necessarily be given in the title to your transcription. All this information should be obtained, if possible, before the case is on, though some of it may be gotten at intervals, or directly after the case, but it must be had before a correct transcription can be made, and the name of the counsel, or any person taking part in the case, must be known before they speak in the case, else you will not be able to write their names in your note book properly before their remarks, which must be done. Your lawyer can best give you the information, ex- cepting the names of the jurors, which you should get as they are chosen in your presence or afterwards of the clerk or from the court records Having obtained as much information regarding title of case, etc.. as can be obtained before the case comes up; then, by sitting no tarther 162 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHS. removed from your lawyer than possible, you can ask him to point out those different individuals whom he knows about to take part, at least the lawyers engaged in the case, and then you should observe them closely, note their different intonation of voice, their location at the tables, and anything else that will serve to fix their voices and person- alities in your memory, so that, when one asks or says anything, during the progress of the case, even though you may be looking at your notes, you will know who is speaking, and get his name properly before his remarks in your note book, for you cannot depend upon your memory to put a name down afterwards, and there are sometimes a great many interruptions in a case, one lawyer often interfering during the examina- tion of a witness by another, and you will have to know in an instant who is speaking, so that the transcription will present it properly. When the witness takes the stand, you must be sure to catch his name properly, and the spelling of it as well, bearing in mind that you have some rights in that court room as well as other people: that you are there for business and your business is to make a correct report, to which end the judge, counsel, and witnesses must lend their aid. There- fore, no matter if everybody else understands who the witness is, that does not preclude you from asking for information, if you do not your- self understand whom he or she is, and you must ask the witness either to speak louder in pronouncing his or her name or to spell it for you, or both, as may be -necessary. You have a right to know these things, and should not permit any false modesty to keep you from obtaining the information, when needed, though, as a rule, what the lawyers hear you can. When a witness is called, his name is generally spoken by the counsel or crier, but after he is sworn, he is also asked his name, so, while you may not get it when he is b3ing first called, you will hav^ this second opportunity (when he takes the stand) to get his name, but you must get it then in full, and perfectly, as well as any other answer of his which is given during the course of the trial. You must hear all evidence, and if you do not hear it distinctly, any portion of it, either question or answer, you have a right to ask for its repetition, and if you are going to do justice to the person who employes you, it" is your duty to do this. It does not matter how many official stenographers are present, they will not help you, and, sometimes they may take pleasure in doing just the reverse. Many of them cannot make a verbatim re- port holding their places by political influence solely, and possibly could not help you, as many cases the court does not require to be HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 163 transcribed, even though your employer may desire a transcription. In any case, you should conduct yourself as if it all depended on you. No matter how unskillful other reporters may be, you should aim to make an absolutely verbatim report. Just here it is well to state, though perhaps rather disappointing for those aspirants to know who have a high idea of the profession, that there are very few strictly verbatim shorthand reporters in the world, either in courts, conventions or legislative assemblies, notwithstanding the large number that are supposed to be so. The author has, in courts, conventions, and legislative assemblies, sat beside many experienced shorthand writers, with world-wide reputations, writing all the popular systems, and, following their pencils with his eyes, has never yet seen one of them make a verbatim report where great speed was necessary, while he has seen them omit words frequently and sometimes entire sentences, which they could not get, they depending on the impossibility of any one detecting the omissions in their tran- scription; because even a writer, much less a speaker, can not re- member ail the words he or she uses, and hence would seldom discover in omission. Those professionals themselves laughed at these things, when the author pointed out the discrepancies in their notes, for it is such a common matter, and systems are generally so faulty, that many members of the profession have lost all faith in a sufficiently rapid system of shorthand to meet all emergencies. This was, however, always a matter of serious concern to the au- thor, and it is to these known deficiencies in all other systems, even in the hands of the greatest stenographers of the age, that HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY, with its possible speed of over 300 words a minute, greater than any ordinary rapidity of human utterance, owes its existence, presenting the only system of shorthand available for every purpose and every occasion, and with the legibility of print if correctly written. As an illustration of how defective are all other systems of short- hand, and how impotent many of the supposed-to-be best reporters of the country are, where great speed is required, there happened, in a cer- tain important case, in a certain city, to be employed three long experi- enced reporters, whose reputations were national in character, the supposition being that they had no superiors whatever in their profes- sion. Their experience extended over thirty years in each case; two of them had been legislative reporters for much of that time, one in Congress and another as orHciai reporter for a certain state legislature; i<54 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. while each were long practiced in courts and had possibly covered every field of work in their time. They presented in themselves the highest possibilities of the Pitman, Munson and Graham systems, and each happened to be hired by different parties to the suit in ques- tion. One was, and had been for years, the official shorthand reporter of the court in which the case in point was tried, and of course was re- porting for the court at the time. The other two were respectively en- gaged by the plaintiff and defendant, neither of whom cared to rely on any stenographer not solely employed for that occasion by them- selves, so important was the case. None of the lawyers doubted the skill of either of the stenographers, for there were no better known, but they each desired to run no chances of treachery they preferred to possess their own transcription. Unfortunately for those stenographers whose weak points were thus discovered, the lawyers of one side were not satisfied with the de- cision of the court, the case was appealed, and the testimony there- fore ordered written up, it being done in this case separately by each. So much was at stake in this case that the lawyers studied their tran- scriptions very carefully, and each side, in their briefs, quoted from their separate transcriptions such entirely conflicting statements of witnesses, that the judge ordered a comparison of the three separate reports to be made, resulting in the discovery that no two of them were alike in every particular; each had made many omissions of a different nature, and in some instances what should have been the same para- graphs were astonishingly varying. The three separate transcriptions of the noted and expensive stenographers could not even be dove- tailed to make a complete report, and the case had to be re-tried. This is no exaggeration, but an unfortunately true illustration of the condition of nine-tenths of the most skillful members of the steno- graphic profession today, a condition which only the universal adoption of this PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY can change. In other words, there are very few verbatim reports made with the crude systems of shorthand that are in use. The ordinary official court stenographer depends too much on the fact that the testimony is generally too bulky for anybody to wade through it sufficiently closely to discover omis- sions, and that most witnesses cannot remember all they have said. Furthermore, that it often does not make any difference unless the case is appealed, for otherwise the evidence is not written out. But this course will not do for the stenographer with a reputation to make, and though others have shortcomings, the ambitious should not indulge HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. l6$ in such false security, but should be pains-taking and see that an exactly verbatim report is made. Questions and answers should be clearly shown in the reporter's notes, the names of the questioners being written outside the perpen- dicular marginal lines of the note-book paper written on, as shown in our shorthand court pages; the question following it, and the an- swer commenced a good distance from the question, the writer not permitting any answer to run back over one-half the distance of the paper, no matter how many lines it would require. When a lawyer's name is written once to a question it need not be written again, while he is questioning, but when another person interrupts him, then the name of the party interrupting, whether court or counse 1 , should be shown in the margin, and then before every interruption made or when- ever a new person speaks, that person's name must be written before his remarks, but need not be written again unless an interruption occurs If you write the name of the case and other particulars in short- hand on your book or paper, before commencement of the case, you can write it almost anywhere commencing with the margin as shown in our shorthand plates, but when such information is written out in trans- cribed form, observe the forms shown in our type pages opposite our shorthand plates. Objections can be taken in full or not, as you prefer, and should be written so that they will not interfere with testimony; only remem- ber it is not necessary to transcribe such matter, literally for simply the words "Objected to" and 'Objection overruled" or "Objection sus- tained" as the case may be, are generally sufficient. The first witness put on the stand, in any case, is always the wit- ness for the plaintiff, and that witness belongs to the lawyer or lawyers conducting the plaintiff's side, or the prosecution, as the case may be; hence, the questions asked by that lawyer of that witness, are known as Direct Examination or Examination-in-Chief and so with any witness, whether for one side of the case or the other, the lawyer who placed the witness on the stand is the one who conducts the "Direct Examina- tion." In other words, the Direct Examination or the Examination-in- Chief of any witness is always those questions asked by the lawyer who places him on the stand, and for the side he is testifying; so that, in any transcription, the Direct Examination comes first after any witness' name. It is the opposing lawyer always who conducts the Cross-Ex- amination, and if the lawyer takes his own witness again and asks fur- ther questions, then that is Re-Direct-Examination; and when the 166 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. opposing counsel after this asks other questions, that is Re-Cross-Ex- amination. Further questions by the lawyer whose witness is on the stand, would be "Re-Re-Direct," and in the same way further questions by the opposing counsel would be "Re-Re-Cross-Examination, but it is very seldom that any witness goes beyond Re-Direct or Re-Cross-Ex- ami-nation.. When a lawyer simply makes an interruption, of one or two ques- tions, they are not put under a separate head in the examination, but are simply shown where they occur, as on pages 183 and 185 in this book. The case of the plaintiff is generally headed Testimony for the Plaintiff, or for the State, or for the Prosecution, or for the Appellant, or for the Contestant, according to the sort of case. When that side of the case is all presented, the lawyer for the plaintiff either states that their evidence is closed, or else, which is more likely, they say, "We rest," in which case the plaintiff implies that their case is done for the present. The evidence for the other side the defense then begins, and at the end of their case they may state that they rest their case. If the lawyer for the plaintiff thinks they have made a good case, or, have no more witnesses, it generally ends there, and the arguments begin; but, if a plaintiff desires to present additional testi- mony, then that part of the case is called the Rebuttal and must be so headed; and, if the other side then desires to combat this Rebuttal evidence by further testimony, that testimony in defense is called Sur Rebuttal. When the evidence is all in, the words "Case Closed," should be written at the end of the report. In that case the arguments of counsel begin, which need not be reported unless the counsel agree to pay you for same, because argument is not evidence and it is only evidence and the decision of the court that counts in a case at law. The judge's charge, however, if he has not got it written out, should be taken verbatim, or, if having it written, he makes any verbal remarks in connection with it, they must be taken verbatim, but any portion he reads from manuscript, either part or all, need not be taken. THE TRANSCRIPTION. The first thing to be done in making a transcription of evidence, is to make a heading of the form of those shown in the printed pages through- out the court cases in this department of the book, the parties to the suit being stated at the upper left hand corner of the first sheet, but not too near top say at a distance of about two inches from the top of the HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 167 legal cap sheet, commencing the name of the court opposite it, be- ginning in the middle of the line; on the next line, the judge's name and the case number; then, just as you would commence a letter, write the name of town, state and date on the next line. Near the beginning of the left hand side of the sheet, name the appearances, (that is, the l;i\vvers of each side of the case) on separate lines; then you should make in the center of a line the words "Testimony for Plaintiff" as on page 175, or "for Commonwealth," according to the sort of case, and next line to that, flush with left-hand side of page, state the first wit- ness' name, with the customary words "being duly sworn, testified as follows" or words to that effect, as shown in the different instances of these court cases; then, on the next line, centre a heading entitled Direct Examination or Examination-in-Chief, and on next line flush, the name of the lawyer conducting that examination, and on the next and other lines after that, commence questions and answers a little in from the left-hand end of the lines, each question and answer on a separ- ate paragraph, as in our printed pages, 176 to 220; or the answers in the same paragraph as the question, as on page 1/5, if you so prefer. But you will find there is more money in making separate paragraphs, for both questions and answers, and, if the transcription is made in type- writing, which should be the case, make the lines wide spaced, if pos- sible, for when done by the folio, a legal cap sheet, whether wide or narrow spaced, is counted as 2}^ folios, each folio being supposed to contain a hundred words, the page itself being counted as 250 words, whether wide or narrow spaced, so there is no need of writing it narrow. The laws of different states vary in regard to the legal rate for law reporting, and some states have no law at all on this subject. The general price, however, is twenty to twenty-five cents a folio for a com- plete ordinary transcription, which would be from fifty to sixty-two cents a page. In such instances, a reporter is not expected to charge anything for attendance in court, except at a session where there is no evidence taken at all, or nothing to write out, in which case a good re- porter charges ten dollars a day for such attendance, or five dollars for half day, unless the rate is set by law. Sometimes a contract is made with separate provision for time and transcription that is, five to ten dollars per diem for attendance and ten cents a hundred words, or twenty-five cents a legal cap page, for transcription; the net payment being about the same as 25 cents a folio with no charge for attendance. This is where one copy only is furnished. Where additional copie s oi the testimony are desired, and the request for them is made to the 168 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. reporter before he commences to write out tha case, he is expected to charge five cents a page for each carbon duplicate copy made at the same time that he makes the original copy; but, if an order is given after, and an original duplicate is requested, the price for an original duplicate is generally ten cents a legal cap page. The regular price used to be ten and five cents per folio for duplicates; but, at present, owing to the existence of numerous typewriting copying offices, carbon duplicates have been reduced to that price per page. In making your first page of transcription.be sure to skip a line be- fore the date, also between the date and the appearances, between the appearances and the heading Testimony for Plaintiff, between that heading and the first witness' name, and between the latter and the words Direct Examination, as shown in the type-written example on page 175, and, if you are writing on legal cap paper that has a double line at the left hand margin, such as is seen in our court shorthand plates, let all your writing be placed to the right of that double line; but, if you are writing on a paper with no such ruled margin, you can write the regular width of the machine, starting all questions or other new para- graphs five typewriter spaces (about half an inch) to the right. Always leave, on all pages, a space about two inches from the top of the sheet, so that when the pages are bound at the top, which is the case with legal cap paper, no writing will be covered. This will also give you an opportunity to render a bill for a larger number of pages than would otherwise be the case. Number every page at bottom. Whenever there is a break in the testimony, such as shovvn by the interruption in illustration on page 176, skip a line, whether it be to state an objection or to show an interruption of any kind. Place "Objected to" and similar descriptive words, on lines by themselves, preceded and followed by spacing, in the same way as the instances shown through- out the cases in this book. Always skip a line before a new heading, such as "Cross Examination," etc. On the second or subsequent day of a trial, it is not necessary to write a new -heading on first page of the case. See page 200. It is best to skip two or three lines preceding the introduction of the testimony of a new witness, if it is put on same page as another's, and so with such portions of the case as "Rebuttal" or "Sur-Rebuttal;" but, if these would occur below the center of the page, it is best to commence them on a new page. The opening of the defense should always be commenced on a new page and generally, though not always, the Charge of the Court. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 169 After all this testimony is transcribed, then you want to prepare a full title page, an index of the evidence, if there are several witnesses, and make a backer for the case, or for each different day of the case, if it be a long one. There are illustrated such a title page and index to evidence, as well as a couple of backers, on pages 172 to 174, of this portion of the book. The title and index are sometimes placed on one sheet, but if the index be very long, the title may be put alone on a page and the index on the next or as many other pages as may be necessary, though such index should be on the same kind of paper as the testimony; the name of the court, date and term being at the top, when the title and index are on the same page. Put the date at the bottom of the page, when the title is alone on the page, the name of the case being in brackets at the left hand center near top and, under that, the appearances, or not, as the case may be; and when the title is thu s alone on a page, other little particulars may be added at option, and, if it is a criminal case, the names of the jurors. The index, whether it is placed on the title page or not, follows the title and contains columns for the witnesses' names, and for the placing of the page number whereon will be found the Direct Examination, Cross Examination, Re-direct Examination, and Re-Cross Examination, in case the testimony should go that far), of each witness. Where there is a Rebuttal, the Rebuttal follows further down on the regular index, and if the same witness shall have testified both in the general case and in the Rebuttal, that witness' name would appear in both places, and in Sur-Rebuttal, still further down, if he should be there called. See illustration on page 174. To keep the transcript of evidence clean and intact, heavy stiff board backers, generally colored, are used, which may be obtained of any stationer or of a type-vyriter agency, for cases which are so large that they cannot be folded, in which case the title page which we have described must be duplicated on that front board cover, and sometimes where the index to the testimony is short, that is also included on that cover. This may be written with a type-writer or engrossed with a pen but some reporters with a great deal of work have blanks printed which they fill out to suit the case. This, however, is not necessary. When the case is small enough to allow the testimony to be folded and filed away like deeds and other legal documents, then the backing is made on heavy colored paper, and a brief description of the title only given, as in Figure 2 of the two backers shown on page 172. When the title page is thus abbreviated it must only be when the full title page is HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. written on the first white sheet within the cover, according to preceding general directions and illustration on pages 173 and 174. Hearings in chambers or before Masters in Chancery, depositions, etc., should be treated, as far as evidence is concerned, precisely as a case in court, with the exception of the omissions of Plaintiff and Defendant headings, as here such testimony is ex parte, and, therefore we do not need any such words as Testimony for Plaintiff to be shown on the transcription, the deposition or evidence simply starting with the witness' name, if there be more than one witness, and, if only one, then simply starting off something as follows: "In answer to interrogatories) the witness deposed and stated as follows;" then, on next line "Direct Examination," and on line after that "By Mr. ," after which follows the questions and answers, as in a regular case; and, when any papers are introduced as evidence, either in these cases or in court, such papers are marked for identification, either by the judge, one of the lawyers, or the court reporter such marks being "Exhibit i" or "2" or "3,'* as the case may be, sometimes naming the lawyer who introduced them, as "Exhibit I, Eastman," meaning the first exhibit of Mr. East- man. Often, instead of figures, letters are used, such as "Exhibit A" or "Exhibit B," etc. When such documents are handed to the reporter for marking, the reporter should mark across the back of them, some- what like this: "Exhibit i" or "2," "A" or <; B" Eastman, then the date in figures like: "I, 19, 92," followed by the reporter's own name, and sometimes, the case name in brief, like: N. Y. C. R. R. Co. vs. Patrick Henry. As soon as a witness has made such a deposition in chambers, the reporter should hand his note book to the witness, and get the witness to sign that testimony, which act signifies the termination of it, and is an endorsement to the evidence given. This is not done in court. By attentive notice of the variations in the Actual Court Cases and illustrations of them, presented in this part of our book, any in- telligent phonographer can make a correct transcription, title page, and backer, for any case that can occur any where; for he or she should bear in mind that while the particulars named are necessary to be in- cluded in such transcript, still it is a fact that there are a great many differences of opinion and preferences regarding style among lawyers. and even if you should arrange these matters somewhat differently from what the lawyer you are working for, would arrange them, re- member you are just as apt to do it better than he can by giving your own ideas of originality a chance, and are more apt to produce this HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. irr sfifect, than you are to displease mm for, as a rule, lawyers know more about points of law than they do tnese little particulars just mentioned, which they generally leave to their clerks and take very little notice of, as long as it gives the information, and unless it be better done than they ever saw it done before, which is -most likely to be the case, if you will follow the directions given in this book, improving on them where you can, for most reporters and law clerks are sadly deficient in these respects, a fact which was particularly shown at the time of the first introduction of the type-writing machine, which opened up a field for the making of neat transcripts unthought of before. These title pages, both inner and outer, and the index, may be ornamented with double lines and red ink ruling, if the reporter has an eye for ornament, although these matters are more adapted to the make-up of deeds, mortgages, and other legal documents for which a big price is paid and a little extra time expended upon. While we are about it, we might as well add that many lawyers are as poorly posted on the making of legal forms as they are on proper sort of transcriptions, and if they have a well posted clerk, rely on him for this minutia, or else consult Corbin's Book of Forms, which contains all legal farms and is as necessary to a lawyer as a dictionary is to an editor, and can be bought by -any one, so that the shorthand writer who desires to post himself on legal forms, can purchase and possess in that book an unimpeachable authority. When he purchases that book, which can be done from any publisher of law books, he will have, in one publication, more and better information than any lawyer has time to or can give him. Some reporters profess to beneve in the advisability of editing their court transcripts. To this : he author would say, that such a mode of treating court notes is not only inadvisable but highly im- proper, and excusable only in a reporter who is notable to take all the testimony. It matters not how ungrammatical either witnesses, lawyers or judges, talk, the stenographer has no right to change the wording; neither has he a right to omit unimportant or superfluous words, such as the words "well," "now," or other words with which some lawyers begin their questions. It does not matter how bad the English is, the duty of the reporter who uses shorthand is to make a verbatim report, and if he omits those unimportant words, the fact of the omission casts suspicion on the en- tire transcription, while the attempt to edit in any other way, may have the effect of interfering with the course of iustice, and, in a crim- 172 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. inal case, a man's life may hang on the turn of a word, while, in all cases of appeal, where the decision for a new trial rests on the trans- cription, the change in wording may work a great injustice to either party. The shorthand writer, therefore, in the opinion of the author, has no right to play the editor with his transcripts, as it is his business solely to furnish a complete record of the proceedings, in the exact language used in evidence, irrespective of grammar or rhetoric. The attorney will dictate the title page that he desires for these hear- ings, so that should be taken verbatim, but in case the attorney forget s to start a hearing in chambers in this way, the reporter should ask for the title, before the witness is examined, take it down, and produce it verbatim, as shown on page 173. Abbreviation for a title of a folded backer of a deposition is shown by Figure I below. Figure 2 is an abbreviated form for title on folded backer of a regular case. Change to suit the case. FIGURE I. IN CHANCERY. CIRCUIT COURT, COOK CO. "_" . ,. _ ^ _ _ _ _ , THE CRANDALLE COMPANY vs. THE WEST LEXINGTON RAILWAY CO. THE WEST PULLMAN CITY RY. CO. Et al. BILL AND SUPPLEMENTAL BILL. oo SUPPLEMENTAL BILL. Deposit Ion of RANDALL S. PARKINS, ESQ., April 6, 1883. FIGURE 2. STATE OF ILLINOIS. COUNTY OF COOK. UNITED STATES vs. MILLMANN, ET AL. In the UNITED STATES DISTRICT COURT for the NORTHERN DISTRICT OF ILLINOIS. oo December 3d, 1874. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 173 IN CHANCERY. THE CRANDALLE COMPANY vs. THE WEST LEXINGTON RAILWAY CO., THE WEST PULLMAN CITY RAILWAY CO. Et al. CIRCUIT COURT, GOOK COUNTY, ILL, BILL AND SUPPLEMENTAL BILL of the CRANDALLE COMPANY vs. THE WEST PULLMAN CITY' RAILWAY CO. ET AL. oo SUPPLEMENTAL BILL. DEPOSITION of RANDAL S. PARKINS, a witness produced, sworn and examined in behalf of the Complainant in the Supplemental Bill, in pursuance of a notice hereunto attached, said deposition to be used upon the trial of said cause and supplemental cause. Said deposition taken at the office of said witness, 73 Jack st., Chicago, April 6, 1883, at 11.20 a.m. PRESENT : James Ironwork, Esq., Solicitor for the Complainant. W. A. March, Esq.. Counsel for Defendants. 174 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. IN THE DISTRICT COURT OF THE UNITED STATES FOR THE NORTHERN DIS- TRICT OF ILLINOIS. December Term, A. D., 1874. UNITED STATES vs. MILLMANN, ET AL. Before Judge Plancnett. Jury Waived. Chicago, December 3, 1874. APPEARANCE?. For the peopler-U. S. Attorney N. Wing. For defendant Abram Marshall,!. White, Esq. " H C. F. NortonWills & English. " " L. E. Winters?-" " " Defendant W. A. Smith unrepresented by counsel. Defendant P. M. Green excused because of a mistake in the spelling of his name in the indictment. I K D X. WITNESSES. Direct Exam. Cross Exam. Re-Direct Exam. ' Re-Cross Exam. FOR COMMONWEALTH. Edward E. Charles - 1 17 19 William Butler 26 28 FOR DEFENDANTS. Walter Hyde ------ 31 40 51 52 R E B U T T A L. / Edward E. Charles - - 68 71 71 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 175 CHARLES ROONY : COURT OF APPEALS. vs. : Before Judge M. f. Fondler. J. B. MOORE & CO. : Case No. 2611. Camden, N. J., February 14, 1877 For the Appellant appear Messrs. Frederick Love and Arthur T. Arman. For the Appellee appears Hon. Marcus D. Werrill. TESTIMONY FOR PLAINTIFF. CHARLES ROONY, the appellant, being duly sworn, testified as fol- lows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Love: Q. What is your name? A. Charles Roonv. Q. Where do you reside? A. 411 Birch street, Camden, New Jersey* Q. What is your occupation? A. Am. a J ourneyman glass-blow er. Q. Have you ever worked for any glass manufacturer in this city? A. Yes, sir: for Mr. J. B. Moore & Co. Q. What person hired you? A. Mr. J. B. Moore. Q. What wages was that firm paying its glass blowers at the time you were hired Dy Mr. Moore? Objected to as incompetent testimony, the witness not having qualified. Objection sustained. i Q. What amount of pay per month were you to receive for your labor? A. 1 was to be paid ninety dollars a month. 176 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PIIC:;O'.:R \PHY. FIRST DAY. JOHN WILLIAMS vs. [ COURT OF COMMON PLEAS. DAILY NEWS CO. ) BEFORE JUDGE ALFRED MARSHALL. CASE No. 49. TRENTON, N. J., May 3, 1856. For the plaintiff appears Hon. J. L. Simons. For the defendant appear Messrs. Black and Strong. JOHN WILLIAMS, the plaintiff, sworn in his own behalf. DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Simons: Q. Mr. Williams, you are the plaintiff in this suit, are you not? A. I am. Q. What public position do you hold? A. I am Sheriff of this count}-. Q. The article which caused the present suit in what newspaper did it appear? A. In the Daily News, of this city, date of February roth. Q. Of what year? A. This year. To defendant's attorneys: Do you admit publication; or, shall I further prove it? Mr. Black: We admit publishing the article in question. To witness: Q. You know the defendants well, do you not? A. I do. Q. Have you had much intercourse with them, as a public officer? A. I have had up to the first of January of this year. Q. Of what did that intercourse consist? A. Giving to their paper the advertisements of the county sales of 'his :ounty for publication. Q. When did you last authorize them to print such sales' A. Some time in December of last year. Q. Then you have given then no public printing on, nor since, the first of January, of this year? A. No, sir. Q. Had you no advertisements to give? A. Yes, sir. I had quite a number since last December. Q. Why did you not give such advertisements this year, as well r\s last to the Daily News? Objected to. Objection overruled. Exception for defendant. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 177 =v o <\ V /..? i ^ .\_JJ...L.r v A *r\ -^^...^ i.V-J 1 " c " iH~iAw l ~V>-" : In I tt Cm , **-? *.*... lA^-^\ UP ... W .,..,. K-/ ./...- r.....\ "*~* ' t v 1 v 1 . V xv ... b \ T : s- ..t.. v l /!, C. ~~r \ \ \- h * I A 178 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SECOND DAY. WILLIAM JONES ) COURT OF COMMON PLEAS, vs. - BEFORE JUDGE JAMES PARSONS. STATE INSURANCE ASS'N. J CASE No. 506. CAMDEN, N. J., January 5, 1821. For the plaintiff appears Samuel R. Taylor, Esq. For the defendant appear Messrs. Walters and Harvey. WILLIAM JONES, the plaintiff, sworn. EXAMINATION-IN-CHIEF. By Mr. Taylor: Q. What is your name ? A. William Jones. Q. Are you the plaintiff in this suit ? A. Yes, sir. Q. Where do you reside ? A. Nineteenth and Federal streets, this city. Q. That is just beyond Cooper's Creek Bridge, is it not, Mr. Jones? A. Yes, sir, in the open country. Q. On what is known as the Moorestown pike ? A. Yes, sir. Q. Do you own property out there ? A. Yes, sir; a farm of about- fifty acres. Q. On what side of the road is it, Mr. Jones ? A. On the right-hand side, coming out of Camden; that is, going east. Mr. Harvey: If it please the Court, I would like to make a preliminary request that no more time be wasted on this case than is necessary. General Wharton, the Vice-President of the State Insurance Association, here present, desires to leave the town as soon as possible on important business, to be transacted to-day, at the office of the Company, Newark, N. J., and desires me to say that the location of Mr. Jones' property is not a matter of defense with us, and it is furthermore admitted by us that the barn owned by Mr. Jones, and which was burned on the night of August 14, 1820, was located on his prop- erty, wherever that may be, and was the one insured by us under Policy No. 7501. We simply differ in regard to the valuation of the property de- stroyed, and hope questions will be confined to that fact. The Court: This being understood by the plaintiff, I have no doubt he will be glad to take advantage of this opportunity of saving both himself and the Court valuable time. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 179 . c-v. /...A..VP V-k ^- * / -\ S> x-o ... V s_ o' c~b .. T. J if ' i " N ; K f 7 .".rr...f. _^....4 _ '^'Te I ' > i c^\_ X I ,. . TT.. . vy^ V 1 I / ^ <^ -.... vo -i....\i^| ^ x. i A....\o...<\ o > ^~a i8o HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. THIRD DAY. FRANKLIN B. MILLS J COURT OF COMMON PLEAS. vs. [ BEFORE JUDGE WM. C. ALBRIGHT. JOHN B. HENRY. ) CASE No. 2506. PHILADELPHIA, Nov. 29, 1831. APPEARANCES: G. H. Lewis, Esq., for plaintiff. Henry Darcy, Esq., for defendant. FRANKLIN B. MILLS, the plaintiff, being duly sworn, testified: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Lewis: Q. What is your name in full, Mr. Mills? A. Franklin B. Mills. Q. Are you the plaintiff in this case? A. Yes, sir. Q. State your business, please? A. I am in the installment business. Q. That is, you sell goods on installments or periodic payments? A. Yes, sir. Q. All kinds of goods? A. Most all household goods. Q. Where is your place of business? A. Nine-hundred-and-five, and nine-hundred-and-seven Lincoln Ave. Q. Do you know the defendant, John B. Henry? A. I do. Q. Have you had business transactions with him? A. Yes, sir; several. Q. What sort? A. He has bought household goods of me on the installment plan. Q. Did he always pay for such purchases? A. Always, except on the last occasion. Q. When was that? A. January i4th, of last year, he bought a set of furniture of me for which he has not paid. Q. Has he made any payment on account? A. I sold him the set for sixty dollars, payable ten dollars down and two-dollars-and-fifty-cents per week until paid. He made the first pay- ment of ten dollars and his first weekly installment of two-dollars-and-fifty- cents, and since then he has paid me no more money. Q. Did Mr. Henry state any reason for discontinuing payments? A. He gave me a reason; but it is a reason which I consider none. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 181 0> ..(J...W V....T , ^-"No I r V:" Vf^ V. ^ \ /^3 .... ..,.. _ vjp...C... .L,..L..../.V.!^. 1 > I * "V i \ S^-^ x -r-^ 3 O I , ^'..^^....Va ... I * ...... ...... ...\ ... "^ <*^r , 182 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. FOURTH DAY. UNITED STATES ) U. S. DISTRICT COURT, FOR THE NORTH- vs. ERN DISTRICT OF ILLINOIS. MURPHY ET AL. ) BEFORE JUDGE BEE. [No JURY.] CASE No. 6754. CHICAGO, June 20, 1880. SECOND DAY MORNING SESSION. MR. KOST continuing his testimony of the afternoon before: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Sling: Q. I gave you numbers of cars yesterday can you tell me where the grain in those cars came from? A. The numbers are mixed up on my memorandum here. I have got six of them. Q. Shall I call the number of the car? A. I think the last three you called are on that slip there, from St. Toe elevator. The Court: Give us the numbers of those cars. Witness: 4399, 18263, J S646. Those are Pink Line cars from Continental ele- vator, billed October 26. If you will give me some of the other numbers, I can tell better. Mr. Sling: Q. What numbers have you there? A. 4399, 18263, 15646. Mr. Wallace: Does he say those cars were inspected out of the Pink Line? Mr. Sling: Yes; will you give the dates? A. Inspected October 26. Q. Inspected October? A. Inspected out into Pink Line cars. Q. State respecting car number 35404. A. That was inspected October 27, from the Continental elevator. The Court: Q. When? A. October 26, Continental Fast Line cars. Q. 12877? A. Just the same. Q. 8545? A. That was the same. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 183 .../..v .o.^,.... / r 3 "6" " " "7"" 19 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIXTH DAY. IN THE MATTER OF THE PROBATE O A PAPER PROPOUNDED AS A CODI- CIL TO THE LAST WILL AND TESTA- MENT OF SURROGATE'S COURT, County of Camden, State of N. J. BEFORE HON. H. M. FINTER, SURROGATE CHARLES CARTER, Deceased. CAMDEN, N. J., May 15, 1852. For the proponent appears Mr. Peter Day. For the contestants appear Messrs. Wide and Wake. DR. JAMES LELAND, a witness on behalf of the proponent, being duly sworn, testified: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Day: Q. Dr. Leland, did you ever attend the testator, Mr. Charles Carter professionally ? A. Yes; I was his family physician for twenty years prior to his death. Q. Where did he reside during his last illness ? A. At 1405 Walnut Street. Q. You attended him until the day of his death ? A. Yes. Q. I have a paper here which I wish you would look at carefully, and tell me if you ever saw it before ? [Hands paper to witness.] A. Yes. [Examining paper.] This is a codicil to Mr. Carter's will. Q. Is that your signature ? [Pointing to the paper.] A. Yes. Q. Did you sign this document in the presence of the other witnesses, whose names are thereunto attached ? A. Yes. Q. And did they sign in your presence on the same occasion ? A. Yes; we all signed our names in the order shown on the document, one signing immediately after the other. Q. Did Mr. Carter sign first or last ? A. First. Q. In the presence of those witnesses ? A. Yes; that is, he made his mark, he was too weak to write. Q. Was the codicil read over to him before he signed it ? A. It was. Q. The entire document ? A. Yes; every word of it. Q. In the presence of yourself and the other witnesses ? A. Yes. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 3aCC.i.AA^4 ^.c-.^..^ -Q c. *-3 C/.1JU I/!!. ^|. ,5 x cr>. ^ ..!.. COUNTY OF PHILADELPHIA, PENN. GEORGE BECKETT ET AL. ) SAMUEL CAMPBELL, P. J. PHILADELPHIA, PENN., October u, 1855. Prosecutor William Matlack for the Commonwealth. A. Carpenter and R. L. Kerr, Esqs., for prisoners. FIRST DAY AFTERNOON SESSION. AUGUST' SCULL, being duly sworn, testified as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Matlack: Q. What is your name? A. August Scull. Q. What is your business? A. My business is brass finishing. Q. Where do you live? A. At No. 277 South Street. Q. Did you know Mr. Charles Hill in his lifetime? A. I knew him well, sir. Q. How well, or intimately, did you know him? A. As intimately as a man could by having six or seven years knowl- edge. Q. Where were you in the habit of meeting him? A. Up in his office. Q. How frequently did you see him there? A. Well, for the last year, I saw him twice a week. Q. Where else were you in the habit of meeting him? Did you ever meet him at his place of residence? A. Yes, sir. Q. About how frequently? A. Every Sunday for a year. Q. That was at Watts', was it? A. Yes, sir. Q. On South Street? A. Yes, sir. Q. Did you ever meet him on the street? A. Very seldom, except by appointment. Q. About how often were you in the habit of meeting him, putting all your meetings together? A. Two or three times a week. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. r. x i^ \o ,...to r ""^ /* .C.. .c..!. .c. -Vi \ ' !g6 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Q. And for how long a period of time? A. For the last year. Q. You knew him intimately and well, did you not? A. Yes; and for six years previous, but the last year was most intimate. Q. Did yo,u see the body lying at the morgue in the month of May? A. Yes, sir. Q. Was that on the same day of the discovery, or was it the day fol- lowing? A. It was the day following. Q. At what time of the day? A. At eleven o'clock in the morning. Q. With whom did you go? A. With Samuel Garrison. Q. Did you see more than one body lying there? A. No, sir. Q. Whose body was it you saw lying there? A. Mr. Charles Hill's. Q. What satisfied you that it was his? A. Its general appearance and contour and outline; I was satisfied it was his beyond all question, the moment I saw it; I could not be mistaken. Q. What did you know it by specify what it was? A. I saw the small imperial under his lip, which I knew he always wore while alive; but the body was his, and I was so satisfied with the gen- eral appearance that I had no doubt it was the remains of Charles Hill, my friend. Q. Were there any other peculiarities which you noticed? A. Well, he had a peculiarity, while living, a broken finger on his right hand. I noticed his hand lying across his stomach his right hand was lying across his stomach and I noticed his finger. Q. How about his hair? A. The hair was a dark brown, and I was satisfied it was Hill's hair. Q. And as to the shape of the forehead? A. The shape of the forehead was his. It was unquestionably the body of Charles Hill. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Kerr: Q. Have you taken an active part in the prosecution of the case? A. Well, I believed I should do so. Q. You have, have you? A. Yes, sir; I have. Q. You have given money for this prosecution? HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 197 igS HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. A* No, sir. Q. You have simply given your time and attention? A. Yes, sir. Q. What was the size of the body you saw? A. The size of the body? Q. Yes, sir. A. His height? Q. The size; that calls for more than the height. A. He was a large man. The Court: You misunderstood the question; he is talking about the body as seen in the morgue. Describe that body. A. It was a large body; it seemed to be about 6 feet long. By Mr. Kerr: Q. I will get at it in this way. What was the size of Mr. Hill in his lifetime how high was he? A. About 5 feet n. Q. How broad shouldered; how was his chest, etc.? A. I couldn't give you his width. Q. What was his weight? A. He weighed about 180 pounds. Q. About 5 feet n in height? A. Yes; he would weigh about 180 or 185. Q. What was the size of the body at the morgue? A. Well, I should say it was a body of about that size. Q. Do you think you can approximate the height of a man by the body when it is reclining? A. I think so. Q. That is all. The Court [addressing the State's Attorney]: Is this your last witness? Mr. Matlack: It is the last in order to-night, and it is the hour of adjournment. Mr. Kerr: May I ask the prosecution what branch of the case they will be likely to take up to-morrow? Mr. Matlack: I can not tell yet. There will, however, be more on this line. Mr. Kerr: I put the question because there are things we want here when certain witnesses are cross examined, and we do not want to keep them here. The Court: They will keep on this line for some time, and undoubtedly give you notice when they get through. We will now take a recess until ten o'clock to-morrow morning. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 199 .S-P X V * j v \.J ....... \ c^ c.x .. ...1 /A ^. L^L..*..:.:.^ .ij^juxi^e y^~ a? L i T /^ o f > i t, k i ^..~rA.<. .:..*/!:., X.....^. -V-v_ L*i 2 02 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. A. Just previous to the post-mortem examination. It was in the morning. Q. Were you alone? A. No; there were five or six of us together. Q. Who? A. James Smith, Doctor Forrest, and several of the other doctors; and I think you, Mr. State's Attorney, came at the same time. Q. Did you see more than one body? A. No, sir; that was all. Q. In what condition was that body? A. The body was in a condition that as soon as I looked at it I recognized it to be Mr. Charles Hill. Q. Did you observe any peculiarities that attracted your attention? A. The shape of his forehead and general features and general appear- ance, because I was so frequently with the man and knew him so well that I identified him as soon as I looked upon him. Q. That is all. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Kerr: Q. How much hair was there on his head? A. Very little. Q. Indicate to the jury in some way how much. A. I can not tell. Q. What part of the head was covered with hair? A. Part of the forehead, I think; but I didn't take much notice. Q. Generally, the head was stripped of hair, was it not? A. Pretty much. Q. You didn't notice whether there was any or not? A. Yes; you could see a few hairs remaining. Q. How about the mustache? A. There was a little part of it on one side yet. Q. How about the eyes? A. You could identify the eyes. Q. Could you see the color of his eyes were the eyes open? A. I could not tell that now. Q. Did you identify the color of his eyes? A. No; I did not. Q. How about the ears? A. I don't know, as I didn't much notice his ears. Q. How about the neck? A. By his general appearance I recognized the body, as I said before. Q. What was the condition of the neck, please? HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 203 . Vv-0 | ^ r ^ < v - ^I^V U~e ^> vJ> C X e ^ \ N ^?(ilcw \ .6 c- ../..^..^ rvC ...^ ./ !r..r y f lC ^ " H = ^' J ^ ^ W-^ f _ f " / ^- Q- L ^ V ) * V r \> ... c .. vx>*.% ^ ..**. **1 ,.v^w ..*.....%... J" i. , j n ^ ' V ' /. i\ ..O..I , v I j~- %, 0- 204 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. A. Pretty sloped down, and pretty well used up, the same as the body. Q. You looked at the body closely? A. I did; I walked around it. Q. You looked at it very closely? A. Yes, sir. Q. You base your testimony on that kind of a view? A. Yes, sir. Q. That is all. FRANK WATTS, being duly sworn, testified as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Matlack: Q. What is your name? A. Frank Watts. Q. Where do you live? A. At present I live at 237 Park Street. Q. Where did you live before you moved to your present residence? A. No. 470 North Street. Q. On which side of North Street was that place? A. On the east side. Q. Did you know Charles Hill in. his lifetime? A. Yes; intimately. Q. For how many years? A. Between ten and eleven years. Q. Where did you know him? A. He was a member of my family during that entire time. Q. In what place? A. In St. Louis, and afterward here. Q. You may state whether or not he was a member of your family in the month of May of the present year. A. He was. Q. State whether or not in that month you saw the body of a dead man in the city morgue. A. I did. Q. When? A. Between seven and eight o'clock on the 22d of May. Q. Do you remember the day of the week? A. On Wednesday. Q. Who was present when you saw that body? A. James Smith, Dr. Forrest, I think, and a number of others, among them John Hill, Charles Hill's brother. Q. State whether or not you recognized that body. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 205 if a. 206 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. NINTH DAY. GEORGE BINDER ) COMMON PLEAS COURT. vs. v BEFORE JUDGE JAMES ATKINSON. CASE No. 30? HENRY T. NAGLE. ) NEW YORK, N. Y., Nov. 6, 1845^ Samuel S. Stover, for plaintiff. Charles Willard and Marcus Tooler, for defendant. TESTIMONY FOR PLAINTIFF. GEORGE BINDER, the plaintiff, being duly sworn, testified as follows DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover: Q. What is your business, Mr. Binder? A. Wholesale dealer in telegraphic outfits. Q. Did Henry T. Nagle, the defendant, ever purchase goods of you? A. Yes, sir; for many years prior to January 29, 1843. Q. Why did he stop buying of you at that date? Objected to. Objection sustained. Q. He stopped buying of you at that date, did he? A. He did. Q. Was his account square with you then? A. It was not. He then owed me a balance of two hundred and ninety- eight dollars and fifty-seven cents. Q. How was this balance settled? A. By a note drawn for that amount, payable thirty days from date. Q. Is this the note, Mr. Binder? A. It is. Q. Was it ever paid? A. It was not, or the protest would not be written on the pack 01 it, and I would not now be in possession of it. Q. Was no amount whatever paid on account of that note after protest? A. There was not. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Willard: Q. Mr. Binder, what does this amount, two hundred and ninety-eight dollars and fifty-seven cents, represent, and how far back does it date? A. It dates back about two years, or a little over, and it lepresents what Mr. Nagle owes me. Q. I understand that the last bill was bought a few weeks previous to the making of this note is that so? A. Possibly it was. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 207 , ' h /}/" *\0 i^-fc I l_j X I .,..L.^..O >> .., -= <^-,/ c /, C \ 'C F O Q*/ 'V* o**" " *^ """^> \.^>.:... ...^ LA..^^.X.!\ (.. O -^ J ^"^ V'"' I i oP i .--TO ?....: !1..A1 .\2^.>..^_/\ _...^.V- I x> y I V . ..b .. (- 2o8 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Q. And that the goods were delivered on the day that the note was mc.de? A. Yes, sir; I think they were. Q. Has there been no payment made on account of this note? A. I have no recollection of any. Q. Do you not recollect of one day in January, of this year, receiving twenty-five dollars from Mr. Nagle on account of this note? A. I do not. Q. Nor twenty dollars? A. No, sir. Q. And you called for the money several times, did you not? A. Yes, sir; I did. Q. Did not Mr. Nagle, on a certain day in January, of this year, promise to pay twenty-five dollars on account of this note? A. Ma^be so. He used to make about six promises a week of a similar kind. Q. Did he not meet you at Desbrosses Street Ferry, one day in' that month, of that year, and pay you twenty-five dollars on account of this note? A. I remember meeting him several times at that ferry, but I never received any money from him at any time on account of this note. O You are positive that you do not remember receiving any money from Mr. Nagle on account of this note? A. I know I never did. Q I believe you said in your direct examination that the note was for thirty days? A. Yes, sir. Q. This is the note, I believe? A It is. Q. This*note reads " one month from date " which is correct? A . The note, of course. Q. Then you admit that, in this instance, your memory was at fault? A. Well, as to the thirty days, yes. Q. But not as to having received payment on account of this note from Mr. Nagle? A. No; as to that, I am positive. O Of what? A. Of never having received any me ney on that note. Q. Now, Mr. Binder, do you not remember, upon another occasion, in January of this year, when you called upon Mr. Nagle, as he was about leaving his office upon an important business engagement, on which occasion HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 209 o cx..*w^..Va.. ^ ..rti/ \ '"Co" t ..\\ ir-v > ^ I {^ "'(} " '* k /v<^Vi..J.--A \^ jCa/ A_X ^ P v ..G^.A I , o* I V u v_x... o.^.C-.^.-N. , rvx .. .\ . ..^.. ...^ -. ..., <^v \o .. A ....O. ^*'\ 210 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. he paid you money on account of this note? A. I do not. Q. What sort of telegraphic instruments was this last bill for this bill for goods delivered on the day the note was made what sort of instru- ments? A. There were some relays and sounders, and some small articles which I do not now remember. Q. How many of the articles included in that bill were returned to you by the defendant? A. None of them. Q. Did not Mr. Nagle come to you on that day, after the note was given you, and notify you that the goods you sent him were not as represented and that he intended to return them or some of them to you the next day? A. No, sir. Q. Did he not return them to you? A. No, sir. Q. Do you mean to say you never received back from Mr. Nagle any portion of the goods sent him by you on the day this note was signed? A. I most emphatically mean to say I did not receive any of my goods back from Mr. Nagle, after the signing of that note. Q. And never received any complaint about them? A. No, sir; not that I remember. Q. Ah, not that you remember. But it might have happened, you think? A. No, sir; I do not think so. RE-DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover: Q. Mr. Binder, are you positive that you never received any payment on account of this note? A. I am very positive that I did not. Q. Do your books or any memoranda of yours contain any such entries, affecting this note? A. No, sir. Q. Would they, if such payment had been made? A. They certainly would. RE-CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Willard: Q. Are you positive that Mr. Nagle never complained about your last sale to him? A. I am very positive that he never did, and he never returned any of these goods to me. PLAINTIFF RESTS. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. X_> . . ,-3\i/ .. J fc.. r e\ .... -O \/ ' ... 6 \_ ..-.I ... '... L .A. ..I.. Q^ J " "o" ...j... -y i ................ .... ..*. . J C/iTTvTN^..fVT7\ O .. . \ * t 2 i6 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. A. I did not. He promised to send me receipts, but never did. Q. Why did you not get receipts at the time these two payments were made? A. Because they were made under circumstances which made it impossible to get them. Q How was that? A, The first amount of twenty-five dollars was paid in Desbrosses Street Ferry, upon my meeting him there, and the second amount just out- side of my office door, when I was starting out to fulfill an important engage- ment, and had only just time to catch the train. Q. What makes you so positive about paying these amounts? A. Well, I remember the transactions distinctly, and the entries are in my cash-book for those days. Q. Is this the cash-book you refer to? [Showing book.] A. It is. Q. Can you point out the entries you refer to? A. Yes, sir; there they are. [Indicating.] This is the first entry. [Reading.] January 13, 1845, P 3 -^ to George Binder, on account, twenty- five dollars. And here is the other, in same words, under date of 23d, same month and year, twenty dollars. Q. In whose handwriting are those entries? A. They are in my own handwriting. Q. You kept your own books at that time, did you? A. I did yes, sir; have always kept them and do now. Cash-book offered in evidence and marked Exhibit A. Q. Have you no other corroboration of your memory, excepting this book? A. Yes, sir; a salesman of mine, Mr. Long, witnessed both payments. Q. How was that? A. He was with me at Desbrosses Street Ferry when twenty-five dol- lars were paid to Mr. Binder, and he stood at the window of my place of business when I handed twenty dollars to Mr. Binder on the 23d of January. Q. Did he see both payments? A. He says so yes. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover: Q. Mr. Nagle, you admit signing this note for two hundred and ninety- eight dollars and fifty-seven cents? A. Yes, sir. Q. , And by that act you really admitted at the time that you owed Mr. Binder the sum of two hundred and ninety-eight dollars and fifty-seven tents, did you not? HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 217 ^"^ I \ \3> c /> TT^x rT X I.7.J. 218 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. A. I thought that amount was correct, then, because I presumed the goods were all right. Q. Did you not know they were all right, Mr. Nagle? A. No, sir; I did not. Q. Then why did you sign the note? A. Because I thought the goods were all right. Q. Now, do you mean to say, Mr. Nagle, that you would have signed that note, if you had not had positive evidence that the goods were all right? A. I mean to say that I did sign that note without such positive knowledge. Q. Do you go about signing notes in that way, Mr. Nagle? A. No, sir; not generally. Especially not since then. DEFENSE RESTS. REBUTTAL. JAMES WILSON, a witness for the plaintiff, being duly sworn, testified : By Mr. Stover : Q. James, where do you reside ? A. 1132 Franklin Street, this city. Q. In whose employ are you ? A. Messrs. Bridge & Close. Q. In whose employ were you in January, 1843 ? A. I was in Mr. George Binder's employ. Q. In what capacity? A. I was delivery clerk for Mr. Binder. Q. Do you remember this last order of Mr. Nagle's? A. Yes, sir. Q. Did you attend to its delivery? A. Yes, sir. Q. In what way ? A. I packed the goods and gave them to the drayman to deliver to Mr. Nagle. Q. Did Mr. Nagle ever complain about receiving the wrong goods on this occasion ? A. Not that I know of. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Willard : Q. What is your age ? A. Nineteen. Q. Then you were about sixteen when this transaction occurred ? A. Yes, sir. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 219 ? L_ i .>. .v V X .C...,.....-,.. ; ..C..^ 22O HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Q. You would not have known if Mr. Nagle had complained about his goods, would you ? A. Not unless I heard him complain. Q. Such complaints were not usually brought to you, were they? A. No, sir. SURREBUTTAL. HENRY T. NAGLE, the defendant, recalled : By Mr. Willard-: Q. You have said, in your examination-in-chief, that you complained frequently to Mr. Binder about sending you the wrong telegraph instru- ments were these complaints made verbally, or in writing? A. Both. Q. On what occasions were they made in writing ? A. On the day I received the wrong goods. I stopped in to see Mr. Binder ; and, as he was not in, I left a note on his desk in reference to the matter. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover : r Q. Who was present when you left that note ? A. I -think James Wilson was. Q. You think ! Are you positive ? A. I am not positive ; it might have been someone else. Q. Did you call anyone's attention to it ? A. I think not. EVIDENCE. CLOSED. CHARGE OF THE COURT. GENTLEMEN OF THE JURY This is an action of Assumpsit, brought by George Binder, the plaintiff, against Henry T. Nagle, the defendant. The plaintiff seeks in this action to recover from the defendant a sum of money which, the plaintiff claims, is due him and owing him from the defendant for merchandise delivered by the plaintiff to the defendant on the defendant's order. The principal contention between the parties in the present suit is as to the amount actually due by the defendant to the plaintiff, for the order and delivery are admitted by each. The only witnesses in this case, with the exception of James Wilson, rvliose testimony is unimportant, are the parties, the plaintiff and the defend- HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 221 "I" S '%- ? "c- ^ t~~ .flA J- 4- 222 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. iiit, themselves. So far as this evidence shows, there have been no other vitnesses brought forward corroborative of their testimony. The law makes die parties to the suit competent witnesses. You are the judges of their credibility, and where they differ in their statements, you may determine which of them is correct. The plaintiff contends that he delivered the goods ordered, that settle- ment was made by a promissory note on which no money was paid when due at the bank nor since. The defendant, on the other hand, swears that che goods received were not those ordered, that he endeavored to return Miem, and that he paid forty-five dollars on the note, for which he has received no credit. Gentlemen of the Jury, here you have these statements of these two parties, and it is for you to determine which is correct. The burden rests upon the plaintiff to show you, by the weight of evidence, that his statements are true in every particular, and he must satisfy you, by the evidence, that they are so before he can recover the amount claimed. The dispute, therefore, of the plaintiff's claims, is limited to the validity of the order and the possibility of the payments which the defendant says he made the plaintiff. The defendant claims that he settled with the plaintiff by means of this promissory note before he had examined all the goods for which the note was given in settlement, and that he afterward paid twenty dollars and iwenty-five dollars, respectively, on account of that note. In relation to this note, we have to say that, in the absence of any evidence that is, if there was no other evidence in this case relating to the settlement by this note, then it would be conclusive upon this plaintiff. The presumption is, that at the time the note was given they had a just settlement of their matters, and that the note was given for the true balance known to be due on such settlement by both parties. The defendant, however, contending that the note, in point of fact, was not in true settlement of the amount he really owed the plaintiff that it was made before the goods concerned were examined the said plaintiff has a right to dispute the amount of said note, and, therefore, we have to say to you, as a matter of law, that while such a note, like a receipt in full, is generally conclusive, yet, if it may be shown that, at the settlement made When such note was given, a mistake was made that there was an error in the account then the amount on the note would not be conclusive, 'but it is incu'mbent upon the party claiming error, to show that there was an error and mistake and to show that error by satisfactory and unmistakable evidence. This note was given to and accepted by the plaintiff as a settle- ment, and, therefore, the defendant is bound by that note unless he can prove error. But, as we have already said to you, the plaintiff may explain HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 223 V > .Cl. ..VN ..rs - ^ ... x o o/o. 224 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. the note, and, if he, by clear and satisfactory evidence, has satisfied you that there was a mistake made at the time, or that he made it under a mis- apprehension, then this paper does not bind him. Gentlemen of the Jury, I do not know that it is necessary for me to say anything further in my general charge. The only items of dispute between these parties are the two alleged payments, on account of the note given, and the value of the goods which, it is claimed by the defendant, he never ordered, tried to return, and has no use for, facts for your judgments alone to decide. Now, Gentlemen of the Jury, something has been said during the trial of this case, in relation to the pecuniary ability of the plaintiff and the defendant. I simply have to say, that whatever may be their standing and their pecuniary ability, it can not effect the rights of the one or the other in this case. You will take this case, Gentlemen of the Jury, apply to the evidence the rules of the law, as I have stated them, and render such a verdict, under your oaths, according to the evidence of the case, as your consciences will approve. AUTHOR'S NOTE. The above concludes our exercises in Court Reporting, and if the student has practiced each of the cages contained in the entire series in accordance with the rules for such practice, given elsewhere in these pages, he or she, as the case may be, will have gained a certain amount of facility in writing not possessed before, and, in addition, will have learned more respecting the natural plan of phrasing, which best comes with practicing such exercises as these Court Cases and the Business Letters. At first the student may find it more difficult to phrase than to write words separately, and may think, because the same words are round phrased on some occasions, and not in others, that there is no set rule or necessity. The explanation of the variation in phrasing is, that words should be phrased as they are sounded, that is, when words are run together by the voice, write them together, providing the simple rules for phrasing, given in our lessons, are not violated; ana, where there is hesitation between uttered words, then do not phrase, as it is advisable, if possible, that phonography represent what is known as voice punctuation, on which is really based type punctuation, both of which often j'urmsh the e*act meaning of written words. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 225 \ ^ \ c _p -> p , f-* '.H"-r .../ ...t c, - r V d eJ> 226 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. CONVENTION REPORTING. Amanuensis work and court reporting, have been illustrated and explained to some extent by other authors; not, however, nearly so thoroughly as in this work, and convention reporting has never, to the best of the author's knowledge and belief, even been treated. Many shorthand students are ambitious to become newspaper and conven- tion reporters to know what to report at a meeting, what portions of it to incorporate in their printed reports, and what portions of the pro- ceedings are best omitted. To give this information in a manner which may be understood by all interested in the subject, and to cover the entire ground, is the object of this present chapter. Convention reports or reports of meetings, are of three kinds: First, and least important, are the small paragraphs or incomplete descriptions which one often finds in the large dailies. Second, the more elaborate and almost full report, which the trade newspapers, interested in the business represented at the convention, would think it advisable to publish. Third, the absolutely verbatim report, which the association hold- ing the convention or meeting has printed in pamphlet form for use of its members. Below we give illustrations of how a daily newspaper frequently condenses such matters, unless of general interest. For instance, one daily might , While another daily might con- simply notice it in this manner, ! descend to give the item a heading among other small items: as follows: The Paint. Oil and Varnish Club held its regu- M . ,! i ii- of Paint Manufacturers. lar monthly meeting last night at the Union Leajrue. There was a good attendance. The paint, oil and varnish interests ol Chicago A .1 j .1 . i . , , were well represented at the meeting of the local Another daily might mention it Daint club at th f the Unjon Leaeue , at greater length, thus: Judge Gresham was the guest of the Paint, Oil and Varnish Club at its regular monthly dinner and meeting at the Union League last night. The Judge made a characteristic speech and was warm- ly applauded. Other speakers made brief address- es in reference to the business interests repre- sented. paint club at the rooms of the Union League last night. George H. Vrooman presided. D. Van Ness Person, secretary. Resolutions were adopted requesting the white lead trust to consider the claims of the paint grind- ers by arranging for a more liberal rebate the coming year, and asking the linseed oil crushers to provide similarly for rebates on that product. Judge Gresham was the guest of the evening, and spoke of the benefits of trade organizations. And so on, ad infinitim, according to the pleasure of the editor or reporter, and the space at hand. On pages 261 to 270 \ve present the report of the same meeting exactly as it was printed in the trade paper interested in the delibera- HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 227 tions of the association holding the meeting; and on pages 234 to 259 we give the report, absolutely verbatim et seriatim, precisely as taken, and as written out for publication in pamphlet form by the association concerned. By a comparison of the extended report for the trade newspaper with the verbatim report for the association, it will be noticed that the trade paper generally prints the important resolutions and speeches in full, also all important discussions at least, such of them as will not divulge the secrets of the trade contenting itself with a mere des- cription of some of the unimportant resolutions and proceedings, instead of reporting them all verbatim. For instance, instead of printing the words which the president utters when he puts a motion and announces it as having been carried, the trade paper report would read simply "Carried," or where a member makes an elaborate excuse for something of no importance, the trade papers will simply state that Mr. So and So made remarks appropriate to the occasion, etc., etc. In the report which is furnished to the association, for the use of its members, every word, important or unimportant, is given, furnish- ing an absolutely verbatim report, which may or may not be garbled afterward by the secretary or members before its association prints it; though, as a rule, it is printed exactly as transcribed. This latter report, as it goes in pamphlet form, should have a title page, which title page should contain the name of the convention, what annual or monthly meeting it is, if any, where held, and the date. This is for the cover page, and may be duplicated on the inside title page when printed, but need not figure twice in the reporter's transcription, as such pamphlets also contain, on other preceding pages, or on pages at the end of the book, according to the taste of the secretary, the names of the officers and committees, with often a list of the entire roster of mem- bers, but these matters are attended to by .the secretary of the associa- tion. The stenographer, however, had better, for a convention of two or more sessions, furnish an index to the subject matter, such as the page on which the different sessions commence, the page on which each resolution is to be found, and the same respecting speeches or important discussions. This is, of course, unnecessary for a meeting of only one session. Illustrations of such title page and index are given on pages 231 and 232. Other than this preliminary information the report generally starts off as shown on page 230 or 233 of this book. In reporting a convention, there is less to become familiar with than in a court trial, but there is also more skill required. In the heat 228 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPH! . of discussion, a business man who may have had no experience in pub- lic speaking is apt to talk much faster than any court witness does or any ordinary speaker could. In addition, he will make use of techni- cal expressions peculiar to his business, which are as familiar to him as any common words of general conversation, but which may be Greek to any one outside his line of business, and, as sometimes the reporter will have to wait a second or two to catch a meaning of the speaker or hear what his mumbled words are, the convention reporter needs to have more speed to make up for those waits. When engaged for a convention or at the time he enters the room where it is held, the reporter should get a copy of the printed call of that convention, which will give him all the necessary information re- specting its proper title or heading, If he is acquainted with any of .he members he is well prepared, but, if not, then he should sit next to the secretary, treasurer or president, or some officer who knows most of the members of the convention and can whisper their names to him when they speak. Having once heard the name of a speaker, he should attempt to fix it well in his memory, in case the speaker fiequently takes part in the proceedings, and the reporter should always write each speaker's name in shorthand, immediately beginningthe words uttered by such speaker, as memory will not always help the reporter to after- ward place the proper names to the proper notes. It is not necessary to write the names in full. Simply the last name, as upon the different shorthand pages following. Of course, when the president, treasurer or secretary speaks, their names need not be written, but simply their titles. Commence every person's remarks indented about an inch from the left-hand side of the line in note-book, so as to be easily found. If a resolution or speech is read, it is not necessary to take it in shorthand, if you can borrow the paper and make a. copy of it after- ward. In fact, anything that is read need not be written, if you can borrow the paper containing it. Such reading is generally at too great a rate of speed to be easily taken, and you might just as well save your- self the effort. People can read much faster than they can talk im- promptu. The minutes of preceding meeting are, of course, never taken and are generally given in one's notes as shown on page 235. Laughter, applause and other descriptive matter are treated similarly. In reporting a convention of several days' length, if the report is needed promptly for a trade newspaper, the reporter has generally assistants, and one of them writes for perhaps a half-hour, is then re- lieved by another, and he in turn perhaps by a third, while the first is HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 22Q writing or dictating to a typewriter operator the notes he has taken, re- turning to relieve the last one. Four to six sometimes thus alternate, both in conventions and court trials, where daily transcription is re- quired, such being also the practice in Congress and all large bodies, Congress being, by the way, but a big convention, and no more difficult to report than any trade meeting. At meetings of only one session, or where there is no immediate hurry for transcription, one reporter is, of course, sufficient. In Congress and State Legislatures, each stenographer generally writes even less time at a sitting, each being relieved regularly (for a number do the work), and, as statesmen generally ask for, and obtain, the transcription containing their remarks before they go to the printer, the remarks are frequently so changed as to be far from being verbatim. A convention of several days' length or a meeting of one hour are each alike subject to the same rules, the only difference being in their length, and the fact that the short one needs only one heading, while the long one has a heading for each session, but as remarks respecting one session are the same as to any number, the subject is fully illustrated in this book by the one hour's session of the monthly meeting of the Chicago Paint, Oil and Varnish. Club, reported verbatim in the pages opposite the shorthand of this portion of the book, just as would have been done in the case of a convention, where the work was arranged for pamphlet form. The reason for the differences between the verbatim report on pages 234 to 259, and the report, nearly verbatim, made lor a t'ade paper, pages 261 to 270, are fully explained by the side noi.es on the last named pages. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. TWENTY-SIXTH ANNUAL CONVENTION of the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. October 20th, 21st and 22d, 1892. AT CHICAGO. FIRST DAY. The first day's session of the American Institute of Archi- tects was held on the evening of the 20th of October, at the Recital Hall of the Auditorium, Chicago. Convention called to order at 8.15 o'clock by the President, Edward H. Kendall of New York: Mr. D. Adler of Chicago, Secretary. President Kendall addressed the Institute as follows: (Insert President's Address.) Minutes of previous meeting read and approved. President Kendall. The next business before the convention will be the reading of the report of the Board of Directors. Report read by the Secretary as follows: ( Insert President Kendall. The next business is the reading of the report of the Treasurer. As the Treasurer is absent, your Secre- tary will read the report. Treasurer's report read as follows: i (Insert.) HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 000000000 TTTTTT7T7TTTTTTTT7T7TT77-.T7TTT7T7T-V.7TTT77TTTTS 7 7 T T T T T 7 T 77 T T T 7 TTT T ooooooocoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo z z z z z z z z Z PROCEEDINGS Z z z Z of the Z Z Z Z NATIONAL Z Z Z 2 WHOLESALE DRUGGISTS Z Z Z Z ASSOCIATION, Z Z Z Z in Z Z Z 2 Convention, Z Z Z Z at Z Z Z Z The Arlington Hotel, Washington, D. C. Z Z . Z Z o --- Z Z Z Z September 29, 30; Z Z Z Z October 1, 2, 3 , Z Z Z Z 1890. Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z TTT77T7TTTTTTTTTTTTTT T f 7 T 7 7 7 7 7 7 T 7 7 T 7 T 7 T T 7 7 T T 7 7 T T T T T T T T 7 T T 7 TT T 7 T T TT 000000000 VCHW+OV V040V vov V 232 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. INDEX. FIRST DAY PROCEEDINGS. Evening Session. Reception of Delegates from Kindred Associations TUESDAY. Morning Session. Address of President Van Schaack Report of Membership Committee Secretary 1 s Report Treasurer's Report Report of Committee on Paints, Oils and Glass- TUESDAY. Afternoon Session. Report of Committee on Proprietary Goods Address of Delegate from Ohio Pharmaceutical Ass'n Resolutions from Minnesota State Association Joint Letter of Minneapolis and Ramsey County Pharmaceu- tical Association Communications from Pharmaceutical Associations Committees on Nominations of Officers and Location of Next Meeting "WEDNESDAY. Evening Session. Report of Committee on Drug Market Report of Committee on Transportation Report of Committee on Box and Cartage Report of Committee on Commercial Travelers- Report of committee on Fraternal Relations-- Report of Committee on Paris Green Pages. 4 to 20 24 to 33 to 35 to 38 to 39 to 48 to 61 to 65 to 67 to 70 to 82 to 93 to 95 to 98 to THURSDAY. Morning Session. 32 34 38 39 46 56 63 66 70 75 81 92 95 96 99 99 to 101 102 to 109 to 117 to -119 119 to 127 Report of Committee on Credit and Collections 110 Summary of the Torrey Bankrupt Bill 117 Report of Committee on Nominations of Officers Report of Committee on Legislation 120 Statement of Officers of the Druggists Mutual Fire Association 132 to 133 Report of Sub-Committee on Trade Mark Infringments and Simulations 139 Report of Obituary Committee 141 Resolutions of the Propriet^y Committee 143 Supplemental Resolution by "j. C. Eliel Supplemental Resolution bv R. W. Powers 162 to 163 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 233 PROCEEDINGS of the SEVENTEENTH ANNUAL CONVENTION OP THE NATIONAL WHOLESALE DRUGGISTS' ASSOCIATION. o Washington, D. C., Sept. 29, 30; Oct. 1, 2, 3, 1890. o FIRST DAY. Evening Session. Meeting called to order at 8.15 p. m. President Van Schaack: In calling the convention to order, I will detain you but a moment while expressing the great pleasure which I experience in meeting with you once more face to face, and permit me to add that I trust there will be a full and free discus sion of every subject which comes before this association and upon which there is any difference of opinion. It has been my exper- ience, gentlemen, as well as that of others who have occupied this chair, that after adjournment some gentleman has remarked that "he did not think it good policy" though we never had the pleasure of hearing his voice during the discussion. We wish a free discus- sion and a full one as to the expediency of every move we make. There are gentlemen on this floor who are able to teach us much, but their inherent modesty and the unsteadiness of their legs the Infirmities which the speaker himself experiences prevent us hear ing from them as we should. Let there be a reform in this regard If there are any gentlemen present representing any of our sister associations, they will kindly send their names to the chair. The first order of business, gentlemen, is the roll call, 234 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. REGULAR MONTHLY MEETING OF THE CHICAGO PAINT, OIL, AND VARNISH CLUB AT THE ROOMS OF THE UNION LEAGUE, CHICAGO, ILL. THURSDAY, OCTOBER 17, 1889. Dinner at 6:00 p. m. Thirty members present. Meeting called to order at 7:30 o'clock by President G. H. Vrooman. THE PRESIDENT The meeting will please come to order. We will listen to the reading of the minutes of last meeting. The Secretary will please read them. [Minutes read.] You have heard the report of the Secretary of the September meeting what will you do with it ?. MR. COFFIN I move it be approved as read. MR. PETTET I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT It is moved and seconded that the report of the Secretary be approved as read. All in favor will please signify the same by saying aye. Contrary, nay. So ordered. The report of our Treas- urer is next in order. TREASURER ROSENTHAL Mr. President, your Treasurer respectfully asks to be excused from making a detailed report to-night. I have only sent the bills out a week ago. Part of them have been paid, but not many of them. Anyway, I can assure the gentlemen there is enough to pay for to-night's dinner, and by next meeting I expect to be in position to make a regular report. MR. Cox I move the Treasurer be excused from making a detailed report. MR. PETTET I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT If there is no objection, the Treasurer is excused from making a detailed report, and his verbal one is accepted. So ordered. A special meeting of the Club met at the Sherman House "on the aad of September, for the election of officers and the transaction of some unfinished business. The Executive Committee was there autl^or- ized to appoint the committees on membership and entertainment. The Committee on Membership is A. G. Cox, Frank Hayes, and E. C. Lynn. We will now hear the report of the Membership Committee. MR. Cox Mr. President, I believe, so far as I am concerned, I have not got down to active business yet, and I would ask to be excused from reporting this evening. MR. ROSENTHAL Mr. President, permit me to call your attention to the fact that the report of the Membership Committee goes to the Executive Committee, and not to the Club dinner. There is no occasion HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 235 ^"T ^ ~\ s$$\. I...1 ^ r> .> 'v ) s Ti^r -r- '-^-i^^ v .X A \ v l ^^, 0< ?. > ^^...^ -^- ^ ..^\ .s :..v.a 3..:...v..: / ,-.j^ >..".. -, U ^w...C 236 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. for a report of the Membership Committee in open meeting. THE PRESIDENT Mr. Rosenthal is correct in this respect, that the Executive Committee acts upon all applications and elects members to the Club, but it has been customary heretofore that the chairman of the Membership Committee report to this meeting the names of such mem- bers as have been elected, for the information of this Club. If there is no objection, the Membership Committee will be excused from a detailed report. The report of the Entertainment Committee you have had before you for some time; I heard no objection to its particulars, and I believe most of them have been placed on file. [Laughter.] At the first convention of the National Association held at Cleveland, in Janu- ary last, a resolution was adopted relating to credits, the idea being to control the terms of sale and the discounts for cash. This subject was taken up at our May meeting and discussed, and referred to a com- mittee composed of John Wadsworth, John F. Weare, and A. G. Cox. Is that committee ready to report? MR. WADSWORTH Mr. President, I was not here at the time I \vas appointed on that committee, and nothing was done since. I would like further time. THE PRESIDENT The Committee on Credits asking for further time, if there is no objection it is granted. At the May meeting there was a committee on Naphtha appointed Mr. Mutchmore, Mr. Burns, and myself. The idea is to regulate the price of Naphtha when sold in small lots. As soon as practicable, your committee came together and drew up an agreement which was circulated for signature among the trade, obtained twenty-three names, and there we stuck. I can not say that the outlook is very brilliant for an agreement at the present time. You have heard the report of the Committee on Naphtha; what action will you take? MR. HAVES I move that it be granted further time. MR. WADSWORTH I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT If there is no objection, the request is granted. This, I believe, finishes all the reports of the general and select commit- tees. Miscellaneous business is now in order. MR. ROSENTHAL If I am not mistaken, the meeting of the National Association will take place in January. Will it be in order fo elect dele- gates to that convention? I raise this question so early because it will probably be necessary to instruct our delegates in certain matters, ana as we have only one meeting in a month, we will have only two meetings before the convention takes place. I would move that the Secretary be instructed to lay before our next meeting nominations for delegates to the National Convention to be held in Detroit, and also such instructions that we may see fit to give. HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 237 1 c~>\ ^ . ..-/. y ...^...... I $ 3.V- "I n n o /*>\p v J> I 1 - \0 ^j 238 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. MR. COFFIN I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT It is moved and seconded that the Executive Commit- tee at our next meeting present nominations for delegates to the National Convention to be held at Detroit, with such instructions as is thought best to give them. All in favor of the motion please say aye. Contrary, nay. It is carried. SECRETARY PERSON I have been handed the following resolution, Mr. President: WHEREAS, A great change has taken place in the white lead industry, caused by the consolidation of private firms into the National White Lead Trust, which has had the effect of placing the manufacture of white lead upon a more profitable basis; be it Resolved, That it is the sense of this Club that the rebate now being allowed to the jobbing trade is inadequate and unsatisfactory, and we respectfully ask the National White Lead Trust, when formulating their plans for the coming year, to arrange for a more liberal rebate to jobbers, and also take into consideration the claims of paint grinders for an equitable price on dry lead. THE PRESIDENT You have heard the resolution read. What action is to be taken? [Several members seconded it.] It is moved and seconded that the resolution just read be adopted. Are there any remarks? SECRETARY PERSON Before that motion is put, Mr. President, I would say that a copy of this resolution ought to go to the National Wholesale Druggists' Convention, which meets on the 22d of this month at Indianapolis. If it is the desire of any of the members to incorporate that in this resolu- tion, a motion should be made to that effect. I would suggest that the reso- lution be sent to Mr. Whitlock of St. Louis, who is chairman of Committee on Reports, who will render his report at that meeting. If we send that to him, he will embody it in his report, or he can simply hand it in to the convention. THE PRESIDENT Will that be embodied in the original motion? SECRETARY PERSON I would suggest that a motion be made to that effect. THE PRESIDENT The question now is on the adoption of this resolution. SECRETARY PERSON It can be amended. MR. CUTLER I think, perhaps, it would have more effect to have it go from this body rather than have it incorporated in Mr. Whitlock's report. I move the adoption of this resolution. MR. WEARE I would like to know if there are any members of this association who are likely to attend the National Wholesale Druggists' Association at Indianapolis this week. I think he might possibly be more respected as a representative of this body. I shall expect to go HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 239 4 - n 24O HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY there myself as a representative of the trade, and I shall be very glad to know if anybody else is going, so as to present it in shape as a repre- sentative from this body. I would be very glad to have Mr. Person, or anybody else who is going to have it presented by us as members of this body. THE PRESIDENT The question is on the adoption of the resolution. Then we can afterwards appoint our committee. All who are in favor of the adoption of this resolution as read, please so signify. So ordered. Now, the question of the committee to present the resolution to the National Druggists' Association will be taken up. MR. COFFIN I move that a committee of three be appointed to repre- sent this association, and present the resolution. MR. HAYES I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT All in favor of the adoption of this motion, please say aye. So ordered. I appoint as that committee Messrs. Weare, Cutler, and Person, to represent us before the National Wholesale Drug- gists' Asso< Nation in this matter of white lead. MR. COFFIN I move that the Secretary be instructed to send a copy of this resolution to the other paint clubs in the United States, and ask for their co-operation. SECRETARY PERSON I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT All those in favor of Mr. Coffin's resolution please say aye. Carried. SECRETARY PERSON I have been handed the following resolution : WHEREAS, The jobbing trade of linseed oil at the prevailing rates is unprofitable and opposed to good business, and believing that the manufacturers are desirous of establishing and having maintained a schedule of prices which will place this article on a proper basis, be it therefore Resolved, That this Club urge upon the manufacturers of linseed oil the importance of making a range of prices for quantities which shall be equitable, and afford a margin of profit to the dealers handling this product. Resolved, That this Club and its members will heartily co-operate in such action, and maintain the prices so established. MR. PETTET I move, Mr. President, that this resolution be pre- sented to the National Linseed Oil Company by a committee to be appointed by the chair. MR. Cox I second that motion. THE PRESIDENT You have heard the resolution. What action will you take? Those in favor will please signify the same. So ordered. I will appoint a committee later in the evening. This is a subject on which we would all be glad to hear from Mr. .Hall, now with us. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 241 I ^_/> i 1 >"" .6 . ^P -^ ^ --> * l^\ e--' T \f C$ V-^vP \ b.. r7\ I- 5 /" ; . /^ V~\ S ( V) 3 . .X?..... C..?r^.W...\..^y?..l<: /r>^>iX>X^.V-..n..^A.'^N - "X, . t> -i /r...y.T}.../T..r!..^ (p.A,.A. ^ 6 242 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. MR. HALL Mr. President and Gentlemen: In this connection allow me to say that, of course, all of the gentlemen present understand that the linseed oil manufacturers will only be too happy to arrange a schedule of prices whereby the jobbers can make a profit on linseed oil. It should be done. But will the jobbers I know you are laughing will the jobbers take the profit in case the chance is allowed them to make a profit ? SEVERAL VOICES Yes, sir; every time. MR. HALL Well, I doubt it. We are perfectly willing as an association I talk advisedly to allow jobbers a schedule of prices. We will be only too glad to co-operate and make all prices to correspond with what any of the committee you may appoint may recommend. We will give a schedule of prices making a single-barrel price of at least 2 cents a gallon more than the car-load prices. It seems to me that if that committee, that the Chair appoints, will first get the jobbing trade of Chicago to agree to hold to a schedule of prices, and then present them to us, I can assure the gentle- men present now that we will see to it, that their schedule of prices shall be met. [Applause.] THE PRESIDENT Mr. Secretary, have you any further business to present? SECRETARY PERSON No, sir. THE PRESIDENT If there is anything in the hands of any member that they desire to bring before this Club, it can be done at this time. MR. PETTET I would like to inquire what the By-Laws require in regard to the change of date for holding the meetings of the Club. THE PRESIDENT As it stands now, our meetings should be held on the second Thursday of 'each month. MR. PETTET I move that the By-Laws be changed to read the third Thursday instead of the second. MR. COFFIN I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT The motion is that our By-Laws be so amended that we may hold our meetings on the third Thursday of each month instead of the second Thursday. It will require unanimous consent to do this. Are there any remarks ? You have heard the motion. All those in favor will please say aye. It is carried. There is no further business. Gentlemen As .this is my first appearance in the chair, some of you may perhaps expect from me an inaugural address of two or three hours, but I met a friend on the street, who, in congratulating me on my election to the presidency of this Club, gave me a little advice. He said, "You must be serious; you must not talk too much." And as he is a gentleman in whom I have a great deal of confidence, I think I will follow his advice. 'At the same time, as I am talking, I will say that being called upon to pre- side over a representative body of business men, such as I see before me HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 243 ,/ ...^JS'. ..". V.. /^..o.. i _ r\ ^^c 9 y^ f c xD x V, V9 c 250 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. going to make a political speech here. I do not think the conditions under which we are now living can justify free trade. We can not yet handle the commerce of the world. Neither am I in favor of the making of laws which deny to our business men the opportunity to enjoy the trade of other countries. Let us modify our laws. I was very glad to hear of a remark made by Senator Sherman the other night, in which he was bold enough to say that the time had come when we must enact laws which would give our business men an opportunity to go into those countries south of us, on an equality with the British merchants. That is what we need, and that is what you should demand. As I said be- fore, gentlemen, I am not here to make a speech. I see a shorthand man here. I am not talking to newspapers. I have enjoyed the evening very much, and I hope you will prosper during the next year, and during the* coming years. I hope to see American commerce extended, and see the conditions more favorable to our merchants. I am obliged to you, gentle- men. [Applause.] THE PRESIDENT We have a gentleman here to-night from a State which has produced many great men. [A VOICE Ohio!] I allude to Indiana. There is a bond of sympathy between us, because he follows the same voca- tion as we do. We would like to .hear from Mr. Johnson, of Evansville, Indiana. MR. JOHNSON Mr. President and Gentlemen: I am no public speaker, but I have enjoyed this evening very much. It is true that I hail from the State of Indiana, but I have always considered myself an Illinois boy. I have watched the proceedings of this Club~\vith a good deal of interest, and I think it is a great benefit to the paint trade of this city. I thank you for the compliment of calling on me. As far as remarks are concerned, it is not my forte. THE PRESIDENT We would be glad now to hear from any member of the Club who cares to talk to us. MR. HAYES I think some remarks from our Vice- President would be in order. VICE-PRESIDENT HAINES Mr. President and Gentlemen: I thank you for the honor you have conferred upon me by electing me to the vice-presi- dency of this Club. Had I been present at the meeting at which the elec- tion was held, I think I should have objected. You all know I am a broker, and I think it would have been better if someone else had been elected as Vice-President of this Club. Still, I assure you, I understand and appreciate the honor; and I will do my best for the interests of the Club. In my regu- lar routine of business, I think I can further the interests of this Club as regards missionary work. I have been acquainted with it from its infancy, and have taken great interest in it. I think our city can well support a HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 251 r ^ r>> ..V\ ..... /rr%^ U <\ 252 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. club to further the interests of the paint, oil, and varnish trade. I wish tc again thank you, gentlemen, for the honor you have conferred upon me. and you can rest assured that I will do all in my power to deserve it. [Applause.] I would suggest that our friend, Mr. Cox, now address the meeting. MR. Cox Mr. President: I do not know that I have anything to say on this occasion, except to express my satisfaction at the election of our present officers. I am satisfied that they have not only the desired knowledge, but also the willingness, to subserve the interests of this Club, which I hope will be a success, not only this year, but in the years to come. VICE-PRESIDENT HAINES I would suggest that we hear from our valued friend, Mr. Senour. MR. SENOUR I hope you will excuse me this evening. I did not come prepared to say anything. MR. HALL r" you will allow me to make a suggestion this evening Mr. Kotzenburg is one of us. MR. KOTZENBURG Mr. Chairman: Since our last meeting, I was a citizen of the Town of Lake, the great Town of Lake in the Stock Yards. But now I am happy to say that I am a citizen of the good City of Chicago. I think the people can thank me for bringing the Town of Lake into Chicago. If it hadn't been for me, I guess it would not have come in. But I run mj little politics there. It came in with 600 majority, because I said it should. If I had told the people not to come in, they would have stayed out. [Laugh- ter.] I must tell the members here that Bridgeport is the greatest place for grinding paint. You want to buy Bridgeport river-water, to mix paint I will supply it to you for 50 cents a barrel. I hope you present will give me a little order right now. I must take an exception to Mr. Vice- Presi- dent. He don't seem to know that the brokers are the glory and beauty of our Club. THE VICE-PRESIDENT We would be very much pleased to hear from our worthy young friend, Mr. Aridrews. MR. ANDREWS Gentlemen, I beg to be excused. THE VICE-PRESIDENT Gentlemen: We have with us the representative of one of the largest and oldest houses of the City of Chicago Mr. Heath. I know we should all like to hear from him. MR. HEATH Mr. President and Gentlemen: Fourteen years ago, when 1 went into the paint business, I knew nothing about it. Thirteen years ago, I thought I knew a great deal about it. At the present time, I think I know a great deal more about the paint business than I do about public speaking I have had some curiosity, being one of the outsiders, to know how the meetings of the Paint Club were conducted, and I am very much pleased indeed to meet the class of gentlemen who are here this evening. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 2 53 YI vvw P..s*f...fc cf--V- /..VX^.... ^ ^ J "*] '"" ..."^ ._/ -A 1 _ _D._/ J J I ' \ \ =r- ,-& ftp QJ . ..<^...:../...T....c: b /... ( P..!....^_ .n .....\ A . N x V v ^ V v - ^ ^**^ ( \^ S "^\ P /^ V^^i N * "\ d^fV C^s^_-^ \Q K * ^ Y ^ - v "' A "--^ irV\P V ^" y 254 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. and notice the manner in which the meeting has been conducted. There are a great many points which ought to be brought up for general discus- sion among the manufacturers and jobbers of goods in mr line, particu- larly at the present time linseed oil and white lead. Both these subjects have been discussed to the point. And, if it will not be going beyond the limits, as it were, and if you will permit an outsider to express an opinion, I would like to say one or two things in regard to the system of rebates to the jobbers. I think you will all agree with me that in the past, where there has been a provision made with a jobber for a profit, there has been more or less anxiety on the part of some of the jobbers to divide that profit, with the idea of increasing sales, and, as I have looked upon the subject, the manufacturers have never before been in the position where they could go to the jobbing trade and absolutely enforce their system of rebates. We have all been called upon at times in the past to sign agreements to uphold certain prices made by the manufacturers, and we have all willingly gone into such agreements in good faith; but something has come up whereby a little inducement has been offered and before a great time had elapsed, it was quite general on the part of the trade to divide the rebate, and before long it amounted to nothing.- Now, as I understand the matter, both these industries are conducted in such a manner that the manufacturers are in a position to absolutely enforce a price and hold jobbers strictly to the enforce- ment of that price. In other words, jobbers who agree to maintain the prices fixed by the manufacturers under the penalty of having supplies cut off, can now be held rigidly to the enforcement of prices. I hope that the committee, which has been appointed to-night, will present these facts to these manufacturers, and use their utmost endeavors to have the provisions of same secured in such a way as to adequately com- pensate the jobbing trade for pushing these ideas. (Applause) THE VICE-PRESIDENT I think the members of the Club would be only too happy to hear from our venerable friend, Mr. Coffin. MR. COFFIN Mr. President and Gentlemen: I have listened to the re- marks of our President, and the advice that was given to him by some good friend not to talk too much. Why, it seems as though he hit my case. For the past year, or during the last season, it seems to have fallen upon me to present various subjects for discussion, and to do more or less talking at these Club meetings, and I feel as though I ought to be excused. I feel confident that we have in our Club a number of gentlemen who are able to stand up here and present subjects for discussion much better than I have ever done in the past; but I think to-night we can congratulate ourselves upon the outlook for the future. . I think I express the sentiment of every gentleman present when I say that we feel highly honored to-night by the HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 255 .y( V, ... 256 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. presence of Hon. Judge Gresham. I think a few meetings of this -kind, with guests that are so able, so competent to talk to us upon the subjects of the day, is what we need as business men, and the social features of our Club meetings can go right along with it. We are learning together how to properly handle the subjects that should come before us. I can not say very much to-night, Mr. President, after the eloquence we have listened to; but I will say this that I had fully made up my mind to resign from the Committee on Entertainment, but we have started under such auspicious cir- cumstances that I will try to do the best I can. I think also I express the sentiment of all the members when I say that we have listened with a great deal of pleasure to the remarks of Mr. Heath, that there are subjects for us to take up of vital importance, so that we can accomplish more the coming season than we did the past one. We surely accomplished something the past year, and we can accomplish a good deal more this year. I think, as Mr. Cox said, that we are to be congratulated upon the selection of ou" officers, and with the help of every member of the Club coming to oui meetings regularly, it seems to me that the success of the Paint, Oil, anc Varnish Club is assured. [Applause.] SEVERAL VOICES Wadsworth! Wadsworth! Let us hear from Wadsworth! MR. WADSWORTH Mr. President: I have need to congratulate the Club upon the character of the new officers elected and the way in which they have taken hold of business. I know that this Club can be made an instru- ment of a great deal of good in Chicago. The question has been raised as to whether the jobbers would stand by any agreement that they made in regard to prices on linseed oil. It was a very great surprise to me, and I think to all the members of the Boston Club, to see the way they have done it in Boston. I presume there has never been a case there where they had gone back upon their agreement, except through some misunderstanding, when first started. I know something can be done here, and if we all take hold and help our new officers we can make a success of this Club, and it will be a great thing for us financially as well as socially. It is very much more agreeable for men in the same business to meet socially and for busi- ness purposes combined. It makes them feel more generous. We get acquainted with them, and we feel like living and letting live, and we can give quotations after getting acquainted with our competitors, that we would not give otherwise. We feel they are pretty good fellows, after all, and we would rather take a good profit than a small one. I hope we will have a very successful year, that the Club membership may increase, and the interest be a benefit to all of us. [Applause.] THE VICE-PRESIDENT We would now like to hear from Mr. Pettet. MR. PETTET I move we adjourn. Mr. PRESIDENT A motion to adjourn is always in order, but I don't HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 257 :..cJ i > &( __-4 "/"V.c-Ve"* fcr / ^ Vfc^X I W-cX XO / I ex -oLDK-V"" ** C '- 0/ - - t -->^ 258 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. see how you can get out of making a few remarks. We know you can write a good letter. MR. PETTET Mr. President, I call for the question. THE VICE-PRESIDENT Speak on the Credit Bureau. MR. PETTET As I understand it, the Credit Bureau is a close corpora- tion. I hardly think it would be proper for me to talk about it before com- pany. But, Mr. President, before the motion to adjourn prevails, I want to say a few words in reference to the distinguished General, the upright Judge, who, though he may know nothing about the paint business, has earned our thanks by compelling the railroads to pay something for their paint. I move that a rising vote of thanks be extended to Judge Gresham for his attendance here this evening. THE PRESIDENT All members in favor of a rising vote of thanks to our distinguished guest will please stand. I am glad to see that all of us are on our feet. We will now be seated. MR. PETTET I move a vote of thanks be also extended to our Enter- tainment Committee. MR. Cox I second the motion. THE PRESIDENT Those favorable to the motion will please say aye. So ordered. The motion to adjourn being now in order, if there is no objection we stand adjourned until the third Thursday of next month. AUTHOR'S NOTE. The student who has finished the business letters, court cases, and the foregoing convention report, has now received practice virtually in all styles of shorthand reporting,for the last named, convention reporting, contains also speeches as well as debate, thereby including oratory, under which head come sermons, ora- ions, lectures and the like, all of which are only different names for the same class of work, known by the general term of speech-making. The student cannot review these exercises too often. They should be practised until they are known so thoroughly that all the phrases may be made almost as written in the plates. Such following of phrasing is not necessary in general, for the same person will not always phrase the same words in the same way, but such fami'iarity will greatly facilitate the students' ease in phrasing in all work. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 259 . v ..^ c/ 260 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. EXPLANATORY NOTES. On these pages, 261 to 270, we present an exact fac-simile, as it appeared in a Chicago trade-newspaper, of the convention or meeting which we have given in full on pages 234 to 259. It is shown on these pages 261 to 270 as edited before printing, the unnecessary portions being either expunged or rewritten, and in most cases descriptively con- densed, while occasionally descriptions occur for acts which were not utterances and therefore not found in notes commencing page 235. The verbatim report commencing on page 234, as will be seen by the shorthand notes opposite those pages, could only contain the infor- mation which the reporter jots down before the meeting is called to order and the actual remarks of the speakers, commencing with the opening words of the president, and the names or titles of the speakers, which the phonographer writes as the remarks are being made. For this reason, the heading of the report as given on opposite page, com- mencing with the title: " A Notable Event," and including the first and second paragraphs as they appear on that page, are necessar- ily merely descriptive and not verbatim. Even the words of the president in opening a meeting, are not printed in a general newspaper report, and they are therefore not to be found on opposite page. The minutes of the preceding meeting are also neither printed nor do they appear in the shorthand notes on page 235, as the stenographer does not need them, the two lines of third paragraph of report on op- posite page fully covering the subject of the minutes, including Mr. Coffin's motion for their acceptance, and the seconding of same by Mr. Pettet, shown on page 234. Similarly with the report of the treasurer, which, when no figures are given, is sometimes condensed as shown in fourth paragraph on opposite page. By comparing these paragraphs on opposite page with the ver- batim wording of same commencing on page 234, the student will also observe quite a considerable omission in this trade paper report. For instance, the answer of Mr. Cox to a call of the president for re- port of Membership Committee, with the discussion between Mr. Rosenthal and the president, has been condensed into three lines, as shown by our fifth paragraph in report on opposite page. The report of Mr. Wadsworth, of the Committee on Credits, is similarly treated, while the six lines of last paragraph of page opposite are used in place of nearly the entire latter half of page 236 in our full report. HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 26l HOW THE CHICAGO PAINT, OIL AND VARNISH CLUB COMBINES AN EXCHANGE OF SOCIAL COURTESY WITH TIMELY DISCUSSION OF THE LIVE TOPICS OF THE DAY, IN THEIR OCTOBER MEETING. Jndge Gresham, the Guest of the Evening. The first actual verbatim work shown in this trade newspaper re- port are the resolutions of page 262, indicated by fourth and fifth para- graphs of page 238 of the verbatim report. Thus it will be seen that some two pages of shorthand have betii condensed into the space of a few paragraphs in this trade newspaper report, which is supposed to be a very full one, tlie condensation, ir tb.v? case, being caused both by entirely ignoring some remarks of speaker: and simply describing others. The words which members use in sec ending a motion and the words of the President in putting a motion, to- gether with the words which he A KOTABIjE uses in stating that the motion has passed, or not, being never quoted in a newspaper re- port, no matter how full the re- port is to be; such matters be- ing simply de- scribed as on this and next page, for it will be seen that after the reading of the first resolution on page 262 quite considerable was said by the president and secretary, which appears in complete re- port on pages 238 and 240, for which, on page 262, the reporter has contented himself with simply writing two words, "So ordered.'' Almost the same sort of condensation has been used on page 262 with the two motions o^ Mr. Coffin, down to the presentation by the sec- retary of the second verbatim resolution, and even the motion of Mr. Pettet has been re- duced to two lines, the call from the president Thirty representatives of the Paint, Oil and Varnish Club of this city attended the October meeting, at the rooms of the Union League, on Thursday evening last. Aft^-r a sumptuous spread, the discussion of which, with social intercourse, occupied the early part of the evening, the club was called to order by the newly-elected president, G. H. Vrooman- Secretary'Person read the minutes of the previous meeting, which were accepted as read. Report of Treasurer Rosenthal being next in order, that gentleman asked to be excused on the ground that he had only sent out the bills a week ago, and had not had time to hear from more.than a small part of them. He assured the gentlemen present, however, that there was enough in the treasury to pay for the night's dinner, and by the next meeting he expected to be in a position to give a regular report. Mr. Cox, Chairman of Committee on Membership, stated that his committee had as yet not begun active business, on account of the little time that had elapsed since appointment. Mr. Wad-worth, on behalf of the Committee on Credits, asked for further time to prepare a report. Granted. President Vrooman, for the Committee on Naphtha, appoint- ed to regulate the price of Naphtha in small lots, reported Iliat an agreement had been drawn up by the committee and circulated for signatures among the trade. Twenty-three signatures were obtained, and it was the judgment of the committee that further work was necessary. 262 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. upon Mr. Hall, for an expression of opinion, being changed from a verbatim paragraph tc three lines. The first verbatim re marks printed in this trade newspaper re- port arethose whichMr. Hall makes, commenc- ing with the last two lines at the bottom of this page, and even in those it will be noticed that his first words "In this connection allow me to say that," which appear in the verbatim report on page 242, are omitted from the para- graph here, a well The regular business of the meeting being at an end, and miscellaneous business being in order, Mr. Rosenthal pre- sented a resolution requesting the Executive Committee to lay before the next regular meeting of the Club, nominations for delegates to the National Convention to be held in Detroit, with such suggestions as may appear necessary at the time. Carried. Secretary Person read the following resolution, which had been handed to him; WHEREAS, A great change has taken place in the white lead industry caused by the consolidation of private firms into the National White Lead Trust, which has had the effect of plac- ing the manufacture of white lead upon a more profitable basis; be it Resolved, That it is the sense of this Club that the rebate now being allowed to the jobbing trade is inadequate and un- satisfactory, and we respectfully ask the National White Lead Trust, when formulating their plans for the coming year, to arrange for a more liberal rebate to jobbers, and also take into consideration the claims of paint grinders for an equitable price on dry lead. So ordered. On motion of Mr. Coffin, a committee of three, consisting of Messrs. Weare, Cutler and Person, was appointed to pre- sent this resolution to the National Wholesale Druggists' con- vention to be held at Indianapolis on the 22ad instant. On motion of Mr. Coffin, the Secretary was instructed to send a copy of the above resolution fto each of the different- paint clubs ofl the United States, and to ask for their co- operation. Secretary Person presented the following resolution, handed to him: WHEREAS, The jobbing trade of linseed oil at the prevail- ing rates is unprofitable and opposed to good business, and believing that the manufacturers are desirous of establishing, and having maintained, a schedule of prices which will place this article on a proper basis, be it therefore Resolved, That this Club urge upon the manufacturers of linseed oil the importance of making a range of prices for quantities which shall be equitable and afford a margin of profit to the dealers handling this product. Resolved, That this Club and its members will heartily co- operate in such action and maintain the prices so established. On motion of Mr. Pettet the Chair was authorized to appoint a committee to present this to the National Linseed Oil Co. Mr. Hall, being called upon for an expression of opinion respecting the resolution just passed, readily responded as follows: Mr. President and Gentlemen: Of course, all the gentle- men present understand that the linseed oil manufacturers HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 263 as the interruption by several voices, which said "Yes sir, every time" (on page 242) and Mr. Hall's answer "Well, I doubt it," those words being omitted as irrelevant and unnecessary. The sentences com- mencing with fourth paragraph on page 242 and ending with next to last paragraph on same page, have been condensed into forr lines here, the next verbatim work printed in this trade newspaper report being the speech of the president, in re- gard to his election, commencing with the words "Gentlemen, as thi v .s mv nrst appear- ance ." etc- This is will only be too happy to arrange a schedule of prices whereby the jobbers can make a profit on linseed oil. It should be done, but will the jobber -I know you are laughing will the jobbers take the profit in case the chance is allowed them to make a profit? We ai - e perfectly willing as an association I talk advisedly to allow jobbers a schedule of prices. "We will be only too glad to co-operate and make all prices to corres- pond with what any of the committee you may appoint may recommend. We will give a schedule of prices making a sin- gle barrel price of at least two cents a gallon more than the carload prices. It seems to me that if the committee that the chair appoints will first get the jobbing trade of Chicago to agree to hold to a schedule of prices and then present them to us, I can assure the gentlemen present now that we will see to it that their schedule of prices shall be met. (Applause.) On motion of Mr. Pettet, the By-Laws were, by unanimous consent, amended to read that the regular monthly meeting be held on the third Thursday instead of the second Thursday of each month. This concluding the business of the meeting, President Vrooman arose and said: Gentlemen: As this is my first appearance in the chair, some of you may perhaps expect from me an inaugural ad- dress of two or three hours, but I met a friend on the street, who, in congratulating me on my election to the presidency of this club, gave me a little advice. He said, "y u must be serious; you must not talk too much.' 1 And, as he is a gentle- man in whom I have a great deal of confidence, I think I will follow his advice. At the same time, as I am talking, I will say that, being called upon to preside over a representative body of business men, such as I see before me to-night men whose intelligence, industry and perseverance has placed our city in the front rank of our line of business is no mean honor. I thank you for this expression of your confidence and esteem, and yet I beg to assure you, that I accept, with much hesitancy, this chair which has been filled for the past two years so ably and well by my esteemed predecessor John Alston. His rulings were just, his conduct kind and generous, his stories,, from my standpoint, good his jokes, sometimes at our expense, agreeable. His quaint Scotch ways have en- deared him to all of us, and though we have lost him as our president, against our wishes, we hope to see him frequently at our meetings. He will always be welcome. I desire, at the same time, to remind you that without your cordial support and assistance, your officers can accom- plish nothing. We hope with your co-operation to make the coming year a prosperous one in the history of this Club. We hope to make a record that will encourage the formation of other clubs in competing cities of the West, to enable us to 264 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. given in full, in both these reports, the news- paper report interpo- lated with the three lines right here not shown in the verbatim report, these three lines being descriptive and commencing with an expression respect Ing the applause which followed the speech, preceding the introduc- tion of Judge Gresham. carry forward with greater ease the reforms which should be the object and aim and interests of this Club . We hope to prosper so that in 1892, when the paint trade of New York, Washington and St. Louis come here to attend the World's Fair, we can entertain them in a manner that will remind them that when Columbus discovered America.it was not only Manhattan Island and the Potomac flats and Shaw's Garden that was discovered, but the entire continent extending from ocean to ocean, where we are to have in the twentieth cen- tury, according to Bellamy, no army, no navy, no merchants, no money, no servant girls, no saloons, no courthouses con- sequently few lawyers and judges it is expected that the Cronin trial will be finished by that time but we will have a grand industrial army controlled and operated by a happy and contented people, sharing alike in the profits of the in- dustries, all of which will be in keeping with the greatness of the nation. What an Utopia to contemplate? In the mean- time, we live in a different era an era in which competition is severe, requiring the best thought and patience, of organi- zations like this, to correct abuses and to enable us to make from our business a profit compensating us for the capital in- vested and the time and energy devoted to its pursuit. In my opinion the solution of o.ur difficulties lies in co-operation, and I believe the membership of this Club is equal to the oc- casion. I believe that they will commit no step backward, but that they will grasp and solve the difficult problems and that our progress will be onward and upward, until Chicago stands without a peer in the manufacture and sale of paints, oils and varnish. Enthusiastic applause followed these remarks. President Vrooman then introduced the distinguished guest of the evening, in these well-chosen words: As a soldier,as a statesman, as a jurist, the name of Gresham is a part of the history of our land (Applause). One cannot be written without the other. I now have the honor, gentle- men, of presenting to you Judge Walter Q. Gresham, who will address you. JUDGE GRESHAM. Gentlemen : I fear that you have mis- taken this introduction of your president to have been some- what sought on my part. I am invited as your guest, and not as one who is expected to address you. I have enjoyed the evening very much, and why should I be called upon to ad- dress an assemblage of business men this body of men rep- resenting a particular branch of trade the oil, paint and varnish business? It is not because I know anything about it. It is safe to say that I know less about it very much less than any one else in this room. What the president's good friend said to him on the street, it would be well for me to observenot to HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 265 Judge G r e s h a m ' s talk too much. That was good advice. It would be well f 01 ipeech is given verba- . ., many men if they received such advice and heeded it. Time was when men were in demand simply because they could talk whether they said anything or not. The men who are in demand now are men who can think and act. Some of you are old enough to remember the campaign of 1858, in which Mr. Lincoln and Judge Douglass canvassed this state as representatives of the two great parties. It was a famous campaign. Perhaps such a campaign never occurred before. Certainly, there has not been such a match in this country since, in any state. Mr. Lincoln's friends gave him a reception at Bloomington, as Judge Douglass' friends did also. A gentleman was selected who was happy who was gifted- -in the way of speech. He could talk gracefully and pleasantly, whether he said much or not. He was very happy, on that occasion, receiving and presenting Mr. Lincoln to the people, but Mr. Lincoln was not quite so happy in his response as the Judge was in his re- marks- Mr. Lincoln's mind was such that he needed some question to discuss--he could not talk into the air very well-- his little speech was not satisfactory to him, perhaps not to his friends. It was not his forte. And, at the dinner party, he paid the gentleman who made the address a rather ques- tionable compliment. Addressing him, he said: "Judge, you have one talent that I envy you the possession of very much." The judge was flattered. Said he, "Mr. Lincoln, what is that, if I may ask?" "Judge, it is the ability to talk as you do and not say anything." There are such men. But, as I said, their occupation is pretty much gone, and it is well it is so. I am glad to see a meeting of this kind to-night. You, gentlemen, are no doubt engaged in sharp rivalry, but you meet around this social board in a friendly way, and discuss questions affecting your welfare. What you see here is going on in other departments of trade. It shows the mental activity of those who attend them. These meetings stimulate thought. You learn your own business better; and, by the way, while I do not under- stand this question of paint, oil and other things, there is one thing that I can observe and do observe. And that is this: There is no longer the opportunity for individual enter- prise that existed twenty-five years ago, I am not going to enter into a discussion of this question. I am not going tojsay anything about who is right or who is wrong. It is not the time nor is it the place. But, with these large bodies of associated capital, which we find not only in your business but in all departments of trade, what show is there for merely individual enterprises? Very little. What is going to be the outcome of it? I do not know. The time has come when the business men of the country must assert 266 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPH" tim in both reports, themselves. Wrds of President Vrooman in relation to Mr. Johnson, whom he no- ticed with the sentence commencing "We have a gentleman here to- night, from a state which has produced many great men." Some one interrupted just then by calling cut "Ohio," which circum- stance will be found in the verbatim report on page 250, but which the reporter did not think it necessary to print in the trade newspaper; he also, for the same reason, omitting the concluding sentence of Mr. Johnson's remarks, where he said "As far as remarks are con- cerned, it is not my forte.'' The remarks of the president and Mr. Hayes referring to the vice president, shown on page 25o,are omitted from this trade paper report, two descriptive lines being substituted. Mr. Haines' remarks are given in full, ex- cept his concluding words found on page 252, beginning"! would suggest," etc. Other liberties are taken with this report to make it applicable for newspaper use, such as the omission of Vice President Haines' suggestion regarding the time had come when we must enact laws which would give oui- business men an opportunity to go into those coun- tries south of us, on an equality with the British merchants. That is what we need and that is what you should demand. As I said before, gentlemen, I am not here to make a speech. I see a shorthand man here. I am not talking to newspapers. I have enjoyed the evening very much and I hope you will prosper during the next year and during the coming years. I hope to see American commerce extended and see the con- ditions more favorable to our merchants. I am obliged to you. gentlemen. The applause which followed these remarks of the distin- guished guest was hearty and continued for several minutes, after which President Vrooman arose and said: We have a gentleman here to-night from a state which has produced many great men. I allude to Indiana. There is a bond of sympathy between us, because he follows the same vocation as we do. We would like to hear from Mr. Johnson, of Evanbville, Indiana. MR. JOHNSON. Mr. President and gentlemen; I am no public speaker, but I have enjoyed this evening very much. It is true that I hail from the state of Indiana, but I have al- ways considered myself an Illinois boy. I have watched the proceedings of this Club with a good deal of interest, and I think it is a great benefit to the paint trade of this city. I thank you for the compliment of calling on me. Mr. Haines, the vice-president of the Club, being called for, spoke as follows: Mr. President and gentlemen: I thank you for the honor you have conferred upon me by electing me to the vice-presi- dency of this Club. Had I been present at the meeting at which the election was held, I think I should have objected. You all know I am a broker, and I think it would have been better if some one else had been elected as vice-president of this Club. Still, I assure you I understand and appreciate the honor, and I will do my best for the interests of the Club. In my regular routine of business I think I can further the interests of this Club as regards missionary work. I have been acquainted with it from its infancy and have taken great interest in it. I think our city can well support a club to further the interests of the paint, oil and varnish trade. I wish to again thank you, gentlemen, for the honor you have conferred upon me, and you can rest assured that I will do all in my power to deserve it. (Applause.) Mr. Cox was next called for and said : I do not know that I have anything to say on this occasion, except to express my satisfaction at the election of our present officers. I am satis- fied that they have not only the desired knowledge, but also the willingness, to subserve the interests of this Club, which I 268 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Mr. Senour. and the latter's reply, to which in this report only two descriptive lines are de- voted. Mr. Kotzenberg's remarks are given in full, but not Vice Presi- dent Haines' call for Mr. Andrews, nor the latter's request to be excused. The request of Vice President Haines for remarks by Mr. Heath, and Mr. Heath's reply are given verbatim with the exception of hope will be a success, not only this year, but in the years to come. Mr. Senour was called for, but asked to be excused from speaking, as he was quite unprepared. Mr. Kotzenberg was called. He said: Mr. Chairman: Since our last meeting, I was a citizen of the Town of Lake, the great Town of Lake in the Stock Yards. But now I am happy to say that I am a citizen of the good city of Chicago. I think the people can thank me for bringing the Town of Lake into Chicago. If it hadn't been for me I guess it would not have come in. But I run my little politics there. It came in with 600 majority because I said it should. If I had told the people not to come in, they would have stayed out. (Laughter.) I must tell the members here that Bridgeport is the greatest place for grinding paint. You want to buv Bridgeport river water to mix paint. I will supply it to you for fifty cents a barrel. I hope you present will give me a little order right now. I must take an exception to Mr. Vice-President. He don't seem to know that the brokers are the glory and beauty of our Club. THE VICE-PRESIDENT. Gentlemen, we have with us the representative of one of the largest and oldest houses of the city of Chicago Mr. Heath. I know we should all like to hear from him. MR. HEATH. Mr. President and gentlemen; Fourteen years ago, when I went into the paint business, I knew nothing about it. Thirteen years ago I thought I knew a great deal about it. Atthe present time I think I know a great deal more about the paint business than I do about public speaking. I have had some curiosity, being one of the outsiders, to know how the meetings of the Paint Club were conducted, and I am very much pleased indeed to meet the class of gen- tlemen who are here this evening, and notice the manner in which the meeting has been conducted. There are a great many points which ought to be brought up for general dis- cussion among the manufacturers and jobbers of goods in our line,particularlyat the present time- -linseed oil and white lead. Both these subjects have been discussed to the point; and, if it will not be going beyond the limits, as it were, and if you will permit an outsider to express an opinion, I would like to say one or two things in regxrd to the system of rebates to the jobbers. I think you will all agree with me that in the past, where there has [been a provision made with a jobber for a profit, there has been more or less anxiety on the part of some of the jobbers to divide that profit, with the idea of increasing sales, and, as I have looked upon the subject, the manufacturers have never before been in the position where they could go to the jobbing trade and absolutely enforce their system of rebates. We have all been called upon at times in the pasfc HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 269 his last two words "these ideas" which are changed to the word "sales' 1 in this newspaper report as better expressive of the intended meaning. Vice President Haines' call lor Mr. Coffin has been reduced to one descriptive line, bat the reply is given verbal' m. to sign agreements to uphold certain prices, ma le by the manui'acturers, an J we have all willingly gone into such agree- ments in good faith, but something has come up whereby a little inducement has been offered and, before a groat time had elapsed, it was quite general on the part of the trade to divide the rebate, and, before long, it amounted to nothing. Now, as I understand the matter, both these industries are conducted in such a manner that the manufacturers are in a position to absolutely enforce a price and hold jobbers strictly to the enforcement of that price. In other words, jobbers who agree to maintain the prices fixed by the manu- facturers, under the penalty of having supplies cut off, can now be held rigidly to the enforcement of prices. I hope that the committee which has been appointed to- night will present these facts to these manufacturers and use their utmost endeavors to have the provisions of same secured in such a wny as to adequately compensate the jobbing trade for pushing sales. MR. COFFIN, being called for, responded as follows: Mr. President and gentlemen: I have listened to the re- marks of the president, and the advice that was given to him by some good friend not to talk too much. Why, it seems as though he bit my case. For the past year, or during the last season, it seems to have fallen upon me to present various subjects for disi-ussion, and to do more or less talking at these Club meetings, and I feel as though I ought to be ex- cused. I feel confident that we have in our Club a number of gentlemen who are able to stand up here and present subjects for discussion much better thau I have ever done in the past, but I think to-night we can congratulate ourselves upon the outlook for the future. I think I express the sentiment of every gentleman present when I say that we feel highly hon- ored tocight by the presence of Hon. Judge Gresham. I think a few meetings of this kind, with guests that are so able, so competent to talk to us upon the subjects of the day, is what we need as business men, and the social feature of our Club meetings can go right along with it. We are learning together how to properly handle the subjects that should come before us. I cannot say very much tonight, Mr. Presi- dent, after the eloquence we have listened to, but I will say this that I had fully made up my mind to resign from the Committee on Entertainment, but we have started under such auspicious circumstances that I will try to do the best I can. I think, also, I express the sentiment of all the members when I say that we have listened with a great deal of pleasure to the remarks of Mr. Heath that there are subjects for us to take up of vital importance so that we can accomplish more the coming season than we did the past one. We surely ac- complished something the past year, and we can accomplish 2/0 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. The call of several members for Mr.Wads- worth has a descriptive line substituted for it. Mr, Wadsworth's re- ply and the six para- graphs which follow on this page are the same in both reports. After this, from the wording commencing with the request of the president for a rising vote of thanks, to the words which decided the adjournment, the reporter thought best to let a few final de- scriptive lines suffice. These comparisons explain by exact illus" tration, the precise dit ferences between a ver- batim report which an association desires for its own use, and what is known as a news- paper verbatim report. In the latter, unneces- sary words are elimin- ated, sometimes en- tirely ignored; at other times have descriptive paragraphs substituted for them; while in still . other instances occur descriptive paragraphs which do not relate to anything which has been said, but rather to surrounding circum- stances, such as the opening paragraphs of this report indicate. The newspaper re- port, nearly verbatim, requires some literary ability the verbatim report, none. If the stenographer has the literary ability, he edits this himself; if not, the editor of the paper takes the verbatim transcription and cuts it up just as the report on pages 234 to 258 is shown to be reduced on these pages 261 to 270. Different editors may have different ideas sometimes respecting the condensation of certain paragraphs, and how m ich verba- tim copy to use, but in the main the principle is the same the minor particulars being mat- ters of individual judg- ment or choice. a good deal more this year. I think, as Mr. Cox said, that w are to be congratulated upon the selection of our officers, and with the help of every member of the Club coming to our meetings regularly, it seems to me that the success of the Paint, Oil and Varnish Club is assured. Mr. WADSWORTH, in response to repeated calls, said: Mr. President : I have need to congratulate the Club upon the character of the new officers elected, and the way in which they have taken hold of business. I know that this Club can be made an instrument of a great deal of good in Chicago. The question has been raised as to whether the jobbers would stand by any agreement that they made in regard to prices in lard and oil. It was a very great surprise to me, and I think to all the members of the Boston Club, to see the way they have done it in Boston. I presume there has never been a case there where they have gone back upon their agreement, except through some misunderstanding, when first started. I know something can be done here, and if we all take hold and help our new officers we can make a success of this Club, and it will be a great thing for us, financially as well as socially. It is very much more agreeable for men iu the same business to meet socially and for business purposes combined. It makes them feel more generous. We get acquainted with them and wo feel like living and letting live, and we can give quotations,after getting acquainted with our competitors, that we would not give otherwise. We feel they are pretty good fellows, after all, aud we would rather take a good profit than a small one. I hope we will have a very successful year, that the Club membership may increase, and the interest be a benefit to all of us. (Applause.) THE VICE-PRESIDENT. -We would now like to hear from Mr. Pettet. MR. PETTET. I move we adjourn. MR. PRESIDENT. A motion to adjourn is always in order, but I don't see how you can get out of making a few remarks. We know you can write a good letter. MR. PETTET. --Mr. President, I call for the question. THE VICE-PRESIDENT. --Speak on the Credit Bureau. MR. PETTET.- As I understand it, the Credit Bureau is a close corporation. I hardly think it would be proper for me to talk about it before company. But, Mr. President, before the motion to adjourn prevails, I want to say a few words in reference to the distinguished general, the upright judge, who, though he may know nothing about the paint business, has earned our thanks by compelling the railroads to pay something for their paint. I move that arising vote of thanks be extended to Judge Gresham for his attendance here this evening. The response was general, after which a vote of thanks was extended to the Entertainment Committee, and the Club adjourned. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 271 SPEECH REPORTING. The reporting of orations, sermons, legal arguments, addresses, etc., all of which are included under the one general term of Speech Re- porting, is of .a nature which sometimes taxes the skill of the reporter to the utmost, and is also oftentimes quite easy. It depends greatly upon the knowledge of both the speaker and the reporter. If the speaker be not very well posted, or is speaking upon a subject which calls for no technicalities and wherein plain talk alone is necessary, the reporter need not be learned or well educated, so long as he has suffi- cient speed. On the other hand, if the subject matter of a speech be a technical one unfamiliar to the masses, or abounding in references to ancient historical or mythological personages or places, obsolete works, etc., known only to the well educated, the reporter must needs be a well read person, since no one can write with certainty a word or phrase with which they never before met. Fortunately, most speeches are composed of simple words and fa- miliar phrases, so that the ordinary reporter, with a common school education, can report them, if the proper speed is possessed. In this latter particular speed there are great differences in speakers. Some will not speak much above *ioo words a minute, while others will speak 150 to 200 words a minute quite freely. There are even some few who, upon themes in which they are especially well posted, will speak at the rate of 300 words a minute for a while, and the au- thor has met two individualsin his time (Rev. Father Maturin, then of St. Clement's Church, Philadelphia, and Rev. Dr. Samuel R. Garrison, for years pastor of St. Paul's Church, Camden, N. J.) who, in the excite- ment of a well rounded period relating to special subjects, attained the wonderful speed, under actual count, of 325 words a minute for a minute or two at a time. The Rev. Phillips Brooks is also credited with similar speed, it being claimed he was never reported verbatim. It is well such great speed of utterance is limited to few speakers and to them only upon occasions. The best reporter, unless thor- oughly self-possessed and with a splendid memory, would naturally lose such sentences, but, as the speaker must stop to take breath, a good memory and a cool head enables the reporter to catch up, yet he must have these natural abilities, together with a complete knowledge of every abbreviating principle in this book to do it. All presentations of shorthand, except that in this book, have failed under such tests. The average of speech-making, despite the above given maximum, is but 1 20 to 150 words per minute, and the speeches (all kinds) are so nearly, under all conditions, but a repetition of the convention work herein and the following speech of Mr. Francis Murphy, that the entire field is thus fully covered, aided, of course, by the abbreviations given in our lessons and review exercises. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. A LECTURE BY FRANCIS MURPHY, THE TEMPERANCE ORATOR. This portion of the book would scarcely be complete without an illustration of the speed which Practical Phonography is capable of when highest speed may be needed. To this end we give below a verbatim report of a six minutes' speech of Mr. Francis Murphy, the temperance orator, delivered on the evening of May 8, 1877, in the Third Street M. E. Church, of Camden, N. J., on which occasion the author was engaged by the Dat'/y Postoi that city, in which paper the transcription be- low appeared the next day, filling two columns of the paper. Mr. Murphy was only one of the speakers of the evening, and the reason the number of minutes he spoke was known, was because he was timed by the chairman, in order that he might be sure to catch the ferry boat which would take him across the river to Philadelphia in time for him to speak at two meetings there. As the ferry boats then made trips only once every half hour, it will be understood how necessary it was for the proper boat to be caught and for the chairman to time the speaker. By counting the words in the speech, it will be seen that the last three minutes a rate of 230 words a minute was made, and by the first three minutes 288 words a minute, or an average of 259 words a minute for the six minutes, a speed of writing seldom attained by any other system of shorthand than that represented in this book. Mr. Chairman and my friends: I am very glad to do myself the honor of coming to your city and speaking a few words upon a subject that I know is deeply interesting to you the subject of total abstinence from intoxicating liquor. I have only a few moments to be with you, for I am going across the river to speak at two meetings there I am obliged' to catch the quarter of eight boat, and what can I say to you in the few moments that are allotted to me? Simply this: This work that we are now engaged in is a work of malice towards none and charity for all; for the liquor seller and for the liquor drinker especially, If these men who are engaged in the business, and those men who die in- temperate, were made to believe that those who do not drink are their friends, a great trouble would be overcome and the cause of total absti- nence benefitted. But we act coldly, and many of that class of men that we are desirous of reaching we have driven away from us. We have so talked about the liquor seller that we could not did not say "come and be one of us." Now, if we gain success in this kind of work, we must invite all, plead with all. You need not try to compel a man to be sober. You must persuade. Appeal to his honor, his in- tegrity; to his home, to his country, and to his God. Our work, so far, has been signally blest of God signally blest. Men who have been the victims of intoxicating liquor have signed the pledge; men who have been engaged in the sale of it have given up HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 273 tv- V V V a o S3 c , v-v ":V ^ c \ ^ |\ ) ->\^ \ e o 274 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. their business, and are now within the ranks of total abstinence. They are working with us with a zeal, with a patience, and with a cheer that shows in themselves the beauty and grandeur of this reform. A great fault with the Christians is, we have allowed the cause of total absti- nence to be established OUT OF THE CHURCH. I say this for a truth, and there are many things that testify to this fact. We allow ourselves to grow indifferent about it. We do not feel deeply about it, and so make no attempt to do good in this direction. You can tell a man anything but his faults. He will let you pat him on the back and say he is a splendid fellow. You may praise him to the highest heaven; but tell him of his faults, and he begins to feel a little different. It is nice to be patted on the back and to be told you are a good fellow a fine lady; but when the Holy Spirit asks to show you ALL THINGS, he shows you views that you do not like. The peace of God comes to us by doing the will of God, and that work is accomplished by the heart yielding obedience to the truth. Therefore, I say to you that the strangest thing in the present age is that Christian people make a claim of being exceptional, and yet they do not like very much to be told of their faults. I confess to that same fault. When a good brother takes me by the arm and says: "Frank, I don't like what you said a moment ago," or "What you said last evening should have been left unsaid," I feel rebuked. But it is not always very comfortable to me. I declare I think we are like the little people attending school. They like all of them to be pronounced very excellent scholars, whether they are so or not. I believe, withal, my friends, that this country will be revolutionized by this reform, but it can only be done by the people totally abstaining from intoxicating liquors. You need not undertake to stop those in the business from selling or buying. Let the people stop buying and the work is accomplished. The man who is in the business of selling liquor will be unable to sell. But we have got to stop buying. That's the thing! Then, you see, instead of the man stopping in a saloon on the way home Saturday evening, and coming home intoxicated, and the most of his money gone, he walks right home to Sallie Ann and puts his ten or fifteen dollars into Sallie's hand, and it brings joy to her and the little ones. He is happier and much more pleasant to all than he would otherwise have been. How different from the time when the husband came home staggering, and after coming home she found his money had been spent and he intoxicated with liquor purchased with the money that should have been brought to her. But when a man has made up his mind to be a true and loyal man to his wife and to his children, he will have no regard for the intoxicat- ing cup. That man will walk home yes, he will and take the money and pay his grocery bill; and he will be respected. THE CHAIRMAN. Mr. Murphy, you have only three minutes to catch the boat HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 275 isr s ~ c ^ s t- \ f V L *x > L x \ i \ C c c 1 p l7x 276 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. Three minutes! Well, I will have to come over to Camderi and live here for a week. It is a great cross to go away from this audience, but I must be punctual to the people across the water. Dear people, if you have come here for the purpose of hearing me, I esteem it a great privi- lege to be permitted to speak before you, and thank you for your heart- felt confidence. I must hold obedience to duty, but I wish I had time to tell you how I became saved. I wish I had. My dear friends, I commenced life with hopes as bright as any of you. Had a good mother, and she taught me that which was good and beautiful. I ex- pected to make her life radiant with sunshine, and would have done so but for the fascination of the intoxicating bowl. Some people say there is no fascination about it, but there is a great fascination about it. Notice the jollity of the drinking man, the cheerful expression on his countenance. How hearty the drinking men meet with each other. "Here you are, Bill! Le^'s go in and take something." And they go in and set them up and down. Do you "know what is hurting the church to-day. WE ARE so QUIET about our religion. We do not tell anybody about it. We are afraid to pray in prayer meeting. We are walking in the highway of the saints, but when we get up at the stile of His re- deeming love we can hardly tell whether we are saved or not. The people are not in love with our religion. If everyone were to be fasci- nated by their religion, and would talk about it, showing by genial and kindly conduct their character, they would find peace, and the people would come in through the church windows. The people are all in love with a religion that you talk about, and they are coming here to seek for it. And this, I think, is the best that I can say to you, my brethren here who have signed the pledge speak about it. This is a personal responsibility. Remember that God will hold you responsible; for you have a duty to perform the same as I have, and let us all do our duty. Trust in God, and verily thou shalt be successful. With the pleasures that lie around the intoxicating bowl, I was led off, and fell as low, per- haps, as it is possible for a man to fall and live. I became separated from wife and children and from everybody that made life very dear and precious to me. But God, in His infinite mercy, sent a good man to speak to me. And when he invited me very kindly to attend relig- ious service, I begged of him that he would excuse me; that I would not disturb his meeting. Half intoxicated as I was, I asked him to please excuse me, but there was a kind expression upon the man's face, and when I looked into his countenance I refused no longer. I said: "Sir, I will go." I did go with him, and heard the blessed gospel of our precious religion; and there, from the kind words of my friends, I there gave my heart to Christ. Absolutely, I am trying to do what I can to lead other men from the haunts of vice to the still waters of eternal rest. Let me say to you, dear people, preach the love of God preach the love of God. There is a wonderful love for the bruised heart that HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 277 s A. l- ^i 1 ' 5 r v j n V c - y- V> \ I * I 9 ^ 278 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. he cannot tell anything about himself, and we know not how much we can forgive until we are an outcast. I wonder, if your boy should ask your forgiveness of a great crime that you knew him to be guilty of, would you give it? You would say: "I will forgive my boy." Why? Because he is your boy. Therefore, let me say to you: keep this work going in this place with acts of cheerfulness and love, and of kindness. Good night. Perhaps one of the most positive proofs that we have of the soul's independence of the body, is our great need of love and of something to love. Were we mere animals, creatures doomed to perish after a few brief years of life in this world, that which contents the brute would content us. To eat and sleep well, to have an easy time of it, would be enough. As it is, we may have these things, and health to enjoy them and yet be utterly wretched. Neither can mental food satisfy us. "Some one to love" is our heart's cry. When the atmos- phere of tenderness is about us, we rejoice; when people are harsh and unkind, we suffer. We begin life, wishing to love all people, and be- lieving that they love us. Experience hardens us. Our dear ones gro\v fewer; but, as long as reason lasts, we must love some one, we must at least imagine that some one loves us. The parents, sisters and brothers and that dearest friend whom we promised to love and cherish until death, these come into our lives and fill them up. Afterward come the little children, frail, helpless babies, who need our care so much, and friends to whom we are not kin, yet who grow dear to us. Some have many loved ones, and some but one. Heaven help those who have none, though they are often to blame for their own empty heartedness; for kindness will win love. They are always wretched, and they often show their craving for something to love by cherishing some dumb animal, such as a dog, a parrot, or a kitten, on which they lavish caresses which, better spent, would have bound some human hear!: to theirs. Pride morbid sensitiveness may have been at the bottom of their loneliness, and these pets fill the aching void a little. Some one to love! It is the cry of the human soul, the note to which every heart responds; the bond which will bind us all together in that world where mourners shall be comforted and love shall reign forever. That life is a poor one which is devoid of ambition; which has no object to work for; no height to strive to reach. A person may be good and kindhearted while willing to live in idle ignorance and let the vorld go on growing in wealth and wisdom without his taking an active part in it, but he is certainly both very dull of mind and slug- glish of body who does so. HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 2 79 \ \ c O ~> V. ; " & ' \ -/ V n S t V N ^ ^ / vv,:o A- o C - S L ^ o v s 280 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. The upper right-hand quarter of any circle (see the Haven V) is the easiest quarter to write ; the lower left-hand quarter of any circle (see Pitman V) is the hardest quarter to write ; anil Pitman, Gra- ham, Munson, etc., make it still harder by thickening it. V being a very frequently occurring sound, it should have an easily written outline. Haven's use of the easiest quarter of a circle for that sound adds ten per cent, extra speed to such shorthand writing, besides facilitating phrasing and easy junctures. See examples in Comparative Outlines above. There are many backward written characters in Pitman, etc., which are written forward in Haven, meaning greater speed for the latter. Hooks, initial and final, are also on common sense plan in Haven style, whereas in Pitman, etc., they are arbitrary. The necessity for writing a vowel occasionally in reporting is not a matter of system, but of the language. Haven uses them no more than others, but when used on the Haven plan, they are always distinct and quickly placed. Pitman, Graham, etc., vowels are uncertain, as it is hard to place them quickly in proper position to their consonants. Haven's need no position, because joined where sounded. HAVEN'S VRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 281 C > OT3 a*f| e -o * " o '-" .J cu is - c. o C = v. O "g^ J~ * to r- c - 0> !l rt fc ej fti L-, ij +> C r* _ ^ J ? g M 4i A W O r> t, ,C 1? ^ K .2 9 S A H M U !?iV*i SIlssH-i .Sg rtS >* ax2?-ss* .j^m "^'gg C % " V *" inl^lf ^E*sl asi fi iSl 5S!B{ ofilll IfSfiifi f ?MTJ < ^ (O * C *; ^-g > C 1"! S & ?A; c MARCI Sten birt inve hand. Fre ti In England by Sen Pitm oved th ar "^l w I ( 1 \ ' i r i i V 1 t fe . r 1 * V 1 ( j 1 r i I ^ A 1 I s TB fe ^ V i < i i I C 1 1 1 ^b ^~ .-^i ^ SJ K H S s 4 _ i s \ i J r c < f -v k c ) f\ 1/1 If > v 1 \ H G X. ^ i -co . - i - G W J tC . ! I to W ---, 1 v: 1 f- . 1 1 1 rCi ^ 1 1 J ^ | i-5 s ty si _ ' S S <$ PART THE VOCABULARY. TO THE STUDENT. Notwithstanding that the best way to gain a perfect knowledge of shorthand is to learn perfectly every lesson given in this book, together with the shorthand plates of the business letters, court testimony and convention report, so that the student will be able to write anything m this book exactly as it is represented in these plates, without reference to any one of them, still, for the satisfaction of those people who un- necessarily insist on having a list of words to refer to, the author has arranged, for this part of the book, an alphabetical list of every word and phrase in this book, so that, if the student cannot find an outline readily in the plates, it can be found easily by referring to this list. The arrangement is alphabetical, with numbers opposite each word showing page, etc. , on which it is to be found. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Sho\\ ii In the Shorthand Pages of this Book. SIGN. A abase 163 abbreviation , HI Abe ii ability able able to 130 ablution 123 ably about about it about our about whom 68 above above name above referred abroad absence absolutely abstained ' 96 abstinence absurd abundant 76 abuses accept 8 accepted accession 114 accommodate 119 accommodation 120 accompany 121 accomplish accord-ing-ly account LINE. PAGE. SIGN. 33 account payment 21 133 accounts 14 127 accurate-ly 2 31 accusation 115 6 225 accuse 196 6 81 ace 13 ii 94 ache 14 11 64 aching 2 245 acknowledge 3 08 acknowledged 271 9 185 acknowledges 6 153 acknowledging your favor 9 131 a corporation 311 16 81 acquaintance of your 4 155 acquainted 6 149 acquire 150 15 159 acquisition 116 15 151 a creature of God 307 6 255 acres 12 135 across 86 13 273 act 8 159 acted 67 10 137 action 317 15 245 active 26 i 94 activity 15 215 acts no 15 121 acts upon 112 actual-ly 112 Ada 15 112 adage 6 24; adapt ici 7 98 adaption 103 ID 98 addition PAGE 2I- 3 '53 9? 121 121 33i 96 M9 153 114 151 251 133 121 H4 179 72 193 "5 114 60 247 127 237 221 129 151 94 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 283 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. additional 175 22 127 alive 12 197 additionally 176 22 127 all r.5 address 18 241 alia c I 72 addressing him 14 247 all an-d ft I 72 addressing the address them 15 IO 199 145 alleged all have 70 4 5 225 86 address you 20 245 all he 4 i 72 a degree , 153 14 86 all kinds 9 181 adequately '3 2 55 all of 55 7 121 a desire 267 16 96 all of the i 243 adjoin 103 13 137 all others 13 155 adjourn . 19 257 allotted 273 adjourned adjournment \l 259 199 allow allowed 15 2 6 46 239 admission 121 10 64 allow me to say that i 243 admit 2 151 allows 191 24 12; adopt 100 9 94 all right 8 145 adoption 102 9 94 all the 7 i 72 advance 22 81 all the time 9 249 advantage 15 74 all those ii 241 advantageous 16 I 78 all together 16 279 advantages 15 I 78 allude 8 251 advertise 19 88 all your 19 195 advertised 206 96 almost - 63 8 137 advertisement 18 fc alone 19 81 advertisements 19 88 along 2 257 advertisements (the) 14 177 alphabet 74 IO 137 advertiser 205 7 96 already 65 advertising 264 96 already a-n . 17 I 72 advisable 19 225 already he 15 I 72 advisedly 5 243 already I 16 I 72 affect 7 225 already the . 18 I 72 affecting this note .- 211 also 36 5 119 affection , 103 9 60 also against 12 iS5 affectionate 104 9 60 also refused 7 215 affectionately 105 9 60 also the 14 149 affective 101 9 60 also the newspaper ii 159 affectively 102 9 60 alternate . 87 13 72 afford a 14 241 alternating . 80 10 137 afraid 8 277 although 35 16 114 a friend's 85 12 72 altitudes . 158 20 H9 after 6 98 altogether (see all together)... 16 279 afternoon 192 24 133 alum . 112 10 6 4 after the i5 191 always . 270 18 96 after they 315 19 114 am 21 74 after this 17 155 a man . 58 4 72 afterward 192 24 137 ambiguous . 116 15 125 again 12 81 ambition . 162 21 H9 again and again 265 12 114 amended 16 243 against 124 10 86 America 9 245 against us 2 145 American M M5 age 12 2 3i a minimum . 262 13 qo aged 152 14 86 am not ' I 2 4 86 agent 3 98 among . 167 21 135 a gentleman 317 19 114 among them 19 205 ago ...... 16 2 46 amount . 107 14 12S agree 22 81 amounted 9 255 agreeable 4 245 amounts 6 159 agreement 12 237 amuse . 51 7 123 agreement (an) II 237 am willing (and) 8 215 a growler 84 II 72 an 63 ague 17 2 46 an accurate 312 17 114 Ah (the letter) 33 an archangel . 269 18 96 ah 87 8 94 anchor . 179 23 12, Ai (long-a) 33 anchored 174 22 137 aid 19 3 and (&) 33 aided 85 12 72 and a-n . 42 3 72 ail 21 3 and all 134 17 133 ailment . ... 127 16 135 and all the 14 I 86 aim 20 3 and also 8 147 and are 22 3 135 airs 147 19 121 and are not . 138 X J8 137 Akron i59 and are the * 155 Al Alabama 26 4 2 3i 145 and company and disappointed 2 19 M5 Alexandria 91 12 133 and documents 9 I 45 Alfred I 177 and do you 7 i 78 alike 13 245 and few 73 7 94 a' ike liable II 155 and finish 20 145 284 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. ] .INK. 1 'AGE. and for. 72 7 94 and forwarded them 3 147 and greatly oblige 2 145 and have 198 25 iiq and he 4i 3 72 and I 43 3 72 and if 7i 7 94 and is fci 78 and is that 162 18 86 and it is 4 159 and know that IQ 1^7 and most 160 17 86 and motionless 82 10 72 and must say that 19 145 and note 2 147 and of fi8 5 86 and our own 7.8 2 86 and perhaps 18 MS and presuming it and referred 8 13 MS M5 12 147 and review 164 19 86 and son 12 M5 and terms 13 145 and that 45 3 72 and the 44 3 72 and then 74 10 119 and thinks 178 23 129 and thinks his 191 24 127 and thinks his a 57 4 ?ft and thought theirs 5 153 and thus ? ii 72 and truth 150 i3 86 and was 83 78 and was the 16 179 and we 20 145 and we shall be pleased and when the 9 7 M7 T59 and will forward them to you.. 6 147 and will they 187 24 H9 and will you 15 i 86 a necessarily 271 20 96 angel 16 81 angelic 126 10 86 angels 139 18 135 anger 9i 12 125 angry 9 189 an hour 14 7 animal 14 279 animals 6 279 Ann 25 4 31 Anna 184 23 137 Annie 7$ 10 121 annoy 48 6 131 annoyance ii 157 annum 2 IK an order 4 i=\5 another 120 IO 6+ another one 168 21 12; answer 119 10 6.( answering your favor of the gth instant 18 147 Anthony 101 112 anxiety 4 S5 any 3 74 anybody 106 M 119 anybody else 2 241 any change 13 78 any conversation II 189 any further 19 149 any indications 20 i?9 any one 3i 4 123 anyone's 12 221 any other 15 159 any other peculiarities 14 197 any payment 16 181 any portion 18 151 any previous 3 i93 LINE. PAGE 20 l8l 15 2tl 19 119 3 225 II 243 127 137 123 2 31 19 96 9 M7 i Si 119 125 81 U SIGN. any reason any such anything 150 anything further anything in the hands anyway 20 anywhere 90 apart m ape 10 a peculiar. . . 271 apparently 9 appeal i appealed 14 2 appeals 178 23 appear 4 appearance 9 appearances 3 appeared 18 3 appears 4 87 appears to be an 2 ^3 applause 8 243 appliance 131 17 123 applications 2 237 applied 58 8 125 applies 155 15 86 apply 2 81 appoint 17 23^ appointed 8 237 appointment 18 196 appreciate 12 78 approval 187 24 129 approve , 190 24 129 approved 191 24 129 approximate 13 199 April i 147 a providential 154 14 86 archangel 8 88 ardor 86 '13 72 are 53 7 46 area 130 17 121 are a little 9 147 are as follows 17 1-5 are fully protected 10 155 are their friends 17 273 are there 22 2 78 are there any remarks 9 239 are those -, 12 217 are to be 13 iji are to be found 114 9 78 are you 7 187 are you not 5 177 are you positive that you 14 211 are you the plaintiff in this case 6 181 are you the plaintiff in this suit 6 179 arise 134 17 123 Arkansas 4 145 arm 8 275 armed 3 i 125 armor 50 5 53 army n 245 around 195 2? 123 around and around 266 12 114 arrange 6 239 arranged 18 193 arrangements 17 151 arrives 17 i^i art 81 10 72 article (the) 6 155 articulate 14 193 artist , 95 12 125 artlessness 144 18 137 as 19 74 as a 191 24 131 as a man 10 195 as a matter of convenience 4 159 as a matter of course 277 13 114 as a matter of fact 278 13 114 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 28 5 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. as a matter of law 16 223 as an 85 6 78 as a representative 20 239 a scarcity 84 n 72 a select 113 9 78 as far as you know 7 189 as good as 273 12 114 as great as 274 13 ir4 ash 27 4 31 as has - 7* 5 78 as has been 105 7 78 ashasthe 97 6 78 as have been 3 237 as he 91 6 78 as he was 20 209 as he was not (and) 8 221 aside 78 8 72 as I have them 8 215 a single lesson 106 9 60 as is 103 13 119 as is the 124 16 131 as it 22 74 as it has 79' 5 78 as it were 3 255 ask 22 3 38 asked 3 i 133 asked him the question 13 193 asked you 12 193 asking for 9 237 as known 96 12 129 asks to be excused 10 235 ask us 19 153 ask you (and) 13 185 a slovenly 80 9 72 as made 66 9 127 as many goods 17 157 as may be 170 22 133 as much 72 Q 135 as much as 144 is 119 a special 265 14 96 asphaltum 16 159 as represented 19 213 as representing 271 19 96 assemblage 2 247 assert 4 249 assistance 6 245 associated 3 249 association 4" 88 as soon as 275 13 114 as soon as 1 5 203 as soon as possible 276 13 114 assort 66 5 64 assortment 67 5 64 assuage 166 21 135 as such 10 2 137 assumpsit 14 221 assure 7 81 assured 178 23 135 assure their 132 17 131 astern .' 119 15 *35 asthe 88 6 78 as there (their) 75 5 78 as there has 77 5 78 as this is 18 243 as though 18 255 astonish 13 98 astonished 13 98 astonishment 13 98 astounded 168 21 135 astronomical 200 25 121 astronomy 199 25 121 as well as 272 12 114 as you are 5 157 as you may n 153 at 7 74 atall 9 i 86 at all events 301 15 114 >* all times 300 15 114 SIGN. at a-n at any rate 299 at any time at first 396 at hand atit Atkinson 66 at last 293 at least 292 at length 297 atmosphere atom 55 at once 27 at one 26 at our at present at same at such attached attacks attained 46 attains 6 attempt 18 attended 76 attended him attending the attend the attention 122 attenuation 156 at that at that date at that time at the bottom of the page at the end at the office at the present moment 3 at the present time 303 at the rate of 298 at the same time 302 at the time at the time of as this at this time attorney attorneys attracted attributes 150 attune 167 at which auction 180 audience August 75 aurora 183 auspicious Australia author authority 109 authorized authorize them author's avaricious 188 avenue average 74 averaging aversion 158 avert 143 averted 50 avoid that 148 Aw awaiting your reply awaits 161 aware 23 aware of 178 away 60 awful awfulness 156 awoke 68 aye 85 LINE. PAGE. 10 147 15 114 U 193 114 147 199 114 "i 279 129 86 86 i9 187 213 187 149 193 119 119 125 121 191 193 64 133 159 207 189 149 187 179 121 114 114 114 189 193 149 243 199 177 203 86 121 153 135 257 155 74 78 235 177 225 127 181 135 159 137 137 119 129 33 286 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. B 33 B (the initial) 105 babe 139 18 125 baby 44 6 127 bachelor 170 4 96 back..... 13 157 backward 17 245 badly 6 153 Bain 9 2 38 baker 4 187 balance i 153 balm 7 i 127 Baltimore 17 149 bank 81 8 94 bankbook g 14; bankrupt 46 6 121 bam 15 179 barrel 28 3 53 base 156 15 86 based 20 225 basis 5 239 batch 39 5 i 3I Bawn 20 3 38 bay ii 2 27 bays 143 18 133 be 3 74 Beale 93 112 beau 164 21 125 beauty 3 98 became 4 213 because 12 88 because I presumed i 219 because i thought 3 219 because there are things 19 199 because they were 15 157 beck 116 15 133 be conclusive 18 223 been 3 74 been able to 159 20 119 before 65 before a-n 25 2 72 beforehand 52 4 72 before he 23 2 72 before 1 24 2 72 before the 26 2 72 began 12 81 begin n 81 beginning 196 5 114 begun 13 81 behind 12 98 behindhand 269 12 114 being 267 16 96 being done 4 157 being duly sworn 4 181 be it 13 241 be it resolved 5 239 belief 6 81 believe 6 81 belong 5 81 belongs 146 12 86 below 123 16 129 bemistaken ,. io 197 be necessary ii 149 benefactions 84 n 72 benefit 17 257 benefited 83 n 72 be not 46 3 86 be presented 16 241 Berlin 6 i 133 berry 49 7 4 6 pest 106 14 133 be sure 7 ug better 44 3 64 between i 98 between the 17 221 between them * 304 16 114 between these 4 225 between us 9 251 SIGN LINE. PAGE. 19 189 Beulah 30 4 3 be very glad 2 241 be wasted 12 179 beyond 14 74 bid M 153 bill 4 145 billed ii 183 billed to us 5 149 bill of 7 bill of lading bill of this 3 9 147 bills 2 I4 ; bind 14 I 64 bind us 16 279 birds 159 20 Black 7 14; blame 13 279 blank 18 185 blessed 18 277 blessings blest '8,4 64 23 6 ' 3 6o block 20 3 119 blood 19 3 121 bloom 39 5 119 Bloomington IO 247 blow 16 2 53 blunt blushing :::::::::: & 5 2 = 133 137 blushingly 100 J 5 IZj beard in >< 78 boat body bold 7 2 3 "3 2;i bolder 69 5 64 boldness 18 i 127 bolster 94 1 bo bond 9 2^1 bone 6 I 60 bones 18 2 60 bonus 17 187 book 268 17 P book-keeper 17 189 books 15 211 borrow 54 7 137 Boston 9 149 both ii IS1 bother 3 159 bottom 94 12 131 bough 6 I 46 bought 2 I 13S bought of , IO 213 bounces 54 5 60 bound 151 19 127 bountiful 163 21 US bouquet 199 25 135 box n 112 BoxiS , 88 112 Box 80 ... 89 112 boy 80 9 72 Boyd 94 112 Boyle 3' 4 4 6 brackets ^ 147 brain 76 8 72 brains 8 249 branch 17 199 brass 7 195 brave 131 ii 64 braved . 31 3 64 brethern 116 - 9 86 bridge I 179 brief 27 4 135 bright 13 I 64 brilliant 148 19 119 bring (to) 20 151 British 4 2r>i Broadway 1 159 107 14 H9 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 287 SIGN. broker brother brothers brought 117 Brown iig bruised brush '.'.'..'.'. brute buckler 72 builded 150 building 203 buildings 200 burden (the) bureau ,.. . 190 Burksville burned business business engagement business letters businesslike 157 businessmen but but a-n 21 but are 22 but are not 148 but for 20 but have 20 but he 19 but 1 20 but if 67 but not 41 but of 20 but our 30 but the 22 buying bavs . . . by- by a by all by a microscope by calling by express by-gones , by having byits no by-laws by means by our 36 by ourselves 220 by return by satisfactory and unmistak- able by that (and) by that note by the 74 by the defendant by the duplicate by the plaintiff by the way (and) by this note by United States patents . . . by us by you by your 35 C (the initial) cabinet 98 calculable 160 calculate 132 calculations, California call , called for the money called to order called upon call forth 62 call for the (I) calling calls for more than call upon him 45 12 26| 146 LINE. PAGE. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. 17 2m calm 130 17 125 9 8 1 Camden 2 179 2 145 came 20 74 10 78 camel i3j> 17 131 11 78 camp 178 23 131 20 277 campaign 7 247 8 147 can 20 74 6 279 can a 155 20 I2 9 7 53 Canada 8 153 19 131 canal..; 71 9 *35 5 114 can be " 55 25 135 candle 6 i 123 7 223 candor 7 249 24 137 can he 12 78 2 145 canl 127 16 12^ 15 179 cannot 7 88 cannot have been 14 20 209 cannot say that the (I) 15 259 can the 86 2 96 canvassed 20 243 can you 65 capable i iTj 2 72 capital 3 133 captivate 68 19 135 captives 15 3 125 care : 148 3 125 careful 188 2 72 carefully 139 2 72 carefulness 189 5 86 carelessness 221 3 86 careof "8 3 125 caresses 2 86 carload 2 72 carload lots 3 151 carmine 54 6 38 carnumber 2 27 carried 15 96 carried forward 19 133 cars I1 9 12 72 case 24 iS 145 cases !o3 6 153 cash 55 4 151 cash book 10 195 casual 123 14 129 casually 124 12 243 catalogue 10 223 catch the 2 3 86 Catholic i72 7 114 caught "6 8 145 cause 4 caused 19 223 causes 54 20 217 caution 27 20 223 cautioned IO 3 7 72 cave 3 5 211 caves 9 i57 caw 12 19 179 Cayenne 20 247 cease 12 223 ceases 10 155 ceasing , 5 145 Cecil 13 149 centre 94 3 86 centre their ideas 95 105 cents 13 121 century 20 131 cerebral 17 135 certain 13 78 certainly 3'7 7 145 certificate 18 8 1 cessation 5 209 chaff 9 3 235 chair 19 19 209 chairman (the) 4 86 chance 2 259 chanced 87 17 147 change 5 199 changed 2 157 change of date (the) 39 4 266 123 237 121 247 I I*. 1t\ 133 114 129 114 114 131 279 243 153 i|l 183 241 J53 1 Q 38 119 137 217 137 137 145 72 96 72 72 239 129 60 60 46 125 46 $ 'g 64 J59 245 60 53 237 157 60 74 243 243 288 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. chaos 155 chapter 70 chapters character 168 characteristic 52 characterize 172 characters 171 charge charge of the court charges 9 charity 30 Charles 32 charm 115 charter 73 chase 33 chaste 86 Chattanooga chatter 72 Chawter cheap check 27 checks cheer 43 cheered 13 cheerful (the) cheerfulness cherish (and . ) chest chew 6 Chicago chiefs 21 child 16 children 169 China ." 23 choice 198 choice of the people 247 Christ 241 Christian Christianity 184 Christians Christine chronology 108 church Church of Christ 242 churchyard 68 cigar 195 circle 108 circular 109 circulated circulation 151 circumflex 147 circumjacent 148 circumstance 149 circumstances 150 cistern 122 cities citizen , civil 62 claim 3 claimed claiming claims clamor 52 Clark class 12 clause 91 clay 7 clear 32 clear off 59 clergy 182 Cleveland clew 130 client 78 clip 96 close closed closely tlothe 14 LINE. PAGE. SIGN. 20 131 clothed .' 51 9 131 cloud 17 14 78 clown 186 3 96 club ' 7 133 clump 79 22 125 coast 90 22 125 coaster 186 13 74 coasters 91 14 221 coasts 170 i 78 cobbler 78 4 133 codicil 3 53 coffin 15 119 cognate 118 6 6i con 184 4 40 coke 7 8 60 coldly 9 1 53 collar 25 6 64 collect 168 105 112 collected 178 15 157 collection 179 4 119 collective 180 3 159 Colonel _.. . 6 119 color ". i 64 Colorado 6 277 Columbus 3 279 combination 24 n '279 combine 23 9 199 combined 1 27 come 2 147 comes 4 2 60 come to hand 1 64 comfortable 3 96 comforted 2 60 coming 25 137 coming out of 10 114 command in 9 114 commence 126 20 81 commenced 127 23 121 commences 128 2 275 commend 112 14 145 commerce 14 119 commission 24 7 277 Commissioner of Patents 90 9 114 commit 9 123 committee 176 2=; 131 committee (a) 8 86 Committee on Foreign Relations 36 8 86 committees n 237 committees (the) 19 125 Commodore 103 112 common 112 commonest 31 112 commonly 30 112 Common Pleas Court 16 121 commonwealth 7 245 communication : 9 253 companion 144 4 38 company 134 6 53 compared ,.. 199 1 129 compassion 113 8 223 compel 122 19 223 compelled 9 223 compensating 7 125 competent 4 145 competing 2 137 competition 12 127 competitors 1 123 compiled 38 4 129 complain 68 4 86 complained 64 23 137 complains 62 5 237 complaint 17 123 complaints 63 10 137 complete 129 12 131 completion 130 n 219 compliance.. .' 132 13 221 complied 38 2 203 compliment 2 125 composed LINE. PAGE. 4 t 4 2 64 24 135 I 235 127 60 127 60 121 53 191 23? 112 8 23 3 u 16 v 9 3 3 15 ~ 273 53 123 123 203 14? 24= 121 121 237 275 279 239 179 112 112 112 112 112 2JI 123 131 24; 135 257 127 237 235 112 207 195 1" 131 131 137 112 123 151 24; 223 245 245 257 123 137 129 129 211 129 112 112 123 121 247 237 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 289 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. controvert SIGN. L 144 INE. PAGE. compulsion 172 22 119 155 20 121 conceive 1 66 21 129 convention 5 2VJ concern concerned 142 144 18 18 123 123 convention report conversion 47 1 259 131 concerning 143 18 125 converted . 112 14 1 2O conclude 34 5 135 Cook I 18 concluded 176 22 133 Coombs Qo concludes 11 225 cooperate . 200 25 137 conclusion 88 II 133 cooperation 9 241 conclusive 12 223 Coots . 103 112 concomitant 122 112 copy 7 concurrent 114 112 cordial ft 2AC. condition 25 81 corporal 79 8 n conduct 3 245 corporation 17 114 conducted 20 253 correct 24 3 129 conferred 16 251 corrected . 126 16 129 confession "5 112 correction . 128 16 I2Q confidence 20 243 corrective , ,. 127 tfi 129 confined T8 179 correctly 12 157 conform 20 151 correspond 6 243 confuse Tlfi 112 corroborative i 223 confusion 117 112 corruption 32 4 121 congratulate ._ congratulating me . . .'. 19 19 255 243 corrupti ve cosy , 108 . 112 14 "3 127 congress 116 15 137 cottons 7 153 Connecticut 12 145 could . 160 20 127 could not . 306 Tfi 114 connive 194 25 121 could you . 68 9 133 conquered 123 16 119 counsel . 182 23 129 conquerers 3i8 20 114 countenance 147 19 131 consciences 9 225 counter 2 153 consciousness q 193 counteract 145 112 consequence ; 134 17 135 counterfeit . 146 112 consequent ii 98 counting the 9 273 consequential 136 17 135 countries . 112 consequently 135 17 135 country 2f 74 consider 112 county 4 considerable 48 fi 121 county of I 195 considerably 6 couple (a) Tfi 201 consider again 1 80 23 125 court 18 2 fil consideration 132 112 court houses 12 245 considered-ate 133 112 Court of Common Pleas I 177 consist 182 2 3 121 Court of Oyer and Terminer.., I 195 consisted 139 18 121 court reporting II 225 consistency 138 18 121 courtship . 223 7 114 consistent 140 T8 121 cow ii i 40 consolidation 4 239 Coyle 5 I 38 constant 46 6 127 cramp . 147 19 125 constituent 134 112 craving 13 279 constitute 135 112 crawl . 166 21 125 constituted 104 13 123 create , 84 II 72 constitution T3fi 112 creation 66 9 137 Constitution of the United States 161 3 creative 6 i 135 construct ii 88 creature 7 98 construction 24 3 127 credibility 156 20 123 contain 20 3 137 credit ft 159 contained 12 225 creditable 267 Tfi ofi contemplate 14 245 credits fi 237 contending that 223 creek 8 179 contends 3 223 creep . 135 17 121 contention 17 221 crest 119 133 contents 2 147 crime 2 279 contestants 5 191 croaker , 186 24 129 continent 10 Z $ cross examination 19 189 continental ii cross examined 19 continue 62 8 121 cruel 159 16 86 continues 179 23 133 cry 13 2 53 continuing his testimony 5 Cuba . 17 3 38 contour (and) 9 197 cube 59 8 127 contraband 52 7 119 cue 9 2 27 contract TTH 15 121 cultivate 107 14 131 contradict 141 112 cultivated 108 14 131 contrary 9 235 culture 75 G contribute 142 112 cumber. , 62 8 125 contribution 143 112 cup 19 275 control 13 159 cups 135 17 133 Controlled 13 245 cured 3 ii control the 6 237 curiosity 40 3 94 2QO HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. current 5 159 custom 310 17 114 customary 52 7 46 customers 17 145 cut 8 151 cute 39 3 94 D 33 D (the initial) 105 daily 71 6 72 Dakota 9 155 Dale 24 3 46 Dallas 10 151 dances 51 .5 60 danger 17 81 dangers 160 20 133 dangerous 134 17 121 Daniel i 187 dark ii 2 127 darkened 159 17 86 darkens 134 17 129 darkness 30 4 125 dash 171 22 129 date i i 64 dated 230 8 114 date of 8 177 dates 15 183 dating 4 149 dative 30 3 60 Dave 24 3 135 dawn 124 10 125 day 25 4 27 day of the month (the) 19 201 days 104 8 86 dead 18 201 deal 18 2 ^3 dealer 29 3 53 dealers n 155 dealings 19 157 deal ofconfidence 20 243 deals not 270 18 96 dear 15 81 dearest 10 279 dear madam 14 145 dear miss 17 149 dear sir 7 145 dear sirs 6 151 death ii 279 debate 16 259 debtor 70 5 64 deceased 126 16 125 December 7 m? decide that 14 187 decision 56 5 60 declared) 10 275 declined 16 159 decompose 123 112 deduct 18 155 deducted 13 157 deducting the 10 157 deep Q5 12 133 deeps 79 10 135 defeats 20 157 defective 132 17 119 defence 46 6 129 defendant 20 81 defendant's machine 64 8 123 defendant's testimony 154 14 86 deference 80 9 72 defiance 50 7 121 define 198 25 123 defined 118 15 129 definite 166 21 121 deflective 40 5 121 degree 22 81 Delaware 14 145 delay 166 21 127 delegates 17 237 delight 107 14 137 SIGN. LINE. S AGP. delighted 106 14 13; delinquent 68 9 115 deliver , 13 Si deliverance 40 5 delivered 148 12 delivery 72 9 democrat 36 5 Dennison and 4 denominate 23 denominated 83 ii denomination 84 ii denominations 48 6 Denver 9 deny 2 depart 15 departments 81 10 deposit (the) 19 depth 171 22 depths 175 22 dereliction 184 23 deride 150 19 derided 151 19 derision 152 19 derive 155 20 derived 63 5 describe 13 description 96 12 descriptive 124 16 descry 84 8 desert 194 25 deserve 2 deserved 64 5 desire 85 6 desired 16 desires 87 "13 desirous 13 desk 3 i desolate 88 6 destroy 87 6 destroyed 17 detailed report 10 determine 2 determined 14 Detroit 20 develope 132 17 deviation 123 16 devoid 18 devoted 16 diction 158 20 djd 42 3 did he 14 did he give any reason 2 did he give you 4 did he not 8 did he say 3 did he say that he 15 Did I not understand you to say 71 9 did not take n did that 14 did you 16 did you continue 18 djd you ever have ii did you ever meet 14 did you get receipts 20 did you get your 17 did you live 9 did you not die 24 4 dies 32 5 diety 71 6 differ 21 difference 21 different 21 different names 17 differ in their 2 difficult 19 difficulties 160 17 difficulty 19 'S 123 129 145 81 123 123 119 145 251 157 72 1=9 131 125 129 137 137 137 137 64 88 121 135 53 125 253 193 72 241 86 179 235 223 187 2"7 125 127 279 24; ^27 86 181 189 189 209 189 189 125 203 177 177 187 189 187 205 209 64 81 81 81 259 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 291 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. dignity 3 88 dime 63 8 127 diminished , 13 151 dinner 50 7 123 dire in 14 129 directed 3 147 direct examination 5 iyj direction 184 23 119 disability 124 16 121 disadvantage 17 i 78 disappointed 19 145 disbelief 80 10 12=; discharge 10 i 78 discontinuing payments 20 181 discount 19 147 discounts 18 145 discover 180 4 96 discovery 4 197 discriminate 200 25 119 discuss 17 151 discussed (and) 7 237 discussion i 255 diseased 142 18 127 dispel 194 25 127 displace 195 25 127 display 192 24 127 displeasure 196 25 127 disposed 78 8 72 dispute (the) 9 223 dissatisfied 268 17 06 dissection 86 6 86 disseminate 56 7 125 dissever 55 7 125 dissolute 89 6 86 distance., 19 159 distentions 76 10 129 distiller 97 9 94 distilleries .'. .. 99 9 94 distillers 98 9 94 distinct 30 4 123 distinction 20 3 131 distinctly 6 217 distinguished 5 259 district i 183 disturb 16 277 divide 5 255 divine 20 81 divined 150 19 125 division 4 201 dizzy 33 5 38 do 9 74 dock 151 19 133 doctor 14 81 doctors 6 151 document 15 191 documents 9 145 Dodd 13 2 38 Doe 27 4 46 does 6 i 78 does a 138 18 no does he 12 78 does he say 14 183 does it 17 207 does not 2 225 does so 20 279 does this 17 207 dogmatic 179 4 96 doing 197 5 H4 doing so 13 i;i dollar 8 74 dollars 7 145 done 24 81 do not now 4 211 doomed 6 279 Dora 17 149 double 64 8 119 doubt 119 5 119 doubtful 190 4 114 SIGN. LINE. PAGB. jown ........................... 8 i itowns .......................... 20 2 downy .......................... 12 i dowry ........................... 22 2 do you .......................... 6 do you know ................... 17 do you know the ................ n do you live ..................... 8 do you mean to say you ......... 9 do you not ...................... 12 do you not recollect of .......... 3 dozen ......................... 159 20 drafts(the) ..................... 4 dr ainer ......................... 34 drawer ......................... 18 Drawer A ....................... 90 drawn .......................... 12 drayman ..................... ... 16 dread ........................... 20 2 dreaded ......................... 231 8 dress ............................ 88 8 drew ............................ 21 2 drink ........................... 16 drinker ......................... 16 drive ............................ 75 10 driven ............ .............. 151 19 driving ......................... 74 10 drowned ........................ 62 8 due ............................. 26 4 due you ......................... 8 dukes ........................... 39 5 dull ............................. 20 dumb ........................... 14 Dunlap ......................... 10 2 duplicates ...................... 20 duration ........................ 72 9 during .......................... 70 9 during that time ................ 16 during the ...................... 2 dutiful .......................... 182 23 duty ............................ 174 22 E ................................ each ............................. ii each are ........................ 38 3 each month ..................... 13 each of the ..................... 12 each one thoroughly ........... 164 19 each will ........................ 42 6 earlier ...................... .... 15 early ............................ 77 earn ............................ n 2 earned ......................... 187 24 ears ............................. 18 earth ........................... 51 7 ease .......................... ... 164 19 easier ........................... 4 east ............................. 318 20 easterly ......................... 72 9 eastern .......................... 118 15 East Saginaw ..... . ............. 12 easy ............................. 26 4 eat ........ ...................... 7 ebb ............................. 28 4 economic ....................... 6 Ed .............................. 32 5 edge ............................ 30 4 edition ......................... 3 4 Edmund ........................ 118 10 eej .............................. 33 5 effect ........................... 84 ii effective ............. '. .......... 164 21 effort ........................... 15 efforts .......................... 106 14 efforts of the press ............. 239 9 egg ............................. 3i 4 Egyptian ....................... 10 En ............ ..... ............. 86 * 60 60 53 177 189 181 195 211 177 209 129 i59 133 147 112 207 219 64 114 53 53 273 273 119 123 129 135 129 279 279 125 153 129 125 201 151 127 125 33 243 133 151 72 121 123 203 1 159 114 137 i35 149 127 279 3i 249 31 31 SP 64 3i 72 "4 31 159 94 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. sight 99 entry 9 217 eighteen eighteen hundred and seventy, eighteen hundred and seventy- i 99 MS envelope envy equal .... 172 5 22 155 127 81 one 6 145 equalled .... 118 Q Sft eighteenth 55 4 112 equally 18 81 eighth eight hundred eight hundred and five 53 70 4 5 112 99 112 eguatorial equitable era .... 196 2; 7 M 129 239 245 eightieth 54 4 1T2 erect 82 10 72 99 Erie , 14 eight thousand eighty 99 99 error I 19 i?3 223 either 13 74 error in the 18 223 elapsed g 255 errors 2 elect 17 237 especial I H elected 3 237 especially I 88 election 16 235 Esquire 94 112 elective 114 10 64 essay 143 18 119 electrotype (an) 6 establish 12 i elects (and) 2 237 established 12 98 element 191 24 establishing 13 241 elevator 9 183 establishment 12 eleven 99 esteem - 2 245 eleventh 66 5 112 esteemed 2 245 elocutionist US 10 64 estimate 18 3 135 eloquence 3 257 et al i 183 ElPaso i etcetera 2 151 else 116 10 64 etch 29 4 31 64 4 78 eternal 19 81 Elverson i 153 eternity 19 81 Emb 33 Ethel 38 4 53 embarrassing 176 22 121 evangelic 135 17 embezzle IS6 20 131 evangelize 136 17 I2T embodied 13 239 Evans 18 149 embracing 108 14 135 evasion 38 4 60 embroideries 15 145 even .... 85 12 72 emigrate 114 119 even a 17 159 Emp 33 evening 42 6 129 emphatic 174 22 121 ever 6 7 emphatically 10 211 everlasting 205 6 114 employ 131 II 64 everlasting life 206 6 114 employed 7 187 everlasting love 207 6 114 empty 167 21 119 ever purchase 7 207 empyric 148 19 127 every 3 81 enameus , enact laws enclosed 7 4 7 243 251 151 everybody every one every one of us '35 263 14 10 ii 2 H "4 13 187 everything 136 ii 86 endeared 4 245 every time 4 243 endeavored 5 223 everywhere 148 19 123 endeavors 12 255 evidence 86 II 137 ended 99 13 119 evil 83 II 125 endless 14 2 129 exact 4 I 94 endorsed 12 147 exactly 5 I 94 ends 82 II 123 exaggerate 163 21 121 enemies 170 22 129 exaggerative 164 21 121 energy 86 13 72 examination 16 I 94 6 255 examination-in-chief 5 179 engaged 18 247 examine 14 i 94 England '.. 181 5 96 examined 14 i 94 English 181 5 96 examining paper ii 191 engraved 65 5 64 excel 12 i 94 enjoy 2 251 excellent 13 i 94 enough 126 16 133 except 7 i 94 enquire 11 24* excepting sj 217 enter 92 7 6 exception 20 177 enterprises 4 249 except the 2 l^i entertain 167 2 114 exchange 12 Hi entertainment (and) 17 235 exchanging 14 249 entertainments 17 201 excursion 131 17 129 enter their house 93 7 64 excuse 7 enthusiastic 20 245 excused d 245 entire 187 24 140 18 entire document (the) 19 191 execrative 139 18' 131 entirely 26 4 119 executive committee 17 23^ entire time 13 20; exercise a I 94 entries 20 exercises II 225 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 293 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. exercisist 3 i 94 t-xert I i 94 exhibit 14 217 existed . i 240 existence 269 17 96 expands 263 14 96 expanse 142 18 125 expansive 143 18 125 expect 6 i 94 expected 148 19 137 expect to be (I) 12 235 expel 64 8 135 expense 146 19 125 expensive 144 18 125 experience 9 i 94 experienced io i 94 expert no 14 121 explain 40 5 119 explanation 13 147 explicit 142 18 137 explore 142 18 121 explosive .. 88 n 135 exporting 16 159 express 195 25 125 express company 14 145 expression ... 196 25 125 exsiccated 192 24 131 extend n i 94 extended 6 251 extending from io 245 extent n i 94 external ( . io 88 externally 10 88 externity 176 22 123 extra 15 2 125 extraordinary 16 2 125 extreme 1 4 extremity 14 88 eye 84 94 eyes : 127 16 119 Ezra 84 ii 135 F 33 F (the initial) 105 face 41 6 38 faces 42 6 38 facial 53 5 53 facilitate 20 259 facility 13 225 fact 3 74 factory 6 187 facts 5i 4 78 fail 85 12 72 failed 171 22 133 failure 7 10 133 fairly 16 157 fairy 186 24 121 faith 7 255 faithful-ly 9 i5i faithfulness 191 4 "4 fall 34 4 53 fallen 17 255 falter 79 6 64 familiar 114 15 I2 7 familiarity 20 259 family '3 205 family physician.. .1 famous 8 247 fanaticism 163 21 135 fantasm 34 5 "9 fantastic 164 21 135 far 3 74 fare 35 4 53 farm 75 7 72 farther 7 6 64 fascinated 9 fascination ishion 36 4 6 tr-nt 77 Jaster 95 156 igi 139 fast line father fault faults faulty favor favorable features February fee x feeble 181 feebleness... 182 feed fee).- 136 feeling feel the feet fellow. . . j2i r , i **4 fellows fellowship . 220 felt 4 ferry 4 g fetch the feud 140 few 15 few days (a) .' fewer fickle....- 58 fie 14 fifteen fifteen hundred 38 fifteenth vj fifth 34 fiftieth 39 fifty fifty five 47 fifty thousand 40 file filial 8 filled filling fill your orders financial 84 financially find 28 fine 155 finger 103 finish (and) finished the finishes finishing firm firmer firms first first day first instant First National Bank (the) fissure fitted 60 fitter 76 five five eighteenths , 87 five hundred five hundred and eighth 71 nve million five thousand fixed 187 fixture 84 flame 67 flats flattered fled 94 fleeting 69 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. Hew. flight... fling.... Florida. flow 123 25 15 147 86 119 123 203 145 46 114 114 149 137 153 157 J59 133 257 114 121 46 153 123 25 i8q 279 127 in 2 v 135 24S 273 153 137 257 64 127 64 145 259 237 195 159 153 239 74 195 145 M7 64 99 112 99 112 99 119 135 245 247 123 72 131 64 131 145 294 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPH*. . fluster ........................... 93 F.O. B ......................... toe ............................. 2 fogs ............................. 95 folio ............................. 144 follow .......................... 81 followed ........................ 94 following ....................... 138 following resolution ............. follow their ..................... 39 .... food ............................ Foote ........................... 18 for .............................. fora ...................... ..... 15 for all ........................... 10 for a report ..................... force upon us ................... forcible ......................... 158 forcing themselves .............. for collection ................... forefinger ...................... 148 foregoing ........................ forehead. ....................... forest ......................... . forever .............. , ........... 22 forewarned ...................... 156 forfeit ........................... r54 forget ........................... 30 forgive .......................... forgiveness ..................... forgot ........................... 120 forgotten ........................ 159 for he was ....................... 22 for he was the .................. 95 for him ......................... for his .......................... 317 for his father ................... for it has been .................. foritis .......................... 53 for it is known .................. 54 form ............................ (or many ........................ formation ....................... 180 former letter .................... form the ........................ formulating their ............... for payment .................... ! or prisoners .................... or proponent ................... for publication .................. forsale .......................... for same ........................ for some time ................... forsooth ........................ 50 for such ......................... for such a ....................... for supposing ................... forswear ........................ 155 forte ............................ forth ............................ for the .......................... 126 for trie defendent ............... for their own .................... forthelast ...................... for the northern ................ for the plaintiff ................. for those ........................ fortieth ........................ 30 forty ............................ forty-hundred ....... : .......... 32 forty-hundred-thousand ....... 33 fortv-thousand .................. 31 for us ........................... forwarded them (and) .......... forward them to you ............ for which ....................... SIGN. LINE. PAGE. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. 8 60 for you 52 5 $4 9 133 found 27 2 64 i 46 foundation 12 98 12 135 four 99 18 135 four hundred 99 10 72 four-hundred and thirty .... 72 6 112 12 137 four-hundred and three 73 6 112 18 133 four-million 99 4 239 fourteen 99 1 129 fourteenth 28 3 112 fourteen-thousand 29 3 112 fourth 25 2 112 8 279 fourth instant 4 147 3 38 four-thousand 99 2 74 fraction 20 iU 2 123 frail 188 24 129 i 86 frame 43 6 131 i 237 Francis i 27? 16 137 Frank 79 10 133 20 133 Franklin 2 149 6 249 freak 59 8 129 12 147 free 2 131 19 125 freely 14 153 15 259 Freeport .-. 17 14; r7 197 freight 20 147 3 203 freighted 232 8 114 3 131 frequently 159 20 127 i 114 Friday i 147 112 friend 13 197 4 127 friendly i 247 1 279 friends 85 12 72 2 279 friendship 224 7 114 15 127 fright '. 26 2 64 20 137 from 4 74 3 129 from a-n 148 12 86 12 119 14 78 from it 2 i 133 20 114 from its 20 231 17 189 from local 17 143 19 159 from making a 13 235 5 94 from reporting 19 235 5 94 fromthat 3 133 from the 14 14; 5 74 from the amount 20 213 7 207 from them 5 133 23 135 from this 10 149 17 151 from which i| 137 16 151 from you IB 149 6 239 front i 245 4 159 frosty .. 99 13 125 4 195 f row n 35 3 60 4 191 fuel in 9 64 15 177 fugitives 68 9 121 9 155 fulfill 3 217 15 145 full 109 7 78 4 237 fully 115 13 123 7 125 fun 34 3 60 12 225 fundamental 209 6 114 11 153 funds 12 147 16 193 funny 50 7 46 1 114 furnish 20 22- 14 247 furnished 176 22 123 2 74 furniture 85 7 64 16 121 furrow 122 16 1^1 4 187 further 96 8 64 13 279 furthermore 13 179 7 189 further their laws 97 8 64 i 183 fusion 162 21 129 3 177 future 161 18 86 7 217 G (the initial) 103 3 112 gain 4 i 60 99 gained 13 223 3 112 gains 16 2 60 3 ri2 gaiter 162 21 123 3 112 gale 6 i 38 3 159 gallery 142 18 120 3 147 galley 2 i 119 o 147 gallon 7 243 7 131 gambler 134 20 129 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 295 game SIGN. LINE. PAGE. . 132 17 129 gone SIGN. LINK. PAGE. 17 017 garden 10 245 good many good night 10 3 153 279 garment Garnett . 130 17 n 129 147 goods gospel 145 277 gas .. 28 4 govern 10 8V gave 8< 10 72 governed 78 IO 123 Save it 86 n 133 government..: 10 8i ay IO 2 27 governor 122 9 86 gazes .. 168 21 129 govern the 152 14 86 gem general generalization .. 192 . 28 4 123 81 125 grace gracefully gradual 243 9 n "4 247 generalize generalized generally (see general) generals generation . 27 - 32 26 4 4 6 125 125 81 125 81 gradually grain grammar grandchild grandchildren IOO 80 Ill 112 6 8 14 14 183 53 131 generous 3 245 grandeur 70 9 129 genial Gentile . 98 10 13 277 125 grant granted 4 9 153 237 gentle , gentleman gentlemen gentlemen of the jury . 98 13 2 I 14 98 221 gratitude gratuitous gratuitously graves 50 52 78 7 7 7 10 129 129 129 12* Sjntly 19 159 great 74 7 72 eorge .. 88 8 53 greater quantity (a) 16 1*7 Georgia 19 145 greatest 12 253 German Germany 6 I 13 127 159 great extent greatly 135 99 '7 7 119 86 Gertrude . no 112 greatly oblige 2 14* get 7 I 121 great many I get out of I 259 green 11 147 get the get them 5 2 155 21? greet Grimm 154 20 I 127 151 getting bettei , 6 189 grinders 7 239 getting out , 3 157 grinding 13 25.3 . 170 22 "5 grocery 19 27* gifted II 247 grooved 32 1 64 gigantic . 164 21 137 gross 10 147 girl .. 26 3 53 ground 5 157 girls n 245 group 136 17 119 give it . 46 6 131 grow 71 9 127 give me 8 151 growing 19 279 give me the 12 215 growler 84 ii 72 give-r* 22 74 grows 263 13 96 given forth . 112 8 78 guarding 269 96 given them 17 . 177 guarding it 269 18 96 given your time 2 199 gubernatorial 92 12 119 gives . 27 2 78 guess 91 12 135 give the . 190 24 121 guests I 2^7 give them . 28 2 7 guilt 152 19 119 give these . 68 7 94 giilty no '4 122 give this . 69 7 94 ypsy 27 4 38 give those . 7o 7 94 H (the initial) 105 give thus - 70 7 94 habit 147 19 129 give us the 10 183 habits 87 n 135 give you 16 185 habits of birds 238 9 114 give you a ii 145 had IO 74 give your 7 155 had been 16 211 giving 2 157 had he 3 193 giving what reason 18 213 had not 154 20 gladsomeness 215 7 114 had you 18 177 glanced . 106 9 60 hail 192 24 i35 glass (a) 6 187 hair .... 143 18 '3 1 glee 3 i 137 hair (the) r6 197 Glendale i hairs n 203 gloom . 187 24 127 half 81 112 glories '. . . 7i 9 133 hall i 243 glorification glorified . 72 9 21 Ii halt : Hamburg (and) 17 13 153 '59 glorious g!ory-if y . 70 9 21 *$ hamper hand IOO 7 gloss . 80 10 119 handed 17 217 go 77 8 72 hand in hand 267 12 114 goal .'.... 14 2 53 hand it 12 239 God 5 9 handling 15 241 going 6 i 125 hands ". IO 191 golden . 66 9 121 handsome 10 15.3 296 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. handwriting 16 155 hang ... 90 8 94 Hanson 5 149 happen d happened 1^4 20 133 happens ... 86 13 72 happier 15 27* happiest H5 20 133 happy hard . .. 15 2 14 hardened . . . 102 13 135 hardens us 9 279 hardly . .. 15 2 135 harlequin ... 143 18 135 harsh 9 279 Harvey 3 179 has 19 74 has been ... 104 7 78 has been said 6 225 has gone 94 12 129 has had 22 3 has had it ... 60 5 94 has had its . .. 160 17 86 has he 16 181 has it ; 22 74 has known ... 96 12 129 has met has not ::: 1* 15 7 114 129 has not been 6 159 has no use (and) 5 225 has now , 15 2^9 hasten 99 13 121 has there . . 175 22 129 hate /H 6 46 hatef ul-ly . .. 144 18 129 hater ... 167 21 haunts 19 277 have 7 74 have a 3 i have been , 2O 2 86 have it .. 136 I 96 have it go 17 239 have known . I 221 have not 47 3 86 have them .. 181 23 121 have you 13 177 have you got the having received any having received payment j 16 269 209 Hay 2 i 3i hazy , ,.. 8 i 129 he .. 71 6 72 head i? 2; 9 health (and) 7 279 he always , ii 197 heard 13 7 heard no objections (I> 4 237 heard the motion 17 243 heard the resolution read 8 2.39 hear favorably II heart , 35 5 131 hearted , 279 heartfelt 3 277 hear the report iS heartily 14 2 135 heaven . . 240 9 114 heavenly body - 3C9 16 "4 he bought , 15 181 he caught ... 66 5 72 he did '. I 189 he did not , 4 189 he died 4 193 heeded (and) 247 he gave 20 1ST he had a 14 197 he had been 6 193 he has 94 i 7* he has not 15 iSi height 4 199 SIGN. LINE. height (the) 13 he improved 13 he is 93 6 held 79 10 helpless n he made 17 he made the 18 he may 64 5 he may be certain 40 5 hemorrhage hence 3 Henry 95 her 17 here 198 25 hereafter 106 9 he really 15 herein 107 9 hereinafter 108 9 hereinbefore 109 9 hereinto no 9 here is the other (and) 11 hereof 113 10 hereon 112 10 here present 13 heretofore 114 1 hereunto in 10 herewith 4 here you have 6 herself 10 2 he says so i v hesitancy 2 hesitation 104 13 he used 7 he was 95 6 he will be glad 19 he will embody it 12 he will read 14 he wished me 13 high i i higher 47 6 highest (the) 2 highly 20 highway hill n hills 8 him 22 himself 211 6 him to you 13 his 18 his death 7 his is the. 96 6 his right hand i? hiss 7 i history : 7 hit 43 6 hither 35 5 hitherto 172 22 hold 81 10 holdlike 81 10 holier 127 16 holiest 122 16 holy 3? 5 home 23 homeless 16 2 homely 11$ 15 homes 39 5 honor 11 honorable .' 3 hood 51 7 'hoof 150 19 hook 198 25 Hoover no hope 2 hoped 264 M hopes 75 10 hope to have 115 1 hoping that you may be able to secure .." 13 123 279 IQI i8j 72 137 193 ISJ 112 275 121 94 223 94 94 94 94 217 94 94 1/9 94 94 149 223 133 217 245 133 179 193 31 127 273 277 197 197 74 114 M5 74 191 78 197 125 245 4b 137 133 72 72 12; 119 125 74 123 125 121 135 112 121 94 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 297 SIGN. : hoping there will be 20 hose 150 19 hour 18 hourly 25 2 hour of (the) 16 house 314 18 housed 39 5 household 9 houses 17 how 6 i Howe 25 3 however however there 50 7 however they are 50 7 how many 5 how you could 2 hue 3 i Hugg 108 human 22 human character 31 4 human countenance 162 18 humanely 154 20 human life 152 19 human mind 92 12 human race (the) 161 18 human soul 120 15 humble 98 13 humbug 155 20 humor 10 humored 52 7 humor the , 152 14 hundred (the word) , 7 hundred (the numeral) hundredth 6* 5 hundred thousand 69 5 hunger 2 i hungry 2 I hurrah 178 23 hurt 22 2 hurting the 7 husband 16 hut 45 6 Hway ". lam 115 9 I am asking the 3 I am glad 42 - 4 I am inclined 43 4 I am in receipt of 19 3 I am in receipt of your favor of the nth instant 8 i I am in the 7 I am not 6 I am not positive 11 lam reading from a 6 I am very positive that n I appoint 7 I asked him .. 104 13 I ask the 17 I ask you 10 I before 6 I began 151 13 I beg to say 116 10 I beg to say that 172 22 I believed 18 I believe so far as I am concern- ed 19 I believe you 12 I bought 5 Ibuy 7 lean 191 24 I can assure the n I cannot 30 4 I cannot account 317 20 I cannot be 80 10 I cannot be there 68 9 I cannot do 188 24 I cannot do that 46 6 icer 40 4 PAGE. SIGN. LINE, i 149 I could not 5 123 idea 264 14 74 idea (the) 6 78 idea of forming a 15 199 identification 7 114 identify the 15 133 I did 19 3 181 I did not 43 3 253 idle 47 6 121 idler 4 46 I do in 14 74 Idonot 44 3 131 I do not know that 3 131 I do not thinkso 13 211 I enclose check 7 153 lenquire 13 31 I esteem 2 112 if i 81 if any body else i 133 Hear 75 10 86 I fear you 195 25 123 I fear you may 48 6 133 I fear you must 43 6 137 I fear you must be 31 4 86 I fear you will be 70 9 131 I fear you will have 9; 12 129 if 1 7 125 if I am not 17 81 I find 171 22 127 if it 99 13 86 ifitbe 8 98 if it is 45 4 99 if it is not 46 4 112 if it is the desire 11 112 if it please the court 12 121 if possible 19 121 if satisfactory 127 if such (and) .' 14 64 ifsuch payment 16 277 ifthere 186 24 275 if there are any members 19 46 if there is no objection.... 15 33 if there were 35 5 33 if we 10 78 if we send that 12 185 if you 44 4 94 if you are not willing 94 if you cannot 2 129 if your 18 if you will give me 12 121 I gave 4 181 ignorance 19 201 I had 16 221 I had an 6 185 I had not 3 211 I had such a 12 241 I have 72 5 127 Ihavea paper 10 199 I have been 74 5 185 I have been handed the 4 185 I have got 7 86 Ihavehad 13 94 I have it .". 14 123 I have no doubt 19 197 I have no doubt of it 8 I I have no recollection 2 235 I have not got down 19 209 I have seen 58 153 I have seen it 40 5 153 I have seen that 14 2 133 I have seen them 91 12 235 I have sent you 6 135 I have to be 75 114 I have your favor 18 3 133 I hope 15 13; Ike 8 i 135 I knew 9 123 I know 66 5 53 1 live 3 96 237 159 201 203 137 86 135 155 225 211 151 185 2}7 74 241 137 121 125 137 131 127 131 153 237 135 133 145 94 94 239 179 225 Hi 187 211 123 239 235 135 M7 239 94 155 i53 279 I5i 189 86 i<9 86 2V) 183 177 185 179 127 209 23? 137 129 r3i 129 151 86 195 72 231 298 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. ill-.-. .......................... 23 illegal .......................... 138 illiberal ......................... 107 Illinois ......................... illness ........................... illustration ..................... imaginary ...................... 119 imagination .................... 120 imagine ........................ I may.. ......................... 63 imbecile ............. . .......... 99 I mean .......................... 65 I meant to say that ............. imitations ...................... immaterial ..................... , 160 immediate ...................... immediately ..................... immoral ........................ 105 immorality ..................... 98 immortal ........................ 94 immortality .................... loo I move .......................... imperial ........................ impervious ..................... important-ce ................... importer ........................ 10 impose ......................... 114 imposed ........................ 16 impossibility ................... 210 impossible ...................... imposter ........................ n impression ..................... improbability .................. 144 improbable ..................... 144 improve ........................ improved ....................... improvement ................... improves .......... . ............ 61 impugned ...................... 91 I must .......................... 87 jn .............................. in a ............................. in accordance ................... in addition ..................... inadequate ..................... in advance ...................... in all ........................... 17 in all cases ..................... 48 in all its ........................ 83 in a month ..................... in any .......................... in as many as possible ......... 162 in a thousand .................. 117 inaugural (an) .................. in business methods ............ 270 incase they were not (and) ..... inch ............................ inclined . ................... 190 inclosed ........................ inclosed you will find a postal card which I have received and sent circulars .......... included .......... , ............. including ....................... inconsiderable-y ................ 24 inconsiderate ................... 116 in consideration ................ 63 inconvenience .................. incorporated ................... incorporate that ................ increased ....................... incumbent .............. s ....... indebted ........ e ............... 187 indebtedness ..................... independence ................... independently .................. Indiana ......................... Indianapolis .................... indicate ........................ 38 LINE. PAGE. J 9 31 ' 2 147 8 191 2 9 $ 9 86 7 81 5 72 13 137 5 72 5 219 13 i5 20 129 2 9 ! 2 ? s 9 64 13 135 12 135 I3 6 135 235 ii 197 9 153 i 74 2 131 Ij 135 2 J3J 7 96 12 88 2 131 17 153 18 133 18 133 2 74 2 74 2 7 f 4 7 8 94 ii 121 2 74 147 10 149 J 9 187 6 239 13 2 J 86 4 94 ii 127 18 237 9 247 i 114 10 78 18 243 153 131 151 157 211 155 133 119 135 155 239 239 159 223 133 215 279 159 147 147 133 SIGN. indicated I2S indicates 126 indicating indication 127 indicted 186 indispensable 312 individual 92 induced industrial industry industry of tife times -. . . . 3 in each 65 in every 162 in evidence inexperience 32 inexperienced 158 in fact in favor inferior influence influenced 175 influential 156 information informed infringements infringing in further infusion 38 Ing inhabitants 269 in height in his... 67 in his life time :. . in his office in it 147 injunction 130 in life 122 in much 67 in my in my cash book in my general charge in my own hand writing inn .- 24 in not paying in order that 12? in order-to 121 in order to have in other words in our 88 in our life time in payment in point of fact in posting in preference in question inquired of the witness respect- ing the in receipt of in reference (to) 124 in regard in relation to 123 in reply (to) 122 inscribe inscribed inscribed in juxtaposition 268 inscription 152 insecure , 30 in seeming 161 in sending out insertion in service in settlement of bill of inside 188 insist in society in so many instances in some cases 64 in some instances 74 in some way LINE. PAGE. ii 64 ii 64 9 217 11 64 24 133 17 114 12 127 9 155 ij 24; i 24; I 127 119 157 235 20 119 2; 81 16 147 155 149 199 133 195 195 ' 64 127 94 151 217 22? 217 3 M7 94 94 193 *55 12; 1:9 159 223 153 i?7 177 185 M5 94 151 94 96 127 "55 119 a 203 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 299 SIGN. inspected installment installments instances instant instead of instruct instructed t instruction 120 instructions instructive 136 instrumental 159 instrumentality 210 instruments in such action insult 160 insult upon insult , . . . . 255 insure(to) insured intellectual 171 intelligence , intelligent 170 intended intention 125 intercourse interest 168 internal-ly internal revenue 10 international.. in that 2 in that month in the 164 in the discretion of the court.. 64 in the experience (see inexper- ience) 1^7 in the first place 286 in the house 34 in the impossible 270 in the last place 290 in the least place 291 in the list in them in the meantime in the month in the next place 289 in the popular acceptation of the term 8 in the presence in the present suit in the prosecution in (the) same cases 56 in ( the) same words in the second case 287 in the third place 288 in the U S. District Court 4 in the U.'S. patent office 8 in the world 256 in this 114 in this action in this case in this connection in this country in this instance in this respect in this way in those intimate intimately intimation 124 into 95 into consideration into the intoxicating liquor introduce 169 invariable (the) invention no invested jnvoice in what capacity 66 LINE. PAGE. SIGN. 14 183 in what connection 18 149 in what newspaper 19 149 in what place 3 151 in what way. 2 149 in which 9 151 inwhichcase 16 88 in which you 19 237 in which you request us 15 129 in your 20 237 in your direct examination in your hands Iowa I paid him I received a letter irksomeness 188 irreconcilable 31 irregular 109 irregularity 92 irregularly 91 is Isaac 139 is above is an 84 I saw 103 I saw him i saw it I say I say this is each 58 I send you i-3 far 267 is for the is from 162 is generally Ish . LINE. 13 7 114 114 211 241 ri4 114 149 179 114 245 114 211 6 4 177 "4 81 121 249 129 2O5 86 127 114 114 15 15 3 i 9 15 I shall 18 I shall be pleased to form the. . 96 Ishallhave 188 114 I shall not u 114 I shall not be 192 201 I shall not have 44 145 I shall not have you 4 245 I shall not know 27 197 is he 90 114 is his 69 I simply have to say that 123 is in 171 191 is in a true 221 is indispensable 312 197 is in there 34 94 is it 217 is it as 78 114 is it not ; . . 114 island 119 Islandof Cuba 102 125 is nearly 163 114 is next 123 is not 99 221 is not in evidence 151 is not in the 311 243 is not necessary in general 247 is now 209 isolated 237 I sold 199 I speak 271 183 is said 146 197 is seen 101 195 is sent 100 64 issue 94 is that 102 159 is the 87 159 is their own 26 273 is there 74 114 is this 157 is this the note 78 is to be 33 2 1^ I supposed 137 jt 219 it be aporoved IS 8 17 4 24 4 9 12 12 IS 13 13 PAGE. 201 177 205 219 94 149 M7 157 145 209 155 M7 215 155 125 127 64 123 123 74 137 147 78 127 195 197 275 275 131 149 96 149 86 223 33 133 151 123 137 125 131 135 123 78 78 225 121 159 114 121 7 4 78 179 245 112 86 185 114 259 237 159 181 96 1 7 * 7 78 133 78 199 207 78 193 74 235 300 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. it can be amended it can be done it can be worked it can only 104 it could have been 84 item 117 items : Ith It had (would) 141 it had (would) not 145 it has been 77 I think 58 I think he does I think not 51 I think not in 74 I think not in any 80 I think so Ithinkthat 76 I think they I think we 156 I think we would 76 I think you 112 I think you are 70 I think you may 63 I think you must 4 I think you must have 76 I think you will it is 163 it is a-n it is carried it is claimed it is entirely 19 it is entirely your own 7 it is fDr you (and) it is moved and it is necessary it is not material it is not necessary it is no use it is possible it is the 123 it is very necessary 10 it is worse than ., it may as well ?i it may be 104 it may require 88 it might have it might have been it not be I told you so 73 it ought 140 it ought not , 144 it ought to be it ought to have 142 its 2 it seemed it seems to have it seems to me that itself 213 its general it will 6 it will have 35 it will have had .' . . . 36 it will probably it would be it would (had) 141 it would (had) not 14; it would have 143 I understand so I understand that I want a case I was Iwill QI I will be i^ I will do 200 Iwillhave i6S Iwill let I will not 48 I will not have 80 LINE. PAGE. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. 16 239 I will not have you 64 8 115 ii 243 I will not have you make 88 n 129 19 159 I will read it 18 25 131 I will send you 8 151 11 125 I will try 168 21 10 64 I would 12 3 225 I write 261 12 i 96 1 (the initial) i 06 Jackson i 5 86 Jacksonville 19 4 78 jail 20 2 12 78 jailer 31 3 4 86 James 9 10 121 January i 10 127 jay 8 2 13 199 jealous 62 8 10 125 Jehovah 3 i 209 Jerusalem 20 129 J-isus 14 10 119 Jesus Christ 19 2 14 133 Jew 7 i 9 135 Jewish church 64 8 133 jobbers 7 i 129 jobbing 6 10 123 John i 4 2^5 Johnson 60 6 18 86 jointed 39 4 20 181 joint stock company 55 7 3 239 jokes 3 4 225 jollity (the) 6 3 127 journal 114 17 1 131 journey 86 n 6 223 joy 4 i 8 235 joyful 182 23 3 225 joys 179 23 14 201 judge 67 9 8 185 judgment 183 23 19 157 judiciary 120 15 9 147 July 16 125 jumper 99 2 129 junction 22 3 20 H7 June 10 i . 5 94 Junes 22 2 13 131 junior 11 119 jurisdiction 13 211 jurist iQ 11 221 jury 175 22 10 157 7 72 just a 56 A i 96 just as i 96 justice 102 13 10 159 justification 4 i 96 justification by faith 212 7 i 78 justify 100 9 7 199 just the same 19 17 255 jute 139 18 7 243 juvenile 4 6 114 juxtaposition 7 9 197 K - 1 86 K (the initial) 5 121 Kansas H 5 121 Katie (Katy) 32 19 159 keep 4 2 159 keepers 318 20 i 96 keep them 19 i 96 Kentucky i? i 96 kept them i.> 6 201 key 10 i 20 207 kill 51 7 i;-{ kin 12 8 i7 kind '. 104 13 12 137 kindly 152 14 20 135 kindness 104 13 25 129 king 79 21 133 kingdom " 201 kingdom of Christ 241 Q 3 8b kingdom of heaven 240 v 10 135 kitchen 98 13 127 33 105 187 151 53 53 M9 145 27 127 Si 27 121 239 239 175 60 119 127 245 '27 129 123 135 I-I 64 6c 245 96 60 127 - 105 M7 112 1-7 114 i-7 147 53 279 to 137 72 74 114 114 133 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 301 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. kitten 14 279 knee 7.1 46 knelt 59 8 121 knew 3 i 27 knife 46 4 60 know 8 i 46 know a 53 4 knowest 58 5 knowingly 201 5 know it ii knowledge 19 known 45 4 know you are (I) 2 Kurr 16 3 L (the initial) labor 82 8 labored 38 5 laces 45 6 lad 90 12 ladder 95 12 ladies 143 18 jads 106 14 Tidy 139 18 lamp 70 6 land 19 landscape 64 8 lane 9 language 5 languisn 24 3 large 16 larger 12 i largest 13 i lashed 86 n lass no 14 lasses 35 5 last 90 6 late 6 i lately later 19 latitudes 120 latter 79 latterly laughed 119 laughter lavish law Lawrence laws... lawyers lay lazy lead leads leaper 175 learn 19 learned 10 2 leaves 19 leave that - 18 leaving 20 lecture (a) i lectures 17 ledger: , 20 leers 83 8 left 13 legacy 60 legal 160 20 legislation 7 legislator 83 u legislature 84 n leisure 100 13 lenient 170 22 less 80 9 less and less '. 9 lesson '. 106 9 less than 6 let me 6 let me say to you 20 let-as 79 5 14 99 H 155 72 64 114 60 33 105 53 123 137 127 121 119 72 245 137 149 74 119 7 4 78 78 119 64 159 133 137 123 153 137 237 279 46 145 129 245 27 38 ' 123 '55 185 209 273 259 151 53 213 119 119 249 133 J33 119 137 72 249 60 149 153 277 86 SIGN. let us have . . Lewis liable libation 82 liberal 106 liberal rebate liberty lie 22 lies lieu, life. LINE. PAGE. 6 157 12 145 -r- lifter 119 lighted 70 like 81 like a receipt likely 113 likes 32 like this liking 115 lily 20 limited 108 Lincoln line 176 linen linseed oil lip liquidation 40 liquor (and) list 78 listen 28 listened literal sense of prophesy 28 literary 42 literature 43 little 118 little by little 254 load loaded loafer 24 loan 39 loans 40 locate located location (the) lock box locker 128 London loneliness long look at looked looked upon looking up Lord 7 Lord Jesus Christ 167 127 64 239 81 J57 125 277 121 72 72 223 64 181 131 153 241 19? 133 201 60 121 257 129 127 127 78 114 i53 185 125 60 60 149 179 179 153 123 151 279 74 185 203 203 157 lore 44 4 53 lost 91 6 86 lot 155 20 135 lots . 9 153 Louis 20 2 46 Louisa 14 2 127 Louisiana 18 147 Louisville 15 M7 love 41 4 60 loved 57 4 64 lover 59 8 133 love their 171 22 127 lovingly 66 9 129 low 13 2 46 lower 13 153 lower extremities ; 56 7 131 lower prices i=j3 lowest 92 6 86 loya! (and) 18 275 lucky 149 13 86 lumber 101 8 64 lustrou.-s 18 3 121 lusty 139 : 133 lying 3 197 302 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PACK. M 33 M (the initial) 105 nVachine 150 iq 135 machinery 152 19 135 machinist 151 ig 135 Mack 12 2 38 madder 130 17 119 made 116 10 78 made the 18 155 madeyou 116 10 78 magazine 30 4 129 magnanimous 177 3 114 magnanimously 151 19 119 magnesia 174 2 114 magnificence 176 3 114 magnificent 28 4 131 magnify 175 2 114 magnitude 128 16 135 maiden so 4 64 mail 43 3 7 Maine 5 149 mainly 92 8 94 maintained 13 241 maintain the (and) 15 241 make 22 74 make a 10 15.3 make a regular 12 235 make it 134 i 96 makes 6 149 makes the 18 749 makes you 6 217 make the 113 9 78 making a 4 r$7 malady 3 193 Malcolm i 187 malice 15 273 man 42 4 60 manager 16 151 Manhattan 10 245 mankind 27 4 127 manner 12 81 mannered 168 21 119 man's 43 4 60 manufacture 7 88 manufacturer 199 6 96 manufacturers 201 6 96 manufactures 200 6 96 manufacturing 15 151 many 149 13 86 many thanks us n 78 March ii 145 margin 15 241 Maria 106 112 Marion 8 157 Mark 13 149 marked 97 7 86 market 98 7 86 Marr 99 112 Marshall ' i 177 Martin 14 145 Maryland 17 149 Massachusetts 9 149 masses 63 8 121 master 14 78 match 9 247 mates 30 2 64 matter 14 179 matters 12 157 mattress 45 3 64 matures no u 78 maturity 2 155 maximum n 88 maxims of the age 35 5 119 May 27 4 27 maybe 2 i 86 maybenot 146 19 127 maybeshown 17 223 may be so 7 209 may it please the court 51 7 135 SIGN. may it please your honor 3 may not 53 maynotbe 176 may recommend May's 88 Maysville may there 120 maze 34 mazy 35 me 261 mean 65 meaning means 147 mean to say meanwhile 93 me a reason measure measured 128 measure their 129 meet 199 meeting 12 meetings meet you melancholy 191 Melbourne member member of the press 248 membership 92 membership committee (the).. Members of Congress 2=0 Members of Parliament 2*1 members of the legislature 249 memoranda memorandum memory Memphis mend 187 mental mental ability mental (the) mercanti le company merchandise merchant merchants mercy 150 mere 267 merely 106 merged merry 123 mesdames Messrs 97 met metals method methods 270 metre 83 Michael 146 Michigan microcosm 140 microscope 85 midget 79 midnight 47 might ii mighty 12 migrate i;^ mill 46 million (numeral) mills mind 86 mine miner 102 minimum Minnesota minor 102 minute 96 minutes (the) misapprehension miscellaneous business 96 "2 J^: 211 91 "3 127 195 209 135 155 81 114 121 23: 114 114 131 279 193 247 145 221 201 159 135 112 9 8 153 04 129 149 119 72 72 64 64 64 129 53 159 149 12; 119 235 225 2T.7 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 303 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. misconstrue 124 112 misdemeanor 164 21 133 misfortune , 23 3 135 misrepresent 217 8 96 misrepresentation 218 8 96 misrepresented 210 8 96 misrule 68 9 125 miss 45 6 38 misses 99 112 mjssionary 19 251 missions 44 4 60 Mississippi i mi Missouri 15 151 mist 81 7 60 mistake 4 157 mistaken 17 237 mistress 182 23 133 mistrust go 12 127 misty 44 6 137 misunderstanding 20 149 mitred , 14 2 121 mixed 186 5 96 mocker 182 23 119 modify our laws 2 251 moment (the) 10 197 momentary 180 23 127 momentum 179 23 127 Monday i 145 money 51 7 119 Montgomery City 15 i;i month 7 151 monthly i 235 months i 153 Montpelier TI 159 Montreal 8 153 moon 27 4 129 moral 104 9 64 morbid 15 279 more 45 5 53 more or less 262 n 114 moreover 4 81 more respected 20 239 more than 21 2 86 morgue 3 197 morning 4 155 morrow 117 10 94 mortality 99 13 135 mortgage 186 24 137 mortuary 78 10 119 most 9 151 mother 84 6 64 motion 19 3 135 motionless (and) 82 10 72 mounds 176 22 119 mount 14 157 mounts 123 16 121 mourners 16 279 mourns 171 22 123 moustache 14 203 mouth 47 6 46 move T 76 7 72 moved 9 205 movement 13 98 Mr 9 81 Mr. Chairman 12 273 Mr. President 10 235 Mr. President and gentlemen.. i 243 Mrs 100 112 Mr. Secretary 9 243 Mt. Holly 14 i?7 much 13 74 much are 94 12 "9 much will 8 i 86 mud 10 i 64 muddy 64 8 133 mule 87 ii 133 multiform 38 5 135 multiple-y 39 J 35 multiplicity 40 5 135 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. multiplied 84 u 72 murder ' 103 7 86 murdered 82 n 137 muscles (the) 76 7 72 music 171 22 musings 200 5 mustbe 315 i must have occured i must say that (and) 19 my 27 4 my dear friends 3 my letter 18 my own 18 2 my present position 6 myself 212 6 my services 13 mysteries 183 23 mysterious 184 23 myth 4 6 6 N N (the initial) nail 47 5 name (the) 66 5 named 49 4 names (the) 3 naptha jo nation 47 5 national association 5 native 48 5 natural (the) 14 nature- d 4 naval 155 20 navy n nay 2 i near 48 5 nearly 17 nebula 4 i necessarily 159 2 necessary 17 necessities 87 13 necessity 51 7 neck 19 need 9 i needed 174 22 needless..- 34 5 need not be 1^7 16 needs 85 12 needs them 15 neglect 188 24 negligence 115 15 neighborhood 22 3 nephew (and) 15 never , 3 never received any 9 never shall 200 25 nevertheless 104 9 new---, 35 5 Newark 14 New Haven 12 New Jersey _ 14 New Jerusalem 98 13 New Orleans is New Sharon 12 New York 3 next 185 nibble 82 11 nicest 59 5 nigh i i night 8 i nine nine hundred nine hundred and eight 57 4 nine hundred and eighteen 59 nine hundred and eighty 58 nine hundred and nineteen 60 -37 153 145 27 277 189- Il a * 187 133 133 40 33 105 53 72- 64 237 157 137 64 135 137 86 72 157 121 129 119 147 74 209 131 94 3' 179 M5 157 119- 147 145 '59 96 27 64 99 99 112 112 112 112 304 HAVENS PRAC1ICA PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. nine million 99 nineteen 99 nineteenth 61 5 in nineteen thousand 62 5 112 nine thousand 99 ninetieth 64 5 '112 ninety , 99 ninny in 14 121 ninth 56 4 112 no 80 9 72 Noah 22 3 46 nobly 180 3 111 nobody 267 16 96 nodded 13 193 no do.ubt 13 197 noisiest 134 17 '19 no longer i 249 nominations 19 237 no more money 19 181 nondescript 143 18 127 none 78 8 72 no one 23 2 86 no other 167 21 125 no other corroboration 15 217 no other evidence 12 223 nor ii 81 no reason 18 213 no reason for 4 189 nor is it the place 3 249 normal 183 23 123 nor since 17 177 north 99 13 127 North Carolina 10 151 northeast 95 12 127 northern 94 12 127 northwest .-. 96 12 127 noses 8 i no no sir 16 88 not 3 98 notary 138 18 129 not be known 19 159 not be written 14 207 note ii 147 note contents (and) 14 157 noted in 14 133 not entirely 9 193 notes 29 2 64 notethe 13 149 not generally 7 219 not getting 14 149 nothing 72 9 127 nothing no 14 123 notice n 203 noticeable 309 16 114 noticed 14 107 noticed his (I) 14 197 notify you (and) 6 211 notion 54 7 125 notonly 7 15, not since then 7 219 not that .. 12 2ii not that you 13 211 not to be 2:2 10 114 not to call 235 8 114 not to come v . 156 20 125 not to do '. 172 22 121 not to have , 154 20 131 not to have been 253 10 114 notwithstanding 105 9 94 November 14 1^5 now 88 8 94 now and then 79 10 131 noway 47 6 129 nowhere 88 n 127 number 9 81 numbered 14 2 133 numbers of them 15 2 133 numerous. O oak Oakland.. SIGN, LINE. FACE. 3 i5i 33 16 2 31 7 US oath 15 2 31 oaths 9 223 obedience 7 275 object 3 74 objected 20 177 objection 37 3 78 objectionable ; oo 123 objective 38 3 7* objector 36 3 7^ objects 35 3 78 oblige 261 12 96 obtain 2 157 obtained n 237 occasion 86 12 72 occasioned 200 25 125 occasions 72 6 72 occupation i7 247 occupy 18 249 occur 19 3 125 occurred 190 24 H9 occurrence (the) 14 i57 ocean 10 245 o'clock 5 197 October 3 i55 of 65 of a i i of all n i 86 of an 2 i 72 of a view 4 205 of brackets 5 147 of course 47 4 94 off i 74 off and on 264 ii 114 offer 35 5 123 offered (I) 3 215 offered you 13 i55 offering 162 21 i33 offer this 2 215 office 50 4 78 officer 13 177 of his 115 10 73 of it 137 i 96 of its ( i 129 of its having been 8 153 ofourline i 245 of our own 32 2 of ours 31 2 86 of ourselves 218 7 114 of our treasurer 9 a3j 'often 49 4 78 of that 12 ?8 of that note '. 11 211 of the 3 i 72 of the fourth instant 4 147 of their 138 i 96 of their matters 13 223 of their own 139 i 96 of them 59 4 7 s ofthis 8 isi of this city 8 177 ofthisclub 3 237 of this county 6 i77 of those 17 I9i of unpaid 2 u5 of what 9 177 Ohio 8 251 Oi 33 oil 9 2 31 Oil City 18 1^3 old 86 13 72 oldest 17 253 on on a 39 3 72 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 305 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. on account 10 98 on account of the fact 257 n 114 on all 13 i 86 on behalf 6 191 once 89 8 94 on deposit 8 159 one (the word) 86 13 72 one(the figure) 99 one day 3 209 one fourth (see one quarter) 84 112 onehalf 82 112 oneitherhand 10 98 one month 14 209 one or theother 194 25 119 onequarter 83 112 one's 86 13 72 one's own 85 12 72 on his 16 179 on his desk 8 221 only 76 7 72 only receive that 10 215 only that he 18 213 on my 7 183 on my election 19 243 on our 29 2 86 onourbank , t, 159 onthat ,... 8 183 on that day 6 211 on that journey 77 8 72 on that note 18 209 on the 40 3 72 on the back of 14 207 on the contrary 261 n 114 on the day I 209 onthem 15 145 on the night 15 170 on the one hand 6 90 on the other hand n 98 on the page of your ledger n 157 on the part of the 8 255 on this case 12 179 on this occasion 17 219 on time 15 149 onto 94 8 94 onward 18 245 on what line 7 201 on which n 157 on your invoice 5 149 Oo 33 open 2 i 123 opened 112 14 125 operated 13 245 operation 115 15 127 opinion 23 81 opinions 156 15 86 opportunities 315 18 114 opportunity 10 98 oppose 15 2 127 opposed 13 241 opposing 316 19 114 opposite 84 ii 72 opposition 16 2 127 oppression 116 15 127 option 40 5 127 or 6; or a 154 20 137 or an 13 i 72 oration 58 8 133 orations 17 259 orator i 273 oratory 17 259 order 74 6 64 order any 196 25 133 ordered 5 1 45 ordering 4 M7 orderof 14 219 orders 17 145 Oregon IQ 151 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. organ 12 81 organic 139 u 86 organism 140 n 86 organization 141 n 86 organizations 15 245 organize 138 n 86 organized 136 17 133 organs 137 n 86 orhe ii i 72 or 1 12 i 72 orif 66 4 86 origin 152 19 125 original motion 13 239 ornamental 12 2 131 or not 40 3 or the 14 i other 14 others 20 otherwise 12 ought ought a 27 2 ought an 20 2 ought 1 28 2 oughtthe 30 2 ought to be i ought to have been 175 22 72 74 147 201 65 72 72 72 72 255 119 74 147 191 ou ou attention 17 ou names 14 ou next 19 237 ou own 19 2 86 ours 24 2 78 out '.... 7 74 outcome 4 249 outfits 6 207 outline (and) , 9 196 outlook 12 237 out of 65 4 86 out of the 14 183 outside 46 3 78 outside of 19 149 outsider 3 255 outsiders 20 253 out the 12 159 out there 10 179 outward 45 3 78 outwit 47 4 78 over 2 8 1 overcame 150 19 129 overcome 133 10 86 over it 166 21 123 overlooked 13 J 57 overruled 20 177 over their 131 10 86 overthrow 132 10 86 Ow 33 owe 35 5 3i owed ii 207 owed him 20 213 Owen 23 3 40 owes 19 207 owing 202 5 IJ 4 owl 17 3 31 own and 13 J 59 owned 147 19 123 owner 92 12 129 owners . 10 155 owns 68 9 127 oyster 175 22 133 P 33 P (the initial) _. 105 paces .". 43 6 38 pack 123 16 133 package (the) 14 *45 packages 9 I 55 packed(I) 16 219 packing 12 i;7 page 268 17 96 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. 15 181 18 149 8 145 I 211 133 paid paid him paid it paid you money Pains 55 7 paint i palm 180 23 paper 144 fs paper you are reading from 7 paragraph 128 16 parallel 96 12 paralyse 14 2 paralysis 2 paralytic 112 14 parapet 26 4 paraphrase 196 25 parents (the) 10 Parliament 87 n parliamentarian 88 11 parliamentary 86 n part 18 partial 190 24 partially 131 17 particular 9 particular branch of 2 particularly o particular reason 10 partnership 144 18 part of ii part of the 266 15 party I pass 315 19 passed 6 passion 187 24 pastoral 74 10 patent i patents 1 1 Paternoster 6 patience (and) 15 paused 130 17 paving 17 Pay... 5 i payable 19 payee 18 2 paying ( we are) 9 payment 13 payments 19 pay you the i peaches 53 7 Peck 92 peculiar peculiar case 221 8 peculiarity 223 9 peculiarly 222 9 pecuniary (the) 6 Peel 15 2 peeled 54 7 peer 18 penalty n Pennsylvania 162 3 Pennsylvania Railroad 163 3 people i peopled 26 4 per 7 per annum 17 perceive 114 15 per cent 4 percentage 14 per cent commission 10 per cent discount , 19 per cent per annum 20 per cent premium 8 perfect 102 13 perfected 103 13 perfection 104 13 perfectly y SIGN. perform perhaps 90 peril 183 period (a) periodic perish permanent 131 permit me to call your attention permitted . per month peroration 60 perseverance Persia 142 person personally persons 38 persuade Philadelphia philanthropic 100 philanthropist 159 philanthropy philosophy 184 phonographer 192 phonographic 126 phonography phrase 134 phrased phrasing physician 16 physiological 103 physiology 160 picked up pickle 170 pictures 269 pie 4 piece Pierce 96 ;lead... LINE. 6 12 23 I 8 6 17 P'gl Pike piled 31 pillar 27 Pine 26 Pittsburg pity 176 placed placing the manufacture plaid plainly plaintiff plaintiff (the) plaintiffs 120 plaintiff's machine 7 I plan 118 ii planetary 64 planned 62 plans ii 19 plant 62 planter 63 plead 7i 9 pleader 94 12 pleasantly (and) n please 4 I please advise us please have please insert 7 please itemize please let me please notify us i f < please oblige us 1 5 please say 3 please send the statement please take 17 pleasure pledge plenary 7 plentitude 234 pYied i4 i3 plow 44 6 pluck 95 13 133 127 2/9 127 235 277 187 121 245 213 129 2/3 15' 121 I2 3 81 123 129 123 81 137 225 225 135 13S 121 145 127 96 27 151 112 i=3 112 135 52 46 187 129 237 239 153 179 131 131 129 125 247 I2i tSS 149 151 153 M5 MS 145 239 145 '55 81 277 121 114 135 129 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 307 plump... pointing. points policy lish. SIGN. . 116 LINE. 15 146 PAGE. 129 191 255 179 123 249 121 125 155 poli political polled -. 162 poor 159 poorly populace 48 popular 188 5 96 population 80 10 129 populous 48 6 129 portion 182 23 123 portrait 61 5 64 positions 122 16 133 positive 183 5 96 positively 17 213 positively refused (he) 4 215 possess 198. 25 127 possessed 199 25 127 possesses 200 25 127 possession 55 5 60 possessive 100 13 131 possessor 99 13 131 possibility 9 223 possible 182 5 96 possibly.... 20 207 post ' 62 6 60 postage 75 7 94 postal 76 7 94 postal card 77 7 94 poster, 88 8 60 posterior 200 25 123 posterity ,' 83 n 72 postmaster 5 155 postmortem 152 19 131 post mortem examination i 203 postoffice 18 147 postpone 74 7 94 posy 76 10 135 pot 10 187 potion 29 3 60 potive 28 3 60 Potomac 10 245 pots 183 23 131 pounces 82 n 131 pounds 6 149 poured 82 10 72 poverty. 13 81 power 2 253 powerful 192 4 114 power of the court 66 9 125 practicable 10 237 practical 17 159 practically 84 n 129 practice 82 n 129 practiced 83 n 129 praised 63 6 60 prances 52 5 60 prancing 86 n 119 pray 8 277 prayer 8 2/7 precaution 8 155 precedent 55 7 123 precisely .... 46 6 135 predecessor 3 245 preeminent 132 17 127 prefixed '. 131 17 125 prejudice 147 19 133 prejudices 157 16 86 preliminary 80 10 121 preliminary request 12 179 preparation-. 0,6 12 123 prepare 100 13 123 prepared i[ 155 prepayment 11 151 present 2 151 present company 13 159 S1GN . present nominations ............ presents ........................ 86 presents the best ............... 86 present suit (the) .............. present the resolution .......... preside ......................... presidency (the) ............. . .. President ....................... 56 president's message ............ 44 presiding judge ................ press (the) ........... ........... 239 presume that ................... presuming it (and) ............. presuming that ................ presumption (the) ............. pretentions ..................... 51 pretty .......................... prevailing ...................... prevented an ................... previous (any) .................. previously ...................... Price ........................... 97 prices ........................... pride ........................... priest ........................... 114 principal ........................ principally ...................... principle ........................ principles ....................... 157 print ............................ printed ......................... printing .......... . ............. prior ............................ prison .......................... ro2 private .......................... privilege ........................ probable ........................ 187 probably ........................ 187 probate (the) ................... problems ........................ process .......................... 66 procession ...................... 116 produced ....................... product ......................... professionally ................... profit ............................ profitable ....................... profitably ....................... 44 progress ........................ prominent ...................... 130 promise ......................... promised ........................ promises ....................... promissory ...................... prompt ......................... promptly ........................ promulgation ................... 120 proof ............................ 174 proper .......................... 99 properly ........................ 98 property ........................ 44 proponent (for the) ............. proportion ...................... 95 propounded ..................... prosecutor ...................... prosper ........................ prosperous ..................... protected (are fully) ............ protection ....................... protest ......................... protested ........................ prove ........................... *74 proved a ........................ provided ........................ providence ...................... prc'i dential .................... providing ....................... provision (a) ................... Prussia...., .................... 48 LINE. PAGE. 2 239 12 72 12 72 7 177 4 241 20 '243 19 243 7 123 6 119 i 195 9 114 I4S 157 223 125 203 241 193 213 112 145 279 '8 81 81 86 177 157 177 191 129 239 277 i') 3 i/ 13 4 2 24 24 I 17 9 191 245 131 123 251 241 191 255 239 121 245 127 209 279 209 213 149 157 121 133 123 123 133 191 123 191 IS? 245 245 155 155 207 215 X33 81 225 255 12", HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE pry, 15 2 53 psalm in 14 IIQ public 189 5 96 publication 191 5 96 publish 189 5 96 publisher 190 5 96 publishing u 177 puff 5 i 60 puff-s 17 2 60 putty ii I 60 pullet 46 4 64 pulmonary 100 13 129 pulse 5 !57 punctual 2 277 punctuation 20 225 punish 15 81 punished 38 5 127 punishment 15 81 punster 89 8 60 punsters 28 4 133 purchase 10 149 purchases 14 isi pure 194 25 135 purity 74 10 123 purpose 194 2; 123 pursuit 16 245 push 16 159 pushing 13 255 pussy 23 3 119 put 57 6 94 putative 58 8 119 putting 19 195 putty 162 21 135 put you 57 6 94 pyramid 150 19 127 Q (the initial) , 105 quadrant 26 2 94 quaff 119 15 129 quaint 19 2 94 quake ; 23 2 94 qualify 27 3 94 quality 28 3 94 quantities 3 151 quantity 29 3 94 quarrel 160 20 135 quart 20 2 94 quarter 83 112 quarto 22 2 94 quartz 21 2 94 queer 17 2 94 quell 43 6 133 query is 2 94 quest jon 9 81 questionable 14 247 questions 17 179 question (the) IQ 199 quick 24 2 94 quicken 25 2 94 quiet 31 3 94 quinine 3 3 94 quit-e 4 98 quitea 313 18 114 quota 33 3 94 quotations 7 151 quote 32 3 94 quote you 9 153 R 33 R (theinitial) 105 race 25 4 38 races 44 6 38 raciest 126 16 133 racings 199 5 iu racy , 26 4 '-8 radient 52 7 raffle 190 24 ij5 rail.... , 49 5 53 railroad 196 25 i>i rain (the) 82 10 '/z 245 275 535 535 J37 53 125 121 60 125 125 131 38 127 273 155 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. rajse (I) 18 237 raised 106 14 127 raised from the dead 59 8 131 ramrod 15 i;i rank i ranks i rapid 131 17 rapidly 78 10 rapturous i;6 20 rare ii 2 rarer 33 3 rate 3 i rates rather 138 18 rather than 88 11 ration 25 3 rational 13=; 17 rationally 136 17 ravel 71 9 ray 2 i reach 190 24 reaching 17 reach you 6 reactive 186 24 read (pronounced reed) 101 7 read (pronounced red) 102 7 reader 44 6 reading 164 19 readit 132 n ready 183 23 rea : 3 i really 20 reason (of the) 13 reason which 1 20 reassert 18 rebate 9 rebuked 9 rebuttal 9 recalled 4 receipt of which receive 42 3 received 43 3 received at 16 received back 9 received such 5 received the impression 20 receive them 8 receive there 14 receiving 3 receiving any n recent 7 reception 140 is reclaim 130 17 reclining 13 recognise ; 137 recognised (1) 5 recognition 138 recollect 151 19 recollection 152 19 recommend 139 recommendation 140 reconciliation 167 21 record 10 recorded 16 reco ver-y 15 re-cross examination 17 redeeming 9 redemption 136 17 redirect examination 14 refer 91 12 reference 126 n referred (and) 13 refined 46 6 reflective 160 2J reform : iq refuse i, refused j^ regard 178 3 94 129 131 22; 4 7 181 M7 255 275 219 22I I 64 64 i;i 211 247 193 213 149 209 209 151 127 137 199 112 203 112 121 121 112 112 129 149 153 221 211 277 121 211 119 94 145 133 i-ii tt 159 213 114 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 309 SIGN. regret 179 regular 108 regular salary of regulate the reign reject relating relatively 106 relays religion Rem remain 2 remained 82 remaining remains 14 remark remarkable remarkably remarked remember remember that 157 remembrance 114 remind you remit remittance remittances remitted rendered 170 render his report at that render such a ^nd) render unto 84 renewal renew an 38 renewed n t renew it 127 renowned 26 repeatedly replying to your favor of recent date replying to your letter reply to yours report reports represent.. ., representation 214 representative 215 representative body represented 216 reproved 86 Republican 192 republish 193 request 38 require 37 required 122 equiring the eside esidence esolution (a) esolved respect-ful-ly respectfully yours respective respectively responds rest rests resumed 194 retail 8 retain them 158 return-ed returning return the check revelation Reverend review (and) 164 revives 24 revolution revolutionized LINE. PAGE. 3 114 9 64 17 187 10 237 1 6 279 16 157 12 223 14 129 3 an 5 81 72 203 60 81 81 81 81 81 245 153 147 149 157 123 239 225 131 187 125 131 123 131 213 149 149 149 1 96 94. 94 129 245 ir.i I9S 237 241 88 M5 157 223 211 133 131 86 145 149 149 81 J-7 86 60 81 275 rib SIGN. 54 LINE. 4 PAGE. ribbed 55 4 64 ribbon no 14 137 Rich 2 right right hand rightly rights (the) right to the last 236 18 ii 20 7 9 145 179 213 225 Hi ripe 53 7 46 rise (a) 16 153 rising 6 2<59 rivalry 18 247 river i3 2C1 roast 67 60 robe 124 16 127 Robert 93 112 rock 52 4 64 rocked 53 4 64 Rockland 14 roller 23 3 53 rollers 4 M7 Roman 75 10 120 Roman Catholic i73 4 06 Rome in 14 137 roof i I 60 roofs 13 2 60 room 17 193 rooms I 235 root : 103 13 131 Roote 10 2 38 ropes 41 5 46 rosy 163 21 129 routine 19 251 row 6 rubber 122 16 12, rue 3 i 38 ruin 119 15 125 ruined i=8 20 "5 rule 12 2 53 rule a Cl 4 72 ruled 83 1 1 72 rules 15 157 rule the 78 10 131 runs 20 159 rural 24 3 53 rush 9* 13 127 rye 1 i 38 s 33 S (the initial) 105 sable c6 6 53 sabler 67 / 53 sack 23 3 38 Saco 5 149 sacred 36 3 * 64 sadler 10 137 safe 40 5 38 safely 9 249 safer : 61 6 53 sage 3i 4 38 saggle said 60 106 6 8 Ii said plaintiff (the) said to have 112 16 14 223 123 saints 8 277 saith 105 8 86 salary 12 187 sale .'.... 34 5 46 sales 16 177 sales (and) 14 153 salesman (a) 15 217 sales slip (the) II 149 saloons II 245 Salt Lake City 13 153 salvation 6 salvation of the soul rtf 9 96 3io HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. same 37 5 38 same as (the) 10 155 same cases 164 21 131 same month n 217 sample 8 147 samples 20 145 Samuel 5 149 San Francisco 12 159 sang .' 72 6 72 Sarah 193 25 no sash 35 4 46 satchel 92 12 131 satisfaction 220 9 96 satisfactory ,-.. 228 9 96 satisfied 12 88 satisfy 12 88 satisfy you 7 223 Saturday 7 147 Savannah 19 145 save 38 5 38 saved 3 277 saves us 186 24 131 save trouble (to) 6 149 save us 170 22 no saving 271 20 96 sayings 9 145 savior 174 4 96 savor 63 6 ^3 saw 75 7 72 saw it 10 191 saw that 19 205 saw the 75 7 72 say 27 4 27 saying 147 19 137 says 55 7 135 say that a 10 239 say that we would 9 153 say they 12 78 scales 6 149 scarcely 16 249 scarcity (a) 84 n 72 scarlet 76 10 131 schedule (a) 13 241 scholar 58 8 129 school 71 9 123 schooled 190 24 133 scientists 81 10 72 score 55 7 131 Scotch 4 245 scrawl 39 5 121 screw 135 17 127 scriptural 231 9 96 scripture 13 88 scrub 147 19 127 scull 5 195 season 266 15 96 secession 2 88 seclude 46 6 137 secluded 47 -6 137 seclusion 48 6 137 second 6 i 112 second day 4 183 seconded 8 235 second handed 156 15 86 second the motion (I) 7 235 secret 71 9 Tig secretary (the) 4 235 secretion 108 14 133 secretive 107 14 133 sections :. 86 u 135 secular 71 7 =3 secure 102 13 127 secured 265 15 96 secure it 7 153 see a few 13 203 seed 143 18 129 seeing 198 5 114 seeks 15 221 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. seemed 78 8 72 seemly 43 5 125 seems . 68 seen in the o 199 sees a brother 162 18 seethal :3 i;? see that they are 10 14- seethe 3 197 seized 315 is "4 seizure 66 9 I3s seldom 13 78 select(and) 15 237 selected n 2^7 selection 74 7 72 self 51 7 127 self esteem 152 '12 self evident I'-i 112 selfish 153 1I2 selling (the) 14 i;9 sells i79 23 135 sellus ii 157 send 40 3 "4 send a copy send an 55 4 send them 4 !;9 send this 13 149 send us 81 send us the slip n M9 send with them 5 M7 send you a n 189 sense 74 sensitiveness i5 2 ~9 sensitive to the last 90 12 125 sensitive to the touch 237 9 114 sent 39 3 64 sentiment 48 4 sentimental 103 13 125 sentiments 17 249 sent me sent the 18 i?~ sent us 80 5 sent you 14 145 separate 163 21 123 separated 14 277 separately 16 223 separation 164 21 123 September nS 15 127 series 12 225 serious 19 243 sermon 92 12 125 sermons 17 259 servant n 245 service 118 15 119 services 162 21 131 session 266 15 96 set 16 22; setforth 61 4 set off 60 4 set of furniture (a) 15 i 1 " 1 set of your circulars 3 157 settle 57 6 53 settled 12 157 settlement 16 u7 settlements 17 M7 settler 69 7 53 seven 99 seven-eighths 86 112 seven hundred seven million seventeen 99 seventeen hundred 49 4 112 seventeenth 4^ 4 I' 2 seventh 45 4 "2 seven thousand 99 seventieth So 4 112 seventy 99 seventy-five 45 4 112 seventy thousand Si 4 112 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY, several 175 severe shade shadow 15 Shah rg shall shallbe 42 shallbe met shal 1 be pleased shall be very glad shall 1 27 shall I further prove it shallit 28 shall there 172 shape (the) share 42 sharing sharp shave 163 shave it 133 Shaw 29 shawl , 43 she 154 sheet sheeting she had 154 she is 163 Shekinah (the) 318 shel lac 54 shelling 60 shilling 52 shines 50 ship shipment shipped 28 Shirley 101 shoe 27 short 71 short-a short-ah short-e shortened (shorthand) 72 short-i short-o short-oo short-u should 67 should a 47 shouldan 49 should be shoul d be done should do so (I) shouldered should have 20 shouldhe 46 should 1 48 should the 50 should you go 77 show 116 showed 74 showing book shown 49 shown us shows 36 shy i. .. 21 sick . sickly no side side of sidereal 7o sieger 58 sigh 19 signature signatures 268 signed 22 signer 100 significance 233 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. 4 ' 96 4 245 4 147 74 137 243 147 241 137 177 135 131 197 53 245 247 131 94 46 53 135 153 153 135 137 114 53 137 53 60 153 157 137 112 27 137 33 33 33 131 33 33 33 33 72 72 72 225 193 197 199 133 72 72 72 72 135 72 217 60 14; 46 27 193 64 '79 205 53 27 96 121 137 96 191 193 iSi 217 191 72 191 53 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. significancy 234 10 96 significant 235 10 96 signification 236 10 96 significative 237 10 96 signified 15 signify 15 signing 15 signing of this codicil n signing the contract i signing this note for 19 sign in your presence 14 sign the 61 4 sign this document 13 silk 88 8 similarity 239 10 similar kind (a) 7 similar-ly 238 10 simple 240 10 simplify-ed 240 10 simply 240 10 simply this 15 since . 18 since (and) 16 since the 6 since then ( and) 19 single 106 9 singularity 242 10 singular-ly 241 10 sinner 65 6 sip 7 i sir 9 sire 30 4 Sir Robert Beale 93 sisterly 77 7 sisters 10 situated 195 25 situation 196 25 six six hundred six million sixteen sixteenth 42 4 sixteen thousand 43 4 sixth 41 3 six thousand sixtieth 44 4 sixty size 75 10 sizes 12 2 skipped 34 slander 131 n slaughtered. 96 12 sleep 269 18 slender enough 83 n slight 41 3 slip ii sloped i slovenly (a) 80 9 slow....: 115 15 slowly 19 3 sluggish (and) 20 slur 64 6 small 66 6 smaller 3 small one 17 smell 118 15 smoother 94 12 snow 183 23 snowy 19 2 Snyder < 43 6 so 10 soaker 59 6 so as i sob 32 4 sober J 9 social 18 socially soever .. 187 24 96 9 2 96 273 177 i53 159 181 60 96 96 53 137 195 35 112 53 279 135 i35 99 99 99 99 112 112 1:2 99 112 99 J33 133 131 64 '3 121 64 149 205 72 131 131 279 53 53 151 257 137 121 "9 46 135 147 53 241 127 273 247 201 137 312 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. so far 17 159 so far as this i 223 softer than 22 2 86 sold 174 22 127 soldier (as a) 19 245 soldiers.. 82 10 72 sole 82 ii 133 Solomon 83 10 72 solution 22 3 123 some 72 6 72 somebody 13 88 somehow 20 193 somehow or other 271 12 114 someone 25 2 86 someone else ii 221 someone or other 270 12 114 some other one 67 o 129 something 60 8 127 something else 107 14 121 something less 108 14 121 sometime 256 12 96 somewhat 257 12 06 son : 16 189 song ii 2 129 SonofGod 244 9 114 soon 131 17 119 so ordered 9 235 Sophia 107 112 sore 91 12 91 sort 33 3 64 sort of 2 211 so that it 18 193 sought i 247 souls 5 279 sound 34 3 64 sounded 18 3 129 sounders (and) 3 211 source 6 155 sources 154 20 121 south 167 21 127 South American 14 249 South Carolina 8 157 southeast 163 21 127 southern 162 21 127 southwest 164 21 127 so well 7 203 space 131 17 131 spaces 34 5 125 spacious 188 24 137 speak i 88 speaker ii 251 speaking 19 253 special 2 88 specially 2 88 specify ii 197 spectacles 85 12 72 speech (see speak) i 88 speeches 16 259 speed 164 19 86 spinal column 248 n 96 spine 98 13 137 spinsters 92 8 60 spirit 27 4 131 spiritual-ly 3 88 spiritualism 2$o n 96 spiritualist 251 n 96 spirituality 252 ii Q& splashed 114 15 137 splendid (a) 4 275 spoil 148 19 131 spoke 246 n 06 spoken 247 ii 96 sport 24 3 137 sprain 12 2 129 sprawl 68 7 ^3 spread 54 7 127 spreadings 204 5 114 pree 55 6 53 spng;-. sprinkle sprite spry 168 square stable 190 stack 96 staffs 19 stag 7 staid 66 standard (to the) standing standpoint stands 18 starving 130 started starting state stated 103 stated that he stated them state legislatures statement state name state of 269 state of New Jersey state respecting States Attorney statesman states that state that stating that stationary 33 stations 32 steadily 82 steal 195 steel 79 stenographer 254 stenographic 255 stenography step 78 stepped 18 stick 69 stickler 87 stiff 80 still 80 stimulate sting 199 stir St. Joe St. Joseph's St. Louis stock 95 stockholders stomach stone-work (the) 314 stood 2 stop 82 stopper 83 store 23 stories storm 68 stout 102 stove 119 stoves 54 Stowe 109 St. Paul straggle 85 straggler 86 strain 146 strained 37 strainer /6 strange strangest strangle -. 99 streak 71 stream 72 street strength SIGN. LINE. PAGE. 27 'I 9 64 137 207 60 60 60 M7 225 245 123 131 217 247 123 189 225 249 149 '$ .'85 203 245 151 M7 149 60 60 72 'S. 60 72 H9 60 72 247 i 145 159 197 114 127 60 5o 123 2 60 123 123 i35 112 149 53 53 121 64 % 2 H 60 60 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 313 SIGN. strew 36 Strict 54 strictly stride 76 strife 96 strike from the record string 98 stripped , strive 97 stroke strong 175 strong hands strop 84 stropper 85 structure 180 stuck student 50 study 80 stung 87 style 127 styles subdue 166 subdues 86 subject subjected 115 subjection 154 subjective 155 subscribe 132 subsequent subserve the substantial identity 258 substantially subtle 138 succeed 264 success 68 such 119 such a note such a one 136 such are 158 such are to have 79 such as such had 140 such had not 15 such has been 20 such has been taken 78 such have 148 such have had 4 such it 130 such ought 150 such ought not 16 suchought to have. 5 such will 135 such will have 5 2 such will have had 152 such will have it 38 such will not 16 such would 14 such would have had 4 such would not 151 suction 198 Sue 18 suffer 47 suggest suit (the) Sunday sunshine superintendent's (the) supplement 208 supplies supply support 162 suppose 126 suppressed 187 suppression 20 Supreme Being 259 sure surely 79 surmount 74 surpasses 106 LINE. PAGE. SIGN. 5 135 surprise 82 7 119 surprised 83 3 149 surpriseus 7 60 sur-rebuttal 8 60 surrender their homes 98 10 189 surrogate 8 60 surrogate's 12 203 surround 38 8 60 survey 107 14 193 suspend 46 22 137 suspended 43 16 153 suspense 42 7 j6o suspension 44 7 60 suspicion 47 23 119 sustain 114 11 237 sustained 7 137 sustains 22 10 131 swagger 198 11 137 swayed 199 16 133 sways 107 16 259 swears 21 137 sweeter 87 13 72 swine 124 8 88 switch 91 15 133 swivel 75 2 96 swooned ' no 2 96 swore 167 17 121 sworn 13 98 sworn in his own behalf 4 253 sympathy 12 96 synonym 194 18 159 synonymous 32 18 123 system LINE. 8 PAGE. 94 94 153 221 6 4 191 191 T'" 5 72 T (the initial) 15 127 taciturn 180 17 223 take 17 127 take a 178 20 123 take it 135 10 119 taken 39 20 243 taken up 40 18 125 takes place 2 121 takes us 5 3 135 take them 5 86 take you 50 19 121 talent 1 131 talk 82 17 135 talkers 2 96 talking about 2 121 tapers 7 127 task 83 17 137 taste 156 7 121 tattler 166 2 96 taught 102 5 119 Taylor 2 137 Tchay 18 125 1 131 technical 177 2 96 telegraph 115 25 131 telegraphic: 3 27 telephone 167 6 121 tell 11 239 teller 174 i 223 tell it 90 15 195 tellofit 166 5 277 tells us 86 13 149 tell that 6 114 tell the difference 142 11 255 tell us 106 7 149 tell you 21 123 tell you the 16 127 temperance society 260 24 121 temperance (the) 3 121 temperate 199 12 96 temptation 120 6 81 ten 10 137 tenant 19 10 127 tenderness 9 60 tenses 53 125 125 125 125 125 129 187 125 133 125 123 223 64 123 121 127 "9 123 179 177 251 129 33 105 137 74 121 <$ 7 78 153 133 213 94. 249 199 159 86 121 133 119 179 33 96 135 207 123 121 119 125 125 159 273 133 119 99 129 279 60 314 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY SIGN. tension 42 tenth 65 Teresa 105 terminated terminate the terminating terms (and) terms upon which you (the) territorial 180 territory 179 Terry 47 test 73 testament 128 testamentary 28 testator testified testifies as follows testify 92 testimonial testimony 316 testimony for plaintiff testimony for the defence tests testy....: 135 Texas than than is necessary thank than ourselves that 5 thata 57 that fact that is 103 that is just that is not thatit that may be that no more time that note that there 96 that they are that this resolution that we may that you 107 that you cannot that you may , the (written upward) the agent 317 the audience 265 the author lib the beauty , 309 the best and worst 279 the bill of lading the brush the charges 114 the cipher the city 269 the conditions 163 the conquerors 318 the court Thee (the letter) thee (the pronoun) 19 the enclosed the eye 31 the farm 75 the first 13 the first and last 281 the first and least 282 the first and second 280 the first position 285 the first subject 284 the first thing 283 the form 115 the full the game 67 the human race 161 the hundred 316 the importance LINE. PACK 6 135 5 112 112 ID 187 4 189 4 189 13 145 II J57 23 i3i 23 131 6 119 7 60 16 133 4 119 7 I 2 I 4 181 5 187 12 135 18 i5i 19 114 5 187 2 213 17 159 17 129 i 157 18 81 12 179 12 74 2O 149 I 64 4 72 18 179 7 78 8 179 16 157 ii I5i 16 179 12 179 16 207 12 133 12 157 16 241 20 237 14 135 IQ i53 SIGN. their '(there) no theirs to deserve 86 the keepers 318 the king 79 the lamp 70 the lash 155 them the man 50 the manager 268 the manner., 150 the morrow 118 the most 60 themselves 217 the muscles 76 then tha name 66 the name is rr.:ne 47 thence 122 thenceforth 60 t henceforward 172 then the then the amount the organ 146 the other 156 the owners the package the patent no the people 3 T o the plaintiff 3'6 the rain 82 there 119 there are a thereby (and) there can no 102 therefor-e 186 there had not 52 there has not been an hour there have been there is a there is enough there is no there is no occasion there is no question now the remarkaole 161 there may be 39 there may be little 36 there may be some 58 thereof 115 thereon 140 there ought 116 there they are thereto 170 thereunto 36 there were there would not 52 these the second i< the Shekinah 318 the stock the stone 314 the thing 117 the third 18 the truth 143 the universe : 263 the value 117 the very 151 the work 163 the world 310 they 27 they are i they are returned to us they have they may be likely 4 they were they were once 318 they will 184 they will be likely LINE. PAGE. II 78 11 127 20 114 8 72 6 72 15 86 ii 74 4 72 17 6 17 86 10 94 4 72 7 114 7 72 17 81 5 72 6 133 16 137 8 125 22 J 35 7 185 18 223 12 86 20 135 10 M5 T 4 145 8 78 17 114 19 114 10 72 it 78 i 255 ii 157 24 121 4 114 7 123 6 159 i 223 14 153 ll 235 17 243 20 235 15 9 22 5 17 7 5 i 20 127 125 J35 i37 133 i3i 217 135 137 i57 123 145 112 114 145 H4 78 112 86 86 86 114 27 86 151 i47 86 7S 114 135 199 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 315 SIGN. they would 10 thick 159 thine 23 thing things 157 think thinking think it 62 thinks 56 thinks his the 54 think you can thinner 90 third 10 third instant thirsty 60 thirteen thirteenth 23 thirteen thousand 24 thirtieth n thirty thirty-fifth 20 thirty-first 12 thirty-fourth 19 thr ty hundred 22 thirty-second 14 thirty-third 17 thirty thousand 21 thirty-three 16 this this being understood this city this codicil this company this fact this has not taken 67 this is 42 this is a-n this is done this note this paper this question this subject thither .". Si thorough 12 thoroughly (each one) 164 those those are thou 9 though thought thoughtlessness 222 thought that amount (I) thousand-th (the word) 117 thousand-th (the numeral) three three-fourths 85 three hundredth three million three quarters (see three fourths) three thousand thrice 83 throb 107 throne of grace 243 through 106 through one 19 1 through our books throughout Thursday thus 86 tny 20 thyself 108 tickle 178 tie 13 till till you 145 till you can 55 time timed LINE. PAGE. 2 135 20 133 3 129 4 16 8 7 6 4 10 74 3 157 8 137 4 78 7 121 13 199 12 129 I 112 2 147 8 135 99 2 112 2 112 I 112 99 2 I 2 I I 2 2 I 2 2 I 2 I 1 2 2 1 2 2 112 2 112 18 88 19 179 7 179 5 193 12 159 16 147 9 6 127 14 221 H 149 13 147 12 193 18 237 6 237 6 64 2 i "55 19 86 19 88 II 183 I 46 12 74 7 . 98 7 114 i 219 10 78 99 99 112 99 99 137 129 'H 00 123 I 4 Q 98 145 72 27 129 119 27 81 86 94 74 273 time of the day tinker , 102 tinner ^ tippler 74 tirade 13 tired 8, tided 62 to to a 8 to all 12 to all of to all the to an 9 toast 74 toaster 75 to be to be able 128 to be able to 131 to be held to be somebody 267 to be sure 32 to be there 16 to be transacted to date today today's 42 to do to do this together to go 16 to have 73 to have been 76 told 19 tolerable 112 tomorrow 119 ton tonight tons 132 too took took you 58 tooth 31 to our 84 to our own 34 to ours 33 to ourselves 219 tore 8S toss 35 tosses 146 total to the 10 to the owners Tott 100 touch 67 tough 7 toward "317 toward you 317 to whom 67 town towns 32 township 88 to you track trade traders (and) trading train 104 trainer 30 traitor 126 trample 182 transacting transaction 84 transactions transcription (the) transition transitions transitorial 80 translation SO LINE. 5 9 17 7 2 II 64 121 53 (21 T2f 245 1 49 72 60 60 74 127 78 119 179 145 7 i 78 74 243 74 64 137 94 153 9* 133 65 74 94 119 121 86 86 114 53 127 119 273 112 131 (-0 114 114 72 145 133 137 M7 157 157 125 121 137 135 181 60 60 3 i6 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. SIGN. transmit 128 trans instantiation 28 vreacle 75 treasure 82 treated 122 tremenduous 151 Trenton trial 30 trial of this case tried 47 trifle trim 56 Trinitarianism 72 trip 113 trips trouble (save) trounces 56 true 07 truly yours 27 trust 65 truth truthful 193 truthfully 193 try 17 try a Tuesday tuition 31 tunnel 73 turn 4 twain 155 twelfth 67 twelve twenty-ieth twenty-eight twenty-first 4 twenty-four twenty-one 3 twenty-second 8 twenty-two 7 twice 151 twig 35 twin 34 twin 134 two two hundred two million two thousand type ultimate 155 15 ultimo 18 unacccompanied 125 unanimous consent 17 unawares 86 13 unclaimed 15 uncommon 158 20 unconscious 5 under underhand 268 12 understand 172 2 understand the matter 9 understood 173 2 undertaken 152 19 under the circumstances 2 i under the house 314 18 undivided 129 n undoubted 188 24 undoubtedly received them 3 unfinished business 16 unfortunate n unimportant 20 union 24 Union League I United States 18 U. S. District Court i Universalism 166 3 uniyerse-al-ity. 17 University of Pa 165 3 LINE. PAGE. 16 137 4 127 7 53 II 121 16 135 19 129 2 177 1 53 225 6 123 17 159 7 127 9 "9 1 78 273 6 149 7 121 ii 129 a 121 60 12 81 4 114 4 114 2 53 10 147 6 145 3 60 7 ' 53 I 127 23 "9 5 112 99 99 4 145 I 112 7 M5 I 112 X 112 I 112 I? 131 3 94 3 94 17 125 99 99 99 99 20 225 149 112 243 72 145 114 114 255 114 123 137 114 64 133 147 235 151 221 81 18 unkind(and) SIGN. LINE. 9 PAGE. 279 unless 59 8 125 unless he can prove 20 223 unless he was 9 189 unpaid 2 145 unprofitable , 12 unquestionably I" 197 unsaid 9 275 unsatisfactory ( and) 6 239 unscored , X38 18 135 unscrew 166 2 114 unseasoned 12 2 123 unseemly 163 I 114 unselfish I6 4 I 114 unstability 183 3 114 unstrung 165 2 114 until II 81 until the day of 9 191 until you ..... 158 16 86 unto 96 8 94 up I 74 uphold 7 upon 14 l upon another occasion 19 209 upon it .... 118 I; 133 upon the 4 149 upon the plaintiff upon this plaintiff upright judge (the) 7 12 223 223 259 up the 42 (5 121 up to date 2 up to the standard 19 147 upward (and) l8 245 urge 14 241 Uriah 21 46 us d "4 use ( pronounced use) use (pronounced uze) 18 19 74 74 used .... 269 17 96 used some .... 61 6 94 useful .... 194 4 114 usefulness .... 195 5 114 useless 20 157 .... 41 4 53 users II 155 usual 16 74 usually 16 74 usury .... 179 23 121 Utah 13 i; 3 utilize 17 88 utilized , .... 294 15 114 utilizes 270 IQ 96 utmost 12 255 Utopia 14 245 utter ... 131 17 i37 uttered 19 225 utterly ... 76 10 i33 utterly wretched 7 279 V 33 V (theinitial) 105 vacation ... 79 10 120 vagrancy ... 110 8 86 vague ... 159 20 135 van ... 26 4 120 vain 6 i vale ... 37 4 55 validity (the) 9 223 vallev 2 I 131 valuable 20 179 valuation (the) 17 value 9 74 valued 6 values n IJ3 vanished ... 16-J 17 *6 variation 17 223 variety . 10 153 varnish (and) i 235 veer ,.,. ... 36 4 53 HAVEN S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 317 SIGN. vegetable kingdom 36 veil 26 vein venerable ventilate 104 verbally verbal one . verbatim (a) verdict verdure 80 verify 78 Vermont versatile 160 versification 71 versificative 72 versify 70 versus (vs. ) vertical very very little very much very respectfully very truly very truly yours very well vest 32 vice 39 vice-president vicious 42 victi ms vie 16 view 17 viewed 191 views 81 vine 37 violated viper 81 Virginia virtually virtue 88 visible 176 vision 106 visit 103 vital importance vocation 78 vocatives 146 voice void 67 volatile 174 volunteered vote 4 voted 233 vs.... vulgar 48 W(the initial) wag 5 waif 195 wail (well) wait walk walked Wallace Walter 28 Walters wampum 23 wan 195 wants 83 want you to make ward 21 warm 6 was was a-n 86 was as 73 was as the 98 was found wash n5 was he 92 Washington LINE. PAGE. 5 131 4 129 19 159 14 255 J 3 119 6 221 15 235 3 273 8 225 6 64 10 127 ii 159 20 125 9 121 9 121 9 121 i 177 20 159 3 81 9 203 12 147 4 151 20 147 IO 145 13 247 4 131 5 38 i 251 6 "9 20 273 3 27 3 27 24 121 IO 72 4 60 JO 225 8 53 4 153 16 259 ii 4 3 M 135 13 133 5 257 IO 129 19 131 18 225 9 119 22 131 15 193 I 64 8 114 i 177 6 135 105 I 53 25 129 8 81 5 159 19 275 2 14 205 183 4 123 3 179 3 127 25 119 ii 72 19 149 2 64 I 53 20 n 6 78 6 78 19 201 i5 125 6 7 9 245 LINE. PAGE. 14 187 23 74 SIGN. was his was it was it as 80 was it not 12 was not 62 6 wasp 63 8 was that I4 was the 89 6 was there 76 5 was the same 20 watch 63 8 watched the 12 watchfulness 192 24 water 88 7 wave 3 i Waverly. . . Way ways 108 14 we 6 i we admit ii weak 17 weakens 86 13 weaker 14 wealthy 106 14 we are no 14 we are always 12 we are compelled to pay (and). ii- we are in receipt of notice 14 we are not 5 3 we are not quite clear i we are obliged to you 17 we are of 63 4 we are off 16 2 we are paying 9 we are very much 19 wearisome 163 19 weather 89 7 we beg to reassert that 18 we beg to say that 3 we bought 3 we can 3 we can manage 10 we cannot 5 we cannot use them (and) 19 we do 5i 6 wedge 87 ii we did 20 we did not think 24 3 Wednesday ii we do 20 we do not 19 we do not know 10 we do not know whose 6 week 4 i week ago ii weekly 6 we enclose 9 we enclose letter 12 weep 67 9 weepest 142 .18 we find ' 12 we had 16 we have 13 we have abandoned it (and).... 12 we have also made 17 we have been doing 16 we have had 14 \ve have looked 9 we have made 20 we have no 15 we have no objection. 9 we have not 2 we have received 7 we have received your letter.. . 15 we have returned 20 we have sold 10 we have the enclosed 8 203 94 119 I8 2 78 78 183 123 251 53 M7 33 137 137 177 191 72 153 123 135 151 151 153 147 86 129 M7 145 86 64 M7 149 149 241 159 M7 147 46 127 145 145 147 145 149 53 235 157 157 145 121 133 157 147 145 151 159 159 M9 149 145 147 153 157 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. weigh , SIGN. LINK. PAGE. 4 I 31 weighers weighing the weight of an weight of evidence weights we know you can welcome 62 welfaie 58 we live well we may 159 we may be ". 3 we may be able 31 we may not 56 we may not be 32 we may not do 48 we may not know 100 we may not know them 8 we mean 54 we meant 55 we meant not , 57 we met 39 we might not 58 we might not have 26 we might not have been $6 we must we need every thing ordered. ... we need the were we receive the we regret we regret this we remain we remitted were not we respectfully caution were there were they we return we send we sent the we shall be pleased (and) we shall expect west 162 we stand ' westerly 178 western 179 West Virginia : we therefore we think you are we want we wanted the we want the goods we were 66 we \\erenot 100 we will 118 we will have we will have them we will not 49 we \villnotbe 87 we will not be responsible we will not have 54 we will not have been 2 we will not remit we will now we yet whale 9 what what action what are your best whatever 184 what is what is the next what is your age what is your business what is your name 149 5 J49 16 18 5 2?3 259 123 121 245 81 121 86 129 86 123 127 133 137 119 151 153 147 /4 201 i?7 M7 145 155 147 135 J 97 185 157 159 147 147 147 137 259 137 137 153 149 157 157 157 147 119 137 78 237 147 86 125 149 129 123 155 199 153 53 74 239 MS 114 225 185 219 187 179 SIGN. LINE PAGE what is your name in full 181 whatother 18 185 what public 6 177 whatreason 6 189 whatsideof the road 11 179 whattodo 20 147 what will you 5 235 what you 19 153 what you may have to say 17 151 Whay (hway) 33 wheat 93 6 86 wheels 12 249 when 11 74 when I was iS 193 whensoever 226 8 114 where 10 74 whereas 63 4 7^ whereat .. 186 24 119 whereby 174 22 119 where do you reside 7 179 wherefore 187 4 114 where has he gone , 175 22 13; wherein 170 22 131 where is your place of "business 10 181 where it is 13 185 whereof 166 21 131 whereon 167 21 131 wheresoever 225 7 114 where the 126 16 131 whereto 127 16 131 whereunto 128 16 131 whereupon 168 21 131 wherever 166 21 131 whether 90 7 64 whether 1 17 1 = 1 whether it 18 r-- whether or not i? whether there 91 7 64 whether there have 107 7 78 whether there have been 83 n 135 whew 5 i 31 whey 7 i 31 which 12 which are 39 3 which are not 26 4 135 which are of 64 4 86 which caused 7 177 whichever n 2 133 which had ". 60 8 133 which had not n 2 125 which has just 8 1*3 which have 69 5 86 which have it 196 25 123 which! ii 197 which is 163 18 86 which is best 265 14 96 which is worth 8 159 whichit 147 i 96 which must 271 20 96 which not which of them 2 223 which ought 146 i 96 which ought not 44 6 13? which ought to have 10 2 119 which shall be 14 241 which should be shown 271 19 96 which the defendant says 9 223 which were 128 16 121 which will 7 i 86 which will it 149 2 96 which will not 87 n 123 which will place 13 241 which would 60 x 133 which would have 148 2 96 which would not n 2 12; which you 14 197 which you gave 3 213 which you nave 2 145 HAVEN'S PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. 319 SIGN. LINE, FACE. SIGN. .Mich you read 261 . 13 96 win I which you refer (to) 10 149 while 4 II 72 windy 8 while its 269 18 '& wine while living H 197 wing 2 while your price 9 147 winter ... 79 whilst 51 7 121 wintry . .. 31 whip 12 2 125 wire 7 whistle 10 I 53 Wisconsin ... 61 wisdom white 94 6 86 wish who 65 wish a who a 32 2 72 wished w who an 33 2 72 wisher 53 who are now engaged 16 273 wishes who can 6 247 wish their ... 54 whoever 185 4 114 with whoever they are(there) 56 7 135 with a who have 7i 5 86 withal whole 194 25 137 withholding it wholesale 3 201 within wholesale dealer 6 207 within the wholesome 53 7 46 with it , ... 164 whom 65 with other whom a 35 3 72 without whom an 37 3 72 with reference-to ... 125 who may not 271 20 96 with such whom I 36 3 72 with their ... 108 whom the 3 72 with them whom you will , 63 6 94 with the others whose tji 4 72 with the plaintiff whose names are thereunto 191 with these whosesoever 228 g 114 with this whosoever 227 8 114 with those who the 34 2 72 with us who will 16 I 86 with you why 6 I 31 with your why did he 8 207 witness why did you 3 219 witnessed both why did you not get receipts... why did you not give such 2 19 217 177 witnesses witness for the plaintiff (a). . ... 316 why not 5 213 woman ii why there can be 74 10 133 womanly....^ ... 82 why there have 1 06 7 7 women 3 why there have been 56 137 wonderful-ly ... 76 wide 18 159 wonders . . . 270 width 9 199 wonder who can ... 40 widths 7 won't ... 24 wield 59 8 135 wood 200 wife 18 275 wooed ... 42 wilderness 86 7 64 word Wiley 5 Word of God ... 245 will 20 74 words 171 Willard 4 207 wore will be 309 16 114 work will be excused 4 237 worked ... ns will be less 163 19 86 workingman . .. 196 will be re ached 17 153 workingmen ... 197 will be taken 4 241 workman will forward them to you (and), will have 52 6 7 147 137 workmen Works of God . . . 246 William 12 149 world willing : 270 18 96 worn ... 107 willingly.. . '. 7 255 worth (which is) will it i7 237 worthy ... 5 will just 18 185 would will oblige 2 153 would a 12 will please come to order will please read them will please say will please signify the same will save you 4 4 17 8 235 235 243 235 155 would be would not would not now (and I) would you wound 108 ... . 55 will take place 17 237 wrathfulness ... 124 will you 195 25 137 Wren ... 14 will you be 120 15 wretched will you give the 183 Wright 4 will you take 12 237 write 2 Wilson 2 145 write it ... 132 LINE. PAGE. 17 21? 53 2OI 53 121 125 60 279 74 ' 7& 245 7& 74 X P 81 *8i 'g '8 94 125 157 223 M7 193 157 177 217 114 219 123 125 127 64 114 119 197 SI 127 96 81 114 98 127 159 135 74 119 193 213 207 127 17 137 HAVENS PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPH V. SIGN. LINE. PAGE. writer 183 23 121 writers(the) 12 159 write them 18 225 writing 182 23 131 writing letters 36 5 133 written 142 18 135 wrong 17 219 X (the initial) 105 Y(the initial) 105 Yay 33 year 12 74 yearly 67 . 5 7 years 66 5 78 years ago i 249 yell ii 2 119 yes 16 74 yes sir 17 74 yesterday 5 88 yesterday's 266 15 96 yet 15 71 yet the 12 78 yield 23 2 64 yielded 31 4 121 yielding 7 275 yoke 34 5 121 yon 98 13 131 yonder 59 8 137 yore 124 16 119 you 13 74 you admit that 15 209 youareat 18 151 you are in a 6 157 you are positive that you ii 209 you are reading 5 185 you are the plaintiff in this suit 5 177 you asked him 16 213 you can 94 12 133 youcanbe 112 14 121 you can have 31 4 137 you do 95 12 121 you did not notice 13 203 you gave 20 147 you had the money 18 155 you have been 43 6 123 you have had 4 237 you have said 5 221 you knew 2 197 you know the 12 177 . you may 174 22 129 you may as well have 56 7 133 you may be certain 5 i 6 youmayhave in 14 125 you may have it 3 157 you misunderstood the question 6 199 you must 78 7 94 vou must be 79 7 94 SIGN. LINE. PAGE. you must have 80 8 94 you must have been 59 8 119 youmustnot 164 21 119 you must not be 90 12 135 you must not have 23 3 137 youmustnot talk 19 243 young 6 74 your 17 74 yourbusmess 7 iSi you read 261 12 96 your early attention 2 is? you refer 8 217 your favor 4 147 your favor of recent date re- ceived 62 8 119 your invoice 6 149 yom judgments 5 22^ your letter 2 147 your letter bearing date of the 15 inst. athand. 8 i 137 your next lesson 164 19 86 your own 12 15; yours 20 2 78 yourself 214 6 114 yourselves 216 7 114 your signature 12 191 yours of the gth inst. athand.. . 20 3 123 yours of today's mail received.. 7 i 129 yours truly 13 145 your terms 3 149 your territory n 153 your testimony 4 205 you saw him 7 193 you say 17 213 you send out 7 155 you sent 5 153 you shall 100 13 127 you shall have 70 9 123 youth 34 5 31 you think 172 22 129 you took 16 165 you will 154 20 119 you will also 5 153 you will be 184 23 127 you will do 7 i 135 you will have been 43 6 129 you will observe . 9 157 you will take this case 8 225 you will understand 19 157 Z 33 Z (theinitial) 105 Zabrisky 10 151 zeal i 275 Zhee (the letter) 33 zither 82 6 64 & 33 THE END. JHauer/s Practical Phonography Actual Bookkeeping $2.00 1.50 1.00 C0/T\plete \ Modern Journalism ( Including Typewriting, ) ~r L PV , / Business Correspondences penmanship, spemn g ,[ .50 I ^Yt" I^O^LfR I Punctuation, etc. J t&A*. LJUUryo \ Shorthand & Typewriting Speed Readers, each, .10 Sent promptly on receipt of price. Never sent C. O. D. nor for examination. Remit to CURTIS HAVEN, P. O. Box 1162, Philadelphia, Pa. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY Los Angeles This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. ' r ' W #- 1ft <# Form L9-10m-3,'48(A7920)444 UNIVERSITY of CAUFOKWu A' 1 LOS A" iASSS!SS8* LIBRARY FACILITY A 000 571 380 5